Home

636 026-20 (SW01)

1. FACE MILLING Cycle 232 Advanced programming features software option Cycle 232 is used to face mill a level surface in multiple infeeds while taking the finishing allowance into account Three machining strategies are available Strategy O0389 0 Meander machining stepover outside the surface being machined Strategy Q389 1 Meander machining stepover within the surface being machined Strategy Q389 2 Line by line machining retraction and stepover at the positioning feed rate From the current position the TNC positions the tool at rapid traverse FMAX to the starting position using positioning logic 1 It the current position in the spindle axis is greater than the 2nd set up clearance the control positions the tool first in the machining plane and then in the spindle axis Otherwise it first moves to the 2nd set up clearance and then in the machining plane The starting point in the machining plane is offset from the edge of the workpiece by the tool radius and the safety clearance to the side The tool then moves in the spindle axis at the positioning feed rate to the first plunging depth calculated by the control Strategy 0389 0 3 The tool then advances to the stopping point 2 at the feed rate for milling The end point lies outside the surface The control calculates the end point from the programmed starting point the programmed length the programmed safety clearance to the side and the tool radius
2. Polar coordinate radius Circular radius with GO2 G03 G05 Rounding radius with G25 G26 G27 Tool radius with G99 Spindle speed Oriented spindle stop with G36 Tool definition with G99 Tool call Next tool with G51 Axis parallel to X axis Axis parallel to Y axis Axis parallel to Z axis X axis Y axis Z axis End of block Contour cycles List of subcontour programs G37 P01 Define contour data G120 Q1 Detine Call drill Contour cycle pilot drilling G121 O10 Cycle call Define Call roughing mill Contour cycle rough out G122 O10 Cycle call Define Call finishing mill Contour cycle floor finishing G123 Q11 Cycle call Define Call finishing mill Contour cycle side finishing G124 Q11 Cycle call End of main program return M02 Contour subprograms G98 G98 LO Radius compensation of the contour subprograms Intnl pocket Extnl island Clockwise CW G42 RR Counterclockwise CCW G41 RL Clockwise CVV G41 RL Counterclockwise CCVV G42 RR Coordinate transformation Datum shift Mirror image Rotation Scaling factor Working plane Q param G54 X 20 Y 30 G54 XO YO ZO Z 10 G28 X G28 G73 H 45 G73 H 0 G72 F 0 8 G72 F1 G80 A 10 B 10 G80 C 15 eter definitions Assignment Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division Root sine Cosine Root sum of squares c Va2 b2 If equal go to label number If not equal go to label number If gr
3. ProsRAN Select the desired screen layout GRAPHICS 32 Operating panel The TNC 620 is delivered with an integrated keyboard The figure at right shows the controls and displays of the keyboard 1 File management Online calculator MOD function HELP function Programming modes Machine operating modes Initiation of programming dialog Arrow keys and GOTO jump command Numerical input and axis selection Navigation keys OF PhP W N The functions of the individual keys are described on the inside front cover m Machine panel buttons e g NC START or NC STOP are pr described in the manual for your machine tool HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 HEIDENHAIN Manual operation 140 003 150 000 m E 360 000 s iF mm nin T 111 0 S IST 10 19 138 S OVR 1 2 Visual Display Unit and Keybou 1 3 Operating Modes Manual Operation and Electronic Handwheel The Manual Operation mode is required for setting up the machine Manual operation eee tool In this operating mode you can position the machine axes manually or by increments and set the datums n The Electronic Handwheel mode of operation allows you to move the 31 857 amp machine axes manually with the HR electronic handwheel 25 642 4 134 992 yu Soft keys for selecting the screen layout select as described previously Q 000 Window Sf Key 321 790 Positions SEE a ee i 1 3 Operating Modes NON Ka i ACTL a T
4. m 10 1 Principle and Overview 10 1 Principle and Overview You can program an entire family of parts in a single part program You do this by entering variables called Q parameters instead of fixed numerical values Q parameters can represent information such as Coordinate values Feed rates Spindle speeds Cycle data Q parameters also enable you to program contours that are defined with mathematical functions You can also use Q parameters to make the execution of machining steps depend on logical conditions In conjunction with FK programming you can also combine contours that do not have NC compatible dimensions with Q parameters Q parameters are designated by the letter Q and a number between 0 and 1999 They are grouped according to various ranges Freely applicable parameters globally effective Q1600 to for all programs stored in the TNC memory 01999 Freely applicable parameters as long as no QO to Q99 overlapping with SL cycles can occur globally effective for the respective program Parameters for special TNC functions Q100 to Q199 Parameters that are primarily used for cycles Q200 to Q1399 globally effective for all programs stored in the TNC memory Parameters that are primarily used for call active 01400 to OEM cycles globally effective for all programs Q1499 that are stored in the TNC memory Parameters that are primarily used for DEF active 01500 to OEM cycles globally effective for all programs 0
5. 5 Note that FN23 and FN24 automatically overwrite not only the result parameters but also the two subsequent parameters HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 10 5 Calculating Circles j il 10 6 Decisions with Q Parameters 10 6 Ilf Then Decisions with Q Parameters Function The TNC can make logical If Then decisions by comparing a Q parameter with another Q parameter or with a numerical value If the condition is fulfilled the TNC continues the program at the label that is programmed after the condition for information on labels see Labeling Subprograms and Program Section Repeats page 370 If it is not fulfilled the TNC continues with the next block To call another program as a subprogram enter PGM CALL after the block with the target label Unconditional jumps An unconditional jump is programmed by entering a conditional jump whose condition is always true Example FN9 IF 10 EQU 10 GOTO LBL1 Programming If Then decisions Press the JUMP soft key to call the If Then conditions The TNC then displays the following soft keys FNS IF EQUAL GO TO oie Example FN9 IF Q1 EQU 03 GOTO LBL UPCAN25 goTo If the two values or parameters are equal jump to the given label FN 10 IF UNEQUAL GO TO s me Example FN10 IF 10 NE Q5 GOTO LBL 10 GoTo If the two values or parameters are unequal jump to the given label FN11 IF GREATER THAN GO TO ma Example FN11 IF Q1 GT 10 GOTO LBL 5 GoTo If the
6. left hand thread A E QE Dy V we Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute value Coordinate of the workpiece surface 2nd set up clearance Q204 incremental value Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece clamping devices can occur Infeed depth for chip breaking Q257 incremental value Depth at which TNC carries out chip breaking Ny 8 2 Cycles for Drilling p and Thread Milling HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 247 il Retraction rate for chip breaking Q256 The TNC multiplies the pitch Q239 by the programmed value and retracts the tool by the calculated value during chip breaking If you enter Q256 0 the TNC retracts the tool completely from the hole to the set up clearance for chip release gt Angle for spindle orientation Q336 absolute value Angle at which the TNC positions the tool before machining the thread This allows you to regroove the thread if required gt RPM factor for retraction 0403 Factor by which the TNC increases the spindle soeed and therefore also the retraction feed rate when retracting from the drill hole Inout range 0 0001 to 10 E When using the rom factor for retraction ensure that a C gear range change is excluded If necessary the TNC limits the speed so that retraction is executed in the currently active gear range Retracting after a program interruption If you interrupt program run during thread cutting
7. zA A HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Definition of workpiece blank Tool call Retract the tool Define cycle 80 90 100 8 2 Cycles for Drilling ane and Thread Milling j i 8 2 Cycles for Drilling ing and Thread Milling 2 70 Approach hole 1 spindle ON Cycle call Approach hole 2 call cycle Approach hole 3 call cycle Approach hole 4 call cycle Retract in the tool axis end program 8 3 Cycles for Milling Pockets L Studs and Slots V Overview Cycle Soft hey Page 7 4 POCKET MILLING rectangular 272 Roughing cycle without automatic pre im ond positioning YY 212 POCKET FINISHING rectangular He 274 p Finishing cycle with automatic pre im am a positioning 2nd set up clearance ww Q 213 POCKET FINISHING rectangular 213 276 O Finishing cycle with automatic pre iA positioning 2nd set up clearance 5 CIRCULAR POCKET 278 Roughing cycle without automatic pre jm positioning gt 214 CIRCULAR POCKET FINISHING 214 280 d Finishing cycle with automatic pre jm 2 positioning 2nd set up clearance P 215 CIRCULAR STUD FINISHING 215 282 amp Finishing cycle with automatic pre WO S positioning 2nd set up clearance O 210 SLOT RECIP PLNG 210 284 ap Roughing finishing cycle with automatic im 00 pre positioning with reciprocating plunge infeed 211 CIRCULAR SLOT 21 287 Roughing finishing cycle with automatic Pa pre positioning with reciprocating plunge infeed HEIDENHA
8. 504 Settings for the NC editor Generate backup files TRUE Generate backup file after editing NC programs FALSE Do not generate backup file after editing NC programs Behavior of the cursor after deletion of lines TRUE Cursor is placed on the preceding line after deletion ITNC behavior FALSE Cursor is placed on the following line after deletion Behavior of the cursor on the first or last line TRUE Cursor jumps from end to beginning of program FALSE Cursor does not jump from end to beginning of program Line break with multiline blocks ALL Always display all lines ACT Only display the lines of the active block completely NO Only display all lines when block is edited Activate help TRUE Always display help graphics during input FALSE Only display help graphics if HELP was activated by pressing the key Behavior of the soft key row after a cycle entry TRUE The cycle soft key row remains active after a cycle definition FALSE The cycle soft key row is hidden after a cycle definition Safety check when deleting blocks TRUE Display confirmation question when deleting an NC block FALSE Do not display confirmation question when deleting an NC block Program length for which the geometry is to be checked 100 to 9999 Program length for which the geometry is to be checked Paths for the end user List of drives and or directories Drives or directories entered here are shown in the TNC s file manager Universal Time Greenwich Mean Time
9. File sorting Select the folder in which you wish to sort the files Select the SORT soft key Select the soft key with the corresponding display criterion SORT Additional functions Protecting a file Canceling file protection Move the highlight to the file you want to protect are To select the additional functions press the MORE FUNCTIONS FUNCTIONS soft key PROTECT To enable file protection press the PROTECT soft a key The file is distinguished by a symbol To cancel file protection proceed in the same way using the UNPROTECT soft key Select the editor Move the highlight in the right window onto the file you want to open ae To select the additional functions press the MORE FUNCTIONS soft key ae To select the editor with which to open the selected EDITOR file press the SELECT EDITOR soft key Mark the desired editor Press the OK soft key to open the file Activate or deactivate USB devices ae To select the additional functions press the MORE FUNCTIONS soft key Shift the soft key row Select the soft key for activating or deactivating 90 Data transfer to or from an external data medium Manual operation Programm i ng CS You might have to set up the data interface before you HEBEL H can transfer data to an external data medium see TNC nc_prog screens x H TNC x He Setting the Data Interfaces on page 485 t File nane Bytes statud Fale nane Bytes statud PE
10. Restore workpiece blank to the detail magnification in RESET which it was last shown FORM Reset detail magnification so that the machined uzNDON workpiece or workpiece blank is displayed as it was FORM programmed with BLK FORM CS With the WINDOW BLANK FORM soft key the TNC returns the graphic of the workpiece blank to its originally programmed dimensions Measuring the machining time Program Run modes of operation The timer counts and displays the time from program start to program end The timer stops whenever machining is interrupted Test run The timer displays the time that the TNC calculates from the duration of tool movements The time calculated by the TNC can only conditionally be used for calculating the production time because the TNC does not account for the duration of machine dependent interruptions such as tool change Activating the stopwatch function Shift the soft key rows until the TNC displays the following soft keys with the stopwatch functions Store displayed time STORE Display the sum of stored time ADD and displayed time Or Clear displayed time coe ee 462 11 2 Show the Workpiece in the Working Space Advanced Graphic Features Software Option Function This MOD function enables you to graphically check the position of the workpiece blank or reference point in the machine s working space and to activate work space monitoring in the Test Run mode of operation with th
11. The HEIDENHAIN conversational programming format is an especially easy method of writing programs Interactive graphics illustrate the individual machining steps for programming the contour If a production drawing is not dimensioned for NC the FK free contour programming feature Advanced programming features software option performs the necessary calculations automatically Workpiece machining can be graphically simulated either during or before actual machining Advanced graphic features software option You can also enter and test one program while the control is running another Compatibility The scope of functions of the TNC 620 does not correspond to that of the TNC 4xx and iTNC 530 series of controls Therefore machining programs created on HEIDENHAIN contouring controls starting from the TNC 150 B may not always run on the TNC 620 If NC blocks contain invalid elements the TNC will mark them as ERROR blocks during download 30 1 2 Visual Display Unit and Keyboard Visual display unit The TNC is delivered with a 15 inch TFT color flat panel display see figure at top right 1 oO oh Q oN Header When the TNC is on the selected operating modes are shown in the screen header the machining mode at the left and the programming mode at right The currently active mode Is displayed in the larger box where the dialog prompts and TNC messages also appear unless the TNC is showing only graphics So
12. The TNC offsets the tool to the starting point in the next pass at the pre positioning feed rate The offset is calculated from the programmed width the tool radius and the maximum path overlap factor The tool then moves back in the direction of the starting point 1 The process is repeated until the programmed surface has been completed At the end of the last pass the next machining depth is plunged to In order to avoid non productive motions the surface is then machined in reverse direction The process is repeated until all infeeds have been machined In the last infeed simply the finishing allowance entered is milled at the finishing feed rate At the end of the cycle the TNC retracts the tool at FMAX to the 2nd set up clearance HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 8 6 u for Multipass Milling j il 8 6 Mies for Multipass Milling Strategy O0389 1 3 The tool then advances to the stopping point 2 at the feed rate for milling The end point lies within the surface The control calculates the end point from the programmed starting point the programmed length and the tool radius The TNC offsets the tool to the starting point in the next pass at the pre positioning feed rate The offset is calculated from the programmed width the tool radius and the maximum path overlap factor The tool then moves back in the direction of the starting point 1 The motion to the next line occurs within the workpiece borders The process
13. 5 LL N 5 O D D 2 lt Suppressing touch probe monitoring M141 Standard behavior When the stylus is deflected the TNC outputs an error message as soon as you attempt to move a machine axis Behavior with M141 The TNC moves the machine axes even if the touch probe is deflected This function is required if you wish to write your own measuring cycle in connection with measuring cycle 3 in order to retract the stylus by means of a positioning block after it has been deflected If you use M141 make sure that you retract the touch w probe in the correct direction M141 functions only for movements with straight line blocks Effect M141 is effective only in the block in which it is programmed M141 becomes effective at the start of the block Delete basic rotation M143 Standard behavior The basic rotation remains in effect until it is reset or is overwritten with a new value Behavior with M143 The TNC erases a programmed basic rotation from the NC program The function M143 is not permitted during mid program uy Startup Effect M143 is effective only in the block in which it is programmed M143 becomes effective at the start of the block 210 Automatically retract tool from the contour at an NC stop M148 Standard behavior At an NC stop the TNC stops all traverse movements The tool stops moving at the point of interruption Behavior with M148 The M148 function must be
14. 75 Setting the baud rate 485 486 Side finishing 312 SL Cycles SL cycles Contour data 307 Contour geometry cycle 303 Contour train 313 Floor finishing 311 Fundamentals 300 Overlapping contours 304 Pilot drilling 308 Rough out 309 Side finishing 312 Slot milling Reciprocating 284 Software number 480 Specifications 508 Sphere 452 Spindle speed changing the 53 Spindle speed entering 133 SOL commands 419 Status display 37 Additional 39 General 37 Straight line 159 172 String parameters 434 Structuring programs 109 Subprogram 371 Superimposing handwheel positioning M118 208 Switch off 48 Switch on 46 Swivel axes 215 T Table access 419 Tapping With a floating tap holder 242 without floating tap holder 244 246 Teach in 100 159 Test Run Test run Executing 466 Overview 464 T Text variables 434 Thread drilling milling 257 Thread milling fundamentals 249 Thread milling outside 265 Thread milling countersinking 253 Tilting the Working Plane 62 Tilting the working plane 355 Cycle 355 Guide 359 TNC 320 30 TNCremo 488 TNCremoNT 488 Tool Compensation Tool compensation Length 134 Radius 135 Three dimensional 138 Tool Data Calling 133 Enter them into the program 123 Indexing 128 Tool data De
15. 8 DIV Q2 oe Calculates and assigns the quotient of two values Not permitted Division by 0 7 xn 2 Z D lt FN5 SQUARE ROOT Example FN5 Q20 SQRT 4 i Calculates and assigns the square root of a number Not permitted Calculating the square root of a negative value 7 zZ n To the right of the character you can enter the following Two numbers Two QO parameters A number and a O parameter The Q parameters and numerical values in the equations can be entered with positive or negative signs HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 10 3 Describing Contours ie Mathematical Operations j il 10 3 Describing Contours Mathematical Operations Programming fundamental operations Example To select the mathematical functions press the ae BASIC ARITHMETIC soft key To select the O parameter function ASSIGN press the FNO X Y soft key 5 Enter the number of the O parameter e g 5 10 ENT gt op 2 Q ot 49 lt a C 49 O ct O O Ol Call the Q parameter functions by pressing the Q key To select the mathematical functions press the SENN BASIC ARITHMETIC soft key To select the Q parameter function MULTIPLICATION press the FN3 X Y soft key 12 Enter the number of the Q parameter e g 12 O ol mi ot 49 E O O1 h O s ot 4D h pm Yn ost lt 2 C 4D 7 ENT m ot 49 1 N O
16. Behavior with M120 The TNC checks radius compensated paths for contour undercuts and tool path intersections and calculates the tool path in advance from the current block Areas of the contour that might be damaged by the tool are not machined dark areas in figure at right You can also use M120 to calculate the radius compensation for digitized data or data created on an external programming system This means that deviations from the theoretical tool radius can be compensated Use LA Look Ahead after M120 to define the number of blocks maximum 99 that you want the TNC to calculate in advance Note that the larger the number of blocks you choose the higher the block processing time will be Input If you enter M120 in a positioning block the TNC continues the dialog for this block by asking you the number of blocks LA that are to be calculated in advance 206 Effect M120 must be located in an NC block that also contains radius compensation RL or RR M120 is then effective from this block until radius compensation is canceled with RO or M120 LAO is programmed or M120 is programmed without LA or another program is called with PGM CALL or M120 becomes effective at the start of block Limitations After an external or internal stop you can only re enter the contour with the function RESTORE POS AT N When using the path functions RND and CHF the blocks before and after them must contain only coordinates in the
17. Ellipse 448 Error Messages Error messages 113 Help with 113 Ethernet Interface Ethernet interface Connecting and disconnecting network drives 94 Connection possibilities 490 Introduction 490 External data transfer TNC 320 91 F Face milling 337 FCL 480 FCL function 8 Feature content level 8 Feed rate 52 For rotary axes M116 212 Input possibilities 100 Feed rate changing the 53 File management 82 Calling 84 Copying a file 87 Deleting a file 88 Directories 82 Copying 87 Creating 86 External data transfer 91 File name 80 File type 79 Overview of functions 83 Overwriting files 87 93 Protecting a file 90 Renaming a file 90 Selecting a file 85 Tagging files 89 File status 84 FK programming 178 Circular paths 182 Dialog initiation 181 Fundamentals 178 Graphics 180 Input possibilities Auxiliary points 186 Circle data 184 Closed contours 185 Direction and length of contour elements 183 End points 183 Relative data 187 Straight lines 182 Floor finishing 311 FN14 ERROR Displaying error messages 398 FN15 PRINT Formatted output of texts 402 FN18 SYSREAD Read system data 407 FN19 PLC Transfer values to the PLC 415 FN20 WAIT FOR NC and PLC synchronization 416 i il F FN23 CIRCLE DATA Calculating a c
18. HEIDENHAIN HEIDENHAIN Manual operation User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Format ACTL T mm min Our 111 MS TNC 620 0 S IST 10 19 130 S OVR EESE NC Software 340 560 01 340 561 01 340 564 01 English en mn Controls on the visual display unit Split screen layout Switch between machining or programming modes Soft keys for selecting functions on screen a o A Shift between soft key rows Machine operating modes Manual Operation Electronic Handwheel Positioning with Manual Data Input Program Run Single Block Program Run Full Sequence oo Programming modes Programming and Editing Test Run Program file management TNC functions mm Select or delete programs and files may External data transfer Y Define program call select datum and point tables O gt T m Select MOD functions mie Display help text for NC error messages Display all current error messages wee Show pocket calculator Moving the cursor going directly to blocks cycles and parameter functions Move highlight re Go directly to blocks cycles and parameter functions Override control knobs for feed rate spindle speed 100 100 150 OSs WWF Programming path movements ae Approach depart contour FK FK free contour programming ae Straight line amp Circle center pole for polar coordinates Circle with center Bre Circle with rad
19. Initiate the dialog with the APPR DEP key and APPR CT soft key T gt Coordinates of the first contour point Pa gt Radius R of the circular arc H f the tool should approach the workpiece in the direction defined by the radius compensation Enter R as a positive value If the tool should approach from the workpiece side Enter R as a negative value Center angle CCA of the arc CCA can be entered only as a positive value i Maximum input value 360 Radius compensation RR RL for machining Example NC blocks 154 Approach Ps without radius compensation Pa with radius comp RR radius R 10 End point of the first contour element Next contour element Approaching on a circular arc with tangential connection from a straight line to the contour APPR LCT The tool moves on a straight line from the starting point Ps to an auxiliary point Py It then moves to the first contour point Pa ona circular arc The feed rate programmed in the APPR block is effective for the entire path that the TNC traversed in the approach block path Ps to Pa If you have programmed the coordinates of all three principal axes X Y and Z in the approach block the TNC moves the tool from the position defined before the APPR block simultaneously in all three axes to the auxiliary point Py and then only in the working plane from Py to Pa ch and Departure The arc is connected tangentially both to the line Pc Py as we
20. Shift workpiece blank in positive negative Z direction Z Z Show workpiece blank referenced to the set datum Switch monitoring function on or off ae monitoring 11 2 Show the Workp HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 463 il i Functions for Program Display 11 3 Functions for Program Display Overview In the Program Run modes of operation as well as in the Test Run mode the TNC provides the following soft keys for displaying a part program in pages Go back in the program by one screen FT Go forward in the program by one screen v D Qo m Go to the beginning of the program oO m Qo H 2 Go to the end of the program m 2 k 464 11 4 Test Run Function In the Test Run mode of operation you can simulate programs and program sections to prevent errors from occurring during program run The TNC checks the programs for the following cc a D gt q q E Geometrical incompatibilities Missing data E Impossible jumps E Violation of the machine s working space The following functions are also available Blockwise test run E Optional block skip Functions for graphic simulation Measuring the machining time E Additional status display HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 465 il Running a program test If the central tool file is active a tool table must be active status S to run a program test Select a tool table via the file manager PGM MGT in the Test Run mode of oper
21. Starting TNCremoNT under Windows Click lt Start gt lt Programs gt lt HEIDENHAIN Applications gt lt I NCremoNT gt When you start TNCremoNT for the first time TNCremoNT automatically tries to set up a connection with the TNC 488 Data transfer between the TNC and TNCremoNT CEP Before you transfer a program from the TNC to the PC you must make absolutely sure that you have already saved the program currently selected on the TNC The TNC saves changes automatically when you switch the mode of operation on the TNC or when you select the file manager via the PGM MGT key Check whether the TNC is connected to the correct serial port on your PC or to the network respectively Once you have started TNCremoNT you will see a list of all files that are stored in the active directory in the upper section of the main window 1 Using the menu items lt File gt and lt Change directory gt you can change the active directory or select another directory on your PC If you want to control data transfer from the PC establish the connection with your PC in the following manner Select lt File gt lt Setup connection gt TNCremoNT now receives the file and directory structure from the TNC and displays this at the bottom left of the main window 2 To transfer a file from the TNC to the PC select the file in the TNC window with a mouse click and drag and drop the highlighted file into the PC window 1 To transfer a file
22. TIME2 Maximum tool life in minutes during TOOL CALL Ifthe current tool Maximum tool age for TOOL CALL age exceeds this value the TNC changes the tool during the next TOOL CALL see also CUR TIME CUR TIME Current age of the tool in minutes The TNC automatically counts Current tool life the current tool life CUR TIME A starting value can be entered for used tools 124 TYPE DOC PLC LCUTS ANGLE LIFTOFF TP_NO T ANGLE PTYP Tool type Press the SELECT TYPE 8rd soft key row the TNC Superimposes a window where you can select the type of tool you want You can assign tool types to specify the display filter settings such that only the selected type is visible in the table Comment on tool up to 16 characters Information on this tool that is to be sent to the PLC Tooth length of the tool for Cycle 22 Maximum plunge angle of the tool for reciprocating plunge cut in Cycles 22 and 208 Definition of whether the TNC should retract the tool in the direction of the positive tool axis at an NC stop in order to avoid leaving dwell marks on the contour If Y is defined the TNC retracts the tool from the contour by 0 1 mm provided that this function was activated in the NC program with M148 see Automatically retract tool from the contour at an NC stop M148 on page 211 Reference to the number of the touch probe in the touch probe table Point angle of the tool Is used by the Centering cycle Cycle 240
23. The chamfer enables you to cut off corners at the intersection of two straight lines The blocks before and after the CHF block must be in the same working plane E The radius compensation before and after the chamfer block must be the same The chamfer must be machinable with the current tool CHE Chamfer side length Length of the chamfer and if sL necessary Feed rate F only effective in CHF block Example NC blocks CS You cannot start a contour with a CHF block A chamfer is possible only in the working plane The corner point is cut off by the chamfer and is not part of the contour A feed rate programmed in the CHF block is effective only in that block After the CHF block the previous feed rate becomes effective again 160 Corner rounding RND The RND function is used for rounding off corners The tool moves on an arc that is tangentially connected to both the preceding and subsequent contour elements The rounding arc must be machinable with the called tool RND Rounding radius Enter the radius and if necessary oO Feed rate F only effective in RND block Example NC blocks CS In the preceding and subsequent contour elements both coordinates must lie in the plane of the rounding arc If you machine the contour without tool radius compensation you must program both coordinates in the working plane The corner point is cut off by the rounding arc and is not p
24. i 1 4 Status Disple 5 CYCL DEF 4 POCKET MILLING CYCL DEF 4 1 SET UPZ2 CYCL DEF 4 2 DEPTH 10 9 CYCL DEF 4 3 PLNGNG10 F333 10 CYCL DEF 4 4 X 3 11 CYCL DEF 4 5 Y 90 12 CYCL DEF 4 6 F888 DR RADIUSS 13 L Z 2 R FMAX M99 14 CYCL DEF 5 0 CIRCULAR POCKET Mirroring 91 S OVR 11 50 150 F OVR X 31 85 pay 25 642 ic 000 S 321 79G 134 992 DIAGNOSE ponie fa es T Omm min Dur 150 STATUS STATUS TOOL STATUS STATUS OF STATUS OF COORD STATUS a M FUNCT PARAM Programming Program run full sequence r3 H BLK FORM 0 1 Z X 0 Y 0 Z 20 BLK FORM 0 2 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 TOOL CALL 3 Z 52000 L Z 10 RO FMAX M3 L X 5 Y 50 R FMAX CYCL DEF 4 0 POCKET MILLING CYCL DEF 4 1 SET UP2 CYCL DEF 4 2 DEPTH 10 9 CYCL DEF 4 3 PLNGNG10 F333 10 CYCL DEF 4 4 X 30 11 CYCL DEF 4 5 Y 90 12 CYCL DEF 4 6 F888 DR RADIUSS 13 L Z 2 R FMAX MSS 14 CYCL DEF 5 0 CIRCULAR POCKET M Functions OnNOUDWNP 91 S OVR 11 50 150 F OVR Mo 31 857 YY 25 642 C 8KEFrr sd 8 dO OOS 321 790 __ 134 992 DIAGNOSE mm min Our 150 STATUS STATUS TOOL eee STATUS OF STATUS OF STATUS ee M FUNCT Q PARAM Programming Program run full sequence 113 H Q parameter list BLK FORM 1 Z X 0 Y 0 Z 20 8 90000 8 90000 98000 98000 0000 0000 _ 0 00000 B0000 8 88
25. 1 RL Z Left handed 1 RR Z Right handed 1 RR Z Left handed 1 RL Z HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 249 il Buil Peasy pue Budde Buljj iq 10 sajdAQ Z 8 250 THREAD MILLING Cycle 262 Advanced programming features software option 1 The TNC positions the tool in the spindle axis at rapid traverse FMAX to the programmed set up clearance above the workpiece surface The tool moves at the programmed feed rate for pre positioning to the starting plane The starting plane is derived from the algebraic sign of the thread pitch the milling method climb or up cut milling and the number of threads per step The tool then approaches the thread diameter tangentially in a helical movement Before the helical approach a compensating motion of the tool axis is carried out in order to begin at the programmed starting plane for the thread path Depending on the setting of the parameter for the number of threads the tool mills the thread in one helical movement in several offset movements or in one continuous movement After this the tool departs the contour tangentially and returns to the starting point in the working plane At the end of the cycle the TNC retracts the tool at rapid traverse to the set up clearance or if programmed to the 2nd set up clearance E Before programming note the following Program a positioning block for the starting point hole center in the working plane with radius compensati
26. 42 TT 140 tool touch probe for tool measurement 43 HR electronic handwheels 43 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 11 il 12 2 1 Switch On Switch Off 46 Switch on 46 Switch off 48 To traverse with the machine axis direction buttons 49 Incremental jog positioning 50 Traversing with the HR 410 electronic handwheel 51 2 3 Spindle Speed S Feed Rate F and Miscellaneous Functions M 52 Function 52 Entering values 52 Changing the spindle speed and feed rate 53 2 4 Datum Setting Without a 3 D Touch Probe 54 Preparation 54 Datum setting with axis keys 55 Datum management with the preset table 56 2 5 Tilting the Working Plane Software Option 1 62 Application function 62 Traversing the reference points in tilted axes 64 Position display in a tilted system 64 Limitations on working with the tilting function 64 Activating manual tilting 65 3 1 Programming and Executing Simple Machining Operations 68 Positioning with Manual Data Input MDI 68 Protecting and erasing programs in MDI 71 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 13 il 4 1 Fundamentals 74 Position encoders and reference marks 74 Reference system 74 Reference system on milling machines 75 Designation of the axes on milling machines 75 Polar coordinates 76 Absolute and incremental workpiece positions 77 Setting the d
27. 443 Unit of measurement for dimensions in the program Q113 443 Tool length Q114 443 Coordinates after probing during program run 444 Deviation between actual value and nominal value during automatic tool measurement with the TT 130 445 Tilting the working plane with mathematical angles rotary axis coordinates calculated by the TNC 445 Measurement results from touch probe cycles see also User s Manual for Touch Probe Cycles 446 10 13 Programming Examples 448 11 1 Graphics Advanced Graphic Features Software Option 456 Function 456 Overview of display modes 457 Plan view 457 Projection in 3 planes 458 3 D view 459 Magnifying details 460 Repeating graphic simulation 462 Measuring the machining time 462 11 2 Show the Workpiece in the Working Space Advanced Graphic Features Software Option 463 Function 463 11 3 Functions for Program Display 464 Overview 464 11 4 Test Run 465 Function 465 11 5 Program Run 467 FUNCTION 467 Running a part program 468 Interrupting machining 468 Moving the machine axes during an interruption 469 Resuming program run after an interruption 470 Mid program startup block scan 471 Returning to the contour 472 11 6 Automatic Program Start 473 Function 473 11 7 Optional Block Skip 474 Function 474 Insertin
28. Behavior with M120 on page 206 Effect M97 is effective only in the blocks in which it is programmed E A corner machined with M97 will not be completely finished You may wish to rework the contour with a smaller tool 202 Example NC blocks HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Large tool radius Move to contour point 13 Machine small contour step 13 to 14 Move to contour point 15 Machine small contour step 15 to 16 Move to contour point 17 d gt E aa O So O ad Oo 7 4 Miscellaneous Functions i i ontouring Behavior Lh 2 me O L o O D T O 2 N Machining open contours M98 Standard behavior The TNC calculates the intersections of the cutter paths at inside corners and moves the tool in the new direction at those points If the contour is open at the corners however this will result in incomplete machining Behavior with M98 With the miscellaneous function M98 the TNC temporarily suspends radius compensation to ensure that both corners are completely machined Effect M98 is effective only in the blocks in which it is programmed M98 takes effect at the end of block Example NC blocks Move to the contour points 10 11 and 12 in succession Feed rate for circular arcs M109 M110 M111 Standard behavior The TNC applies the programmed feed rate to the path of the tool center Behavior at circular arcs with M109
29. Bolt hole circle 294 Bore milling 240 Boring 231 Buffer battery exchange 515 C Calculating with parentheses 430 Calculator 111 Centering 225 Chamfer 160 Circle calculations 393 Circle center point 162 Circular path 163 164 166 173 Circular pocket Finishing 280 Roughing 278 Circular slot Reciprocating 287 Circular stud finishing 282 Code numbers 484 Contour train 313 Contour approach the 150 With polar coordinates 152 Contour depart the 150 With polar coordinates 152 Conversational programming 99 Coordinate transformation 344 Copying program sections 104 Corner rounding 161 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 C Cycle Calling 221 Defining 219 Cylinder 450 Cylinder surface Contour machining 315 316 Ridge machining 320 Slot machining 318 D Data backup 81 Data interface Pin layout 506 Setting 485 Data transfer rate 485 486 Data transfer software 488 Datum management 56 Datum setting Without a 3 D touch probe 54 Datum shift With datum tables 346 Within the program 345 Datum setting the 78 Deepened starting point for drilling 239 Dialog 99 Directory 82 86 Copying 87 Creating 86 Deleting 88 Drilling 227 233 237 Deepened starting point 239 Drilling cycles 223 Dwell time 363 E
30. Chamfer Rounding Approach contour Depart contour G24 G25 G26 G27 Straight line interpolation Cartesian coordinates rapid traverse Straight line interpolation Cartesian coordinates Circular interpolation Cartesian coordinates clockwise Circular interpolation Cartesian coordinates counterclockwise Circular interpolation Cartesian coordinates without indication of direction Circular interpolation Cartesian coordinates tangential contour approach Paraxial positioning block Straight line interpolation polar coordinates rapid traverse Straight line interpolation polar coordinates Circular interpolation polar coordinates clockwise Circular interpolation polar coordinates counterclockwise Circular interpolation polar coordinates without indication of direction Circular interpolation polar coordinates tangential contour approach Chamfer with length R Corner rounding with radius R Tangential contour approach with radius R Tangential contour approach with radius R Tool definition G99 With tool number T length L radius R Tool radius compensation G40 G41 G42 G43 G44 No tool radius compensation Tool radius compensation left of the contour Tool radius compensation right of the contour Paraxial compensation for GO7 lengthening Paraxial compensation for GO7 shortening Blank form definition for graphics G30 G31 G17 G18 G19 min point G90 G91 max point Cycles for drill
31. Circular arc with tangential connection to the preceding contour element Helical P Combination of a circular and a interpolation linear movement HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Polar radius polar angle of the 172 straight line end point Polar angle of the arc end point 173 direction of rotation Polar radius polar angle of the 176 arc end point Polar radius polar angle of the 174 arc end point coordinate of the end point in the tool axis 171 olar Coordinates S Oo ad Q E me 0 I So p Par oO iho Oo o Q k amp Oo 6 5 Path Contours Polar coordinate origin Pole CC You can define the pole CC anywhere in the part program before blocks containing polar coordinates Enter the pole in Cartesian coordinates as a circle center in a CC block Coordinates CC Enter Cartesian coordinates for the pole or If you want to use the last programmed position do not enter any coordinates Before programming polar coordinates define the pole CC You can only define the pole CC in Cartesian coordinates The pole CC remains in effect until you define a new pole CC Example NC blocks Straight line LP The tool moves in a straight line from its current position to the straight line end point The starting point is the end point of the preceding block P Polar coordinates radius PR Enter the distance trom the pole CC to the straight line end point Pola
32. Compensate sphere radius for pre positioning Copy rotational position in the plane Account for allowance in the sphere radius Shift datum to center of sphere Account for starting angle of rotational position in the plane Pre position in the tool axis Set pole in the X Y plane for pre positioning Pre position in the plane Set pole in the Z X plane offset by the tool radius Move to working depth 10 13 Programming Examples j i 10 13 Programming Examples A 54 Move upward in an approximated arc Update solid angle Inquire whether an arc is finished If not finished return to LBL 2 Move to the end angle in space Retract in the tool axis Pre position for next arc Update rotational position in the plane Reset solid angle Activate new rotational position Unfinished If not finished return to label 1 Reset the rotation Reset the datum shift End of subprogram Programm Einspe TOOL CALL 1 2 Sigee L L Cc C L CE arc L CE X 0 YO RR FRAY 2 18 R F9999 A B Y E At GBB Y 6 787 A 16 538 f 23 93 A 23 YV 39 A 18 594 T 35 70 Kt 153 59 553 22 Y461 693 A i6 818 Y 75 77 didl 87 5 i 5 Y4 i 12 5 pp alan 12 5 Yea raphic Features Software Option 11 1 Graphics Advanc 11 1 Graphics Advanced Graphic Features Software Option Function In the program run modes of operation as well as in the Test Run mode
33. F Traverse speed of the rotary axis during automatic positioning Set up clearance incremental value The TNC positions the tilting head so that the position that results from the extension of the tool by the set up clearance does not change relative to the workpiece 356 Cancellation To cancel the tilt angle redefine the WORKING PLANE cycle and enter an angular value of 0 for all axes of rotation You must then program the WORKING PLANE cycle once again by answering the dialog question with the NO ENT key to disable the function Position the axis of rotation The machine tool builder determines whether Cycle 19 4 positions the axes of rotation automatically or whether they must be pre positioned in the program Refer to your machine manual If the rotary axes are positioned automatically in Cycle 19 m The TNC can position only controlled axes E In order for the tilted axes to be positioned you must enter a feed rate and a set up clearance in addition to the tilting angles during cycle definition E You can use only preset tools with the full tool length defined in the tool table E The position of the tool tip as referenced to the workpiece surface remains nearly unchanged after tilting E The TNC performs the tilt at the last programmed feed rate The maximum feed rate that can be reached depends on the complexity of the swivel head or tilting table If the axes are not positioned automatically in Cycle 1
34. Formatted output of text and O parameter values 402 FN18 SYS DATUM READ Read system data 407 FN19 PLC Transferring values to the PLC 415 FN20 WAIT FOR NC and PLC synchronization 416 FN29 PLC Transferring values to the PLC 418 FN37 EXPORT 418 10 9 Accessing Tables with SOL Commands 419 Introduction 419 A Transaction 420 Programming SOL commands 422 Overview of the soft keys 422 SOL BIND 423 SOL SELECT sess 424 SOL FETCH isn 427 SOL UPDATE 428 SOL INSERT 428 SOL COMMIT 429 SOL ROLLBACK 429 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 23 il 10 10 Entering Formulas Directly 430 Entering formulas 430 Rules for formulas 432 Programming example 433 10 11 String Parameters 434 String processing functions 434 Assigning string parameters 435 Chain linking string parameters 435 Converting a numerical value to a string parameter 436 Copying a substring from a string parameter 437 Converting a string parameter to a numerical value 438 Checking a string parameter 439 Finding the length of a string parameter 440 Comparing alphabetic priority 441 10 12 Preassigned Q Parameters 442 Values from the PLC Q100 to Q107 442 Active tool radius Q108 442 Tool axis Q109 442 Spindle status Q110 443 Coolant on off Q111 443 Overlap factor Q112
35. If you want to use a label name press the key to switch to text entry Repeat REP Ignore the dialog question with the NO ENT key Repeat REP is used only for program section repeats E CALL LBL 0 is not permitted Label 0 is only used to mark the end of a subprogram HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 371 il 9 3 Program Section Repeats Label LBL The beginning of a program section repeat is marked by the label LBL The end of a program section repeat is identified by CALL LBL REP OMBEGINEGMET Actions 1 The TNC executes the part program up to the end of the program section CALL LBL REP 2 Then the program section between the called LBL and the label call CALL LBL REP is repeated the number of times entered after REP 3 The TNC then resumes the part program after the last repetition Programming notes END PGM 3 Program Section Repeats You can repeat a program section up to 65 534 times In succession The total number of times the program section is executed is always one more than the programmed number of repeats Programming a program section repeat eh To mark the beginning press the LBL SET key and enter a LABEL NUMBER for the program section you wish to repeat If you want to use a label name press the key to switch to text entry Enter the program section Calling a program section repeat Press the LBL CALL key and enter the label number of CALL the program section you want
36. Plunging depth Q10 incremental value Dimension by which the tool plunges in each infeed gt Feed rate for plunging Q11 Traversing speed of the tool during penetration y gt Feed rate for milling Q12 Traversing speed for milling Finishing allowance for side Q14 incremental value Enter the allowed material for several finish milling operations If you enter Q14 0 the remaining finishing allowance will be cleared 312 CONTOUR TRAIN Cycle 25 Advanced programming features software option In conjunction with Cycle 14 CONTOUR GEOMETRY this cycle facilitates the machining of open contours i e where the starting point of the contour is not the same as its end point Cycle 25 CONTOUR TRAIN offers considerable advantages over machining an open contour using positioning blocks E The TNC monitors the operation to prevent undercuts and surface blemishes It is recommended that you run a graphic simulation of the contour before execution 1 f the radius of the selected tool is too large the corners of the contour may have to be reworked The contour can be machined throughout by up cut or by climb milling The type of milling even remains effective when the contours are mirrored The tool can traverse back and forth for milling in several infeeds This results in faster machining E Allowance values can be entered in order to perform repeated rough milling and finish milling operations CS Before
37. Q parameter containing the index HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Example Row number is transferred in a Q parameter Example Row number is programmed directly Tables with SQL Commands ising 10 9 Acce S i 10 9 acce Tables with SQL Commands SOL UPDATE SQL UPDATE transfers the data prepared in the Q parameters into the row of the result set addressed with INDEX The existing row in the result set is completely overwritten SQL UPDATE takes into account all columns entered in the Select command a Parameter no for result O parameter in which the SOL server reports the result 0 No error occurred 1 Error occurred incorrect handle index too large value outside of value range or incorrect data format Data bank SQL access ID O parameter with the handle for identifying the result set also see SQL SELECT Data bank Index for SQL result Row number within the result set The table entries prepared in the Q parameters are written to this row If you do not enter an index the first row is written to n 0 Either enter the row number directly or program the Q parameter containing the index SQL INSERT SQL INSERT generates a new row in the result set and transfers the data prepared in the Q parameters into the new row SQL INSERT takes into account all columns entered in the Select command Table columns not entered in the Select command are filled with default values R Parameter no for resul
38. TCHPROBE 430 diameter too small No measuring axis defined Tool breakage tolerance exceeded Enter Q247 unequal O Enter Q247 greater than 5 Datum table Enter Q351 unequal O Thread depth too large Missing calibration data Tolerance exceeded Block scan active ORIENTATION not permitted 3 D ROT not permitted Activate 3 D ROT Enter a negative value for the depth 0303 not defined in measuring cycle Tool axis not allowed Calculated values incorrect Contradictory measuring points Clearance height entered incorrectly Contradictory type of plunging Machining cycle not permitted 1085 1086 1087 1088 1089 1090 1091 1092 1093 1094 1095 1096 1097 1098 1099 Line is write protected Oversize greater than depth No point angle defined Contradictory data Slot position 0 not permitted Enter infeed unequal O Faulty program data Tool not defined Tool number not permitted Tool name not allowed Software option not active Kinematics cannot be restored Function not permitted Contradictory workpc blank dim Measuring position not allowed HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 ions Funct itiona 10 8 Add i il ions Funct itiona 10 8 Add FN 16 F PRINT Formatted output of text and Q parameter values With FN 16 you can also output to the screen any messages from the NC program Such messages are displayed by the TNC in a pop up window The function FN 16 F PRINT transfers O parameter values and texts
39. The TNC adjusts the feed rate for circular arcs at inside and outside contours so that the feed rate at the tool cutting edge remains constant Behavior at circular arcs with M110 The TNC keeps the feed rate constant for circular arcs at inside contours only At outside contours the feed rate is not adjusted E M110 is also effective for the inside machining of circular arcs using contour cycles If you define M109 or M110 before calling a machining cycle the adjusted feed rate is also effective for circular arcs within machining cycles The initial state is restored after finishing or aborting a machining cycle Effect M109 and M110 become effective at the start of block To cancel M109 and M110 enter M111 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 d a gt E aa O So Oo ad Q 74 Miscellaneous Functions j il ontouring Behavior V oa 5 LL N 5 O D D 2 lt Calculating the radius compensated path in advance LOOK AHEAD M120 software option 3 Standard behavior If the tool radius is larger than the contour step that is to be machined with radius compensation the TNC interrupts program run and generates an error message M97 see Machining small contour steps M97 on page 202 inhibits the error message but this results in dwell marks and will also move the corner If the programmed contour contains undercut features the tool may damage the contour
40. This TNC function enables you to comment part programs in structuring blocks Structuring blocks are short texts with up to 37 characters and are used as comments or headlines for the subsequent program lines With the aid of appropriate structuring blocks you can organize long and complex programs in a clear and comprehensible manner This function is particularly convenient if you want to change the program later Structuring blocks can be inserted into the part program at any point They can also be displayed in a separate window and edited or added to as desired The inserted structure items are managed by the TNC in a separate file extension SEC DEP This speeds navigation in the program structure window Displaying the program structure window Changing the active window To display the program structure window select the screen display PROGRAM SECTS To change the active window press the Change window soft key PROGRAM Inserting a structuring block in the left program window Select the block after which the structuring block is to be inserted Press the SPEC FCT key to select the special functions SPEC FCT INSERT SECTION Press the INSERT SECTION soft key Enter the structuring text with the alphabetic keyboard see Screen keypad on page 81 If necessary change the structure depth with the soft key Selecting blocks in the program structure window If you are scrol
41. To clear the error message from the screen press the CE key Restart the program or resume program run where It was interrupted If there is a processor check error Switch to Manual mode Press the OFF soft key Remove the cause of the error Start again If you cannot correct the error write down the error message and contact your repair service agency 470 Mid program startup block scan 7 The RESTORE POS AT feature must be enabled and a Toa pri ot adapted by the machine tool builder Refer to your mee ren ts naau BLK FORM 0 1 Z X 0 Y 0 Z 20 BLK FORM 2 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 machine manual ane f E FA L X 50 Y 50 R FMAX With the RESTORE POS AT feature block scan you can start a part cvo pEr 4 a Ser UPa program at any block you desire The TNC scans the program blocks a cYCL DEF 4 up to that point Machining can be graphically simulated 11 CCL DEF 4 Start up at N f 12 CYCL DEF 4 program TNC NC_PROG SCREENS 113 H OvnNOURWNP RO A a 14 CYCL DEF E Repetitions 1 If you have interrupted a part program with an INTERNAL STOP the TNC automatically offers the interrupted block N for mid program Startup 11 5 Program Run CANCEL 31 85 ay 25 642Z 134 9921 G 0 000 S 321 7 90 UTE E Mid program startup must not begin in a subprogram All necessary programs tables and pallet files must be a In selected in a Program Run mode of
42. Tool number File GFHSSSHOSSS 2 a 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 g 1 1 1 Neo tne table tool_p tch Selecting a pocket table in the Programming mode of operation PGM MGT P T TNAME RSV ST DOC PLC P1 P5 PTYP LOCKED ABOVE LOCKED BELOW LOCKED LEFT LOCKED RIGHT Call the file manager Press the SHOW ALL soft key to select the file type Select a file or enter a new file name Conclude your entry with the ENT key or the SELECT soft key Pocket number of the tool in the tool magazine Tool number Display of the tool name from TOOL T Pocket reservation for box magazines Special tool with a large radius requiring several pockets in the tool magazine If your special tool takes up pockets in front of and behind its actual pocket these additional pockets need to be locked In column L status L Fixed tool number The tool is always returned to the same pocket in the tool magazine Locked pocket see also column ST Display of the comment to the tool from TOOL T Information on this tool pocket that is to be sent to the PLC Function is defined by the machine tool builder The machine tool documentation provides further information Tool type Function is detined by the machine tool builder The machine tool documentation provides further information Box magazine Lock the pocket above Box magazine Lock the pocket below Box magazine Lock the pocket at left Box magaz
43. With the radius compensation you specify whether the TNC cuts the slot with climb milling or up cut milling 1 The TNC positions the tool over the cutter infeed point 2 At the first plunging depth the tool mills along the programmed slot wall at the milling feed rate Q12 while respecting the finishing allowance for the side 3 Atthe end of the contour the TNC moves the tool to the opposite wall and returns to the infeed point 4 Steps 2 and 3 are repeated until the programmed milling depth Q1 is reached 5 Ifyou have defined the tolerance in Q21 the TNC then remachines the slot walls to be as parallel as possible 6 Finally the tool retracts in the tool axis to the clearance height 318 gt Milling depth Q1 incremental value Distance between the cylindrical surface and the floor of the contour Enter the milling depth to be greater than the tooth length LCUTS gt Finishing allowance for side O3 incremental value Finishing allowance on the slot wall The finishing allowance reduces the slot width by twice the entered value gt Set up clearance O6 incremental value Distance between the tool tip and the cylinder surface The set up clearance entered must always be greater than the tool radius gt Plunging depth Q10 incremental value Dimension by which the tool plunges in each infeed Enter a value less than the cylinder radius Feed rate for plunging O11 Traversing speed of the tool in the
44. Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute value Coordinate of the workpiece surface gt 2nd set up clearance Q204 incremental value Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece clamping devices can occur m X D 3 O za e zA A BORING Cycle 202 Advanced programming features software option F Machine and control must be specially prepared by the machine tool builder for use of this cycle This cycle is effective only for machines with controlled spindle 1 The TNC positions the tool in the spindle axis at rapid traverse FMAX to the set up clearance above the workpiece surface 2 The tool drills to the programmed depth at the feed rate for plunging 3 If programmed the tool remains at the hole bottom for the entered dwell time with active spindle rotation for cutting free 4 The TNC then orients the spindle to the position that is defined in parameter Q336 5 lf retraction is selected the tool retracts in the programmed direction by 0 2 mm fixed value 6 The TNC moves the tool at the retraction feed rate to the set up clearance and then if entered to the 2nd set up clearance at FMAX If Q214 0 the tool point remains on the wall of the hole i Before programming note the following Program a positioning block for the starting point hole center in the working plane with radius compensation RO The algebraic si
45. amp OQ config 07 H 2141 OQ nc_prog Depending on the data transfer software you use 207 de H 21138 table z 4 problems can occur occasionally when you transmit data 11a iz n z over a serial interface They can be overcome by repeating 3H 102 n A A 4 H 102 the transmission aR 102 985 ee PL1 H 2662 SL Zyklen H 982 th hei Manager Call the file manager MGT DIAGNOSE ENDOW Select the screen layout for data transfer press the t hava Oe E e END WINDOW soft key Select the desired directory in both halves of the screen In the left half of the screen the TNC shows for example all files saved on its hard disk In the right half of the screen it shows all files saved on the external data medium Use the SHOW FILES and SHOW TREE soft keys to switch between 4 3 Work the folder view and file view Use the arrow keys to highlight the file s that you want to transfer Moves the highlight up and down within a window If you wish to copy from the TNC to the external data medium move the highlight in the left window to the file to be transferred Moves the highlight from the left to the right window and vice versa HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 91 il ing wi 4 3 Working with the A Manager To transfer a single file position the highlight on the desired file or To transfer several files Press the TAG soft key in the second soft key row see Marking fi
46. ct a gt 49 ep 99 Q O J Q lt eb Cc 49 W 90 Example Program blocks in the TNC Call the Q parameter functions by pressing the O key U7 FN3 Q12 05 4700 10 4 Trigonometric Functions Definitions Sine cosine and tangent are terms designating the ratios of sides of right triangles In this case Sine singa a c Cosine cosa b c Tangent tana a b sina cosa where c is the side opposite the right angle a is the side opposite the angle o b is the third side The TNC can find the angle from the tangent arc tan a b arc tan sin cos o Example a 25mm b 50 mm o arctan a b arctan 0 5 26 57 Furthermore a2 b c where a2 a x a c J a2 b HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 10 4 Trigonometric Functions i il 10 4 Trigonometric Functions Programming trigonometric functions Press the ANGLE FUNCTION soft key to call the angle functions The TNC then displays the following soft keys Programming Compare Example Programming fundamental operations FN6 SINE Example FN6 Q20 SIN Q5 Calculates and assigns the sine of an angle in degrees FN7 COSINE Example FN7 Q21 COS Q5 cosx Calculates and assigns the cosine of an angle in degrees FN8 ROOT SUM OF SQUARES TE Example FN8 Q10 5 LEN 4 X LEN Y Calculates and assigns length from two values FN13 ANGLE FN13 Example FN13 Q020 25 ANG Q1 n Calculates th
47. end point Py The line departs on a perpendicular path from the last contour point Pe Py is separated from Pe by the distance LEN plus the tool radius Program the last contour element with the end point Pe and radius compensation Initiate the dialog with the APPR DEP key and DEP LN soft key LEN Enter the distance from the last contour element Pam to PN Always enter LEN as a positive value Example NC blocks Last contour element Pg with radius compensation Depart perpendicular to contour by LEN 20 mm Retract in Z return to block 1 end program 56 Departure on a circular path with tangential connection DEP CT The tool moves on a circular arc from the last contour point Pe to the end point Py The arc is tangentially connected to the last contour element Program the last contour element with the end point Pe and radius compensation Initiate the dialog with the APPR DEP key and DEP CT soft key DEP ct gt Center angle CCA of the arc Radius R of the circular arc I f the tool should depart the workpiece in the direction of the radius compensation i e to the right with RR or to the left with RL Enter R as a positive value I f the tool should depart the workpiece in the direction opposite to the radius compensation Enter R as a negative value Example NC blocks Departing on a circular arc tangentially connecting the contour and a straight line DEP LCT The tool move
48. in a selectable format through the data interface for example to a printer If you save the values internally or send them to a computer the TNC saves the data in the file that you defined in the FN 16 block To output the formatted texts and O parameter values create a text file with the TNC s text editor In this file you then define the output format and O parameters you want to output Example of a text file to define the output format TEST RECORD IMPELLER CENTER OF GRAVITY DATE 2d 2d 4d DAY MONTH YEAR4 TIME 2d 2d 2d HOUR MIN SEC NO OF MEASURED VALUES 1 X1 9 3LF Q31 Y1 9 3LF Q32 Z1 9 3LF 033 402 When you create a text file use the following formatting functions PEE Define output format for texts and variables between the quotation marks 9 3LF Define format for Q parameter 9 characters in total incl decimal point of which 3 are after the decimal point Long Floating decimal number S Format for text variable F Separation character between output format and parameter End of block character The following functions allow you to include the following additional information in the protocol log Tile CALL_PATH Gives the path for the NC program where you will find the FN16 function Example Measuring program S CALL_PATH M_CLOSE Closes the file to which you are writing with FN16 Example M_CLOSE M_APPEND Appends the file to the end E
49. including long texts at any point in the program in a way that the user has to react to It You can also display O parameter contents if the protocol description file contains such instructions For the message to appear on the TNC screen you need only enter SCREEN as the name of the protocol Tile If the message has more lines than fit in the pop up window you can use the arrow keys to page in the window To close the pop up window press the CE key To have the program close the window program the following NC block CS All the previously described conventions apply for the protocol description file If you output to the screen more than one text in the program the TNC appends all texts to the end of the text already displayed To display each text individually on the screen program the function M CLOSE at the end of the protocol description file FN18 SYS DATUM READ Read system data With the function FN 18 SYS DATUM READ you can read system data and store them in Q parameters You select the system data through a group name ID number and additionally through a number and an index Program information 10 System jump addresses 13 Machine status 20 Channel data 25 Cycle parameter 30 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 3 103 Q parameter number Number of the active fixed cycle Relevant within NC cycles for inquiry as to whether the Q parameter given under IDX was explicitly stated in the associated C
50. ions Funct itiona 10 8 Add FN20 WAIT FOR NC and PLC synchronization CS This function may only be used with the permission of your machine tool builder With function FN 20 WAIT FOR you can synchronize the NC and PLC with each other during a program run The NC stops machining until the condition that you have programmed in the FN 20 block is fulfilled The TNC can check the following PLC operands Marker M Input I Output 0 Counter C Timer T Byte B Word W o Double word 416 0 to 4999 O to 31 128 to 152 64 to 126 first PL 401 B 192 to 254 second PL 401 B O to 30 32 to 62 first PL 401 B 64 to 94 second PL 401 B 48 to 79 O to 95 O to 4095 O to 2047 2048 to 4095 The following conditions are permitted in the FN 20 block Equals Less than lt Greater than gt Less than or equal lt Greater than or equal gt In addition the FN20 WAIT FOR SYNC function is available WAIT FOR SYNC is used whenever you read for example system data via FN18 that require synchronization with real time The TNC stops the look ahead calculation and executes the subsequent NC block only when the NC program has actually reached that block Example Stop program run until the PLC sets marker 4095 to 1 Example Stop program run until the PLC sets the symbolic operand to 1 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 ions Funct Itiona 10 8 Add C i ions Funct itiona 10 8 Add FN29
51. on the 1TNC 530 via regular keyboard Comment blocks in NC program Structure blocks in NC program Save As function 526 X Option 19 X X Option 20 X Option 20 X XI XIXI XI X XI KX XI XI X XIXI XI XIXI X X XI XIXI X Comparison Cycles 9 10 11 12 13 14 19 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 Pecking Tapping Slot milling Pocket milling Circular pocket Rough out SL Datum shift Mirror image Dwell time Rotation Scaling Program call Oriented spindle stop Contour definition Pilot drilling SL I Contour milling SL I Tapping controlled spindle Thread cutting Working plane option of TNC 620 Contour data Pilot drilling Rough out Floor finishing Side finishing Contour train Axis specitic scaling factor HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 X KX XIX X XI XI XIXI X X X X X X Option 08 Option 19 Option 19 Option 19 Option 19 Option 19 Option 19 X XI K XI XIXI X X X X X X X X XI XI XIX X X Option 08 for MC420 X X KX KX XJ X X il 27 Contour surface 28 Cylinder surface 29 Cylinder surface ridge 30 3 D data 32 Tolerance 32 Tolerance with HSC mode and TA 39 Cylinder surface external contour 200 Drilling 201 Reaming 202 Boring 203 Universal drilling 204 Back boring 205 Universal pecking 206 Tapping with floating tap h
52. the TNC provides the following three display modes Using soft keys select whether you desire Plan view Projection in three planes 3 D view The TNC graphic depicts the workpiece as if it were being machined with a cylindrical end mill If a tool table is active you can also simulate the machining operation with a spherical cutter For this purpose enter R2 R in the tool table The TNC will not show a graphic if the current program has no valid blank form definition no program is selected the advanced graphic features software option is not active E A graphic simulation is only possible under certain conditions for program sections or programs in which rotary axis movements are defined The graphic may not be displayed correctly 456 Overview of display modes The TNC displays the following soft keys in the program run and Test Run modes of operation with the Advanced graphic features software option Plan view Projection in three planes 3 D view ooo Limitations during program run A graphical representation of a running program is not possible if the microprocessor of the TNC is already occupied with complicated machining tasks or if large areas are being machined Example Multipass milling over the entire blank form with a large tool The TNC interrupts the graphics and displays the text ERROR in the graphics window The machining process is continued however Plan view This is the fastest of the t
53. to the 2nd set up clearance and finally to the center of the pocket end position starting position CS Before programming note the following The TNC automatically pre positions the tool in the tool axis and working plane The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH determines the working direction If you program DEPTH 0 the cycle will not be executed 8 3 Cycles for a ockets Studs and Slots If you want to clear and finish the stud with the same tool use a center cut end mill ISO 1641 and enter a low feed rate for plunging a SZ att Danger of collision Use the machine parameter displayDepthErr to define whether if a positive depth is entered the TNC should output an error message on or not off Keep in mind that the TNC reverses the calculation for pre positioning when a positive depth is entered This means that the tool moves at rapid traverse in the tool axis at safety clearance below the workpiece surface 282 gt Set up clearance Q200 incremental value Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface gt Depth Q201 incremental value Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of stud gt Feed rate for plunging Q206 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min when moving to depth If you are plunge cutting into the material enter a low value if you have already cleared the stud enter a higher feed rate gt Plunging depth Q202 incremental value Infeed per cut En
54. 620 Beginning of program section repeat 1 9 5 Nesting Subprogram call The program section between LBL 1 and this block block 10 is repeated twice Last block of the main program with M2 Beginning of subprogram End of subprogram k i E Programming Examples 9 6 Programming Examples 128 Program sequence E Pre position the tool to the workpiece surface E Enter the infeed depth in incremental values E Contour milling Repeat downfeed and contour milling Tool call Retract the tool Pre position in the working plane Pre position to the workpiece surface 78 it Programming Examples HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Set label for program section repeat Infeed depth in incremental values in space Approach the contour Contour Depart the contour Retract tool Return jump to LBL 1 section is repeated a total of 4 times Retract in the tool axis end program k i Program sequence E Approach the groups of holes in the main program E Call the group of holes Subprogram 1 E Program the group of holes only once in subprogram 1 N Programming Examples W 80 Tool call Retract the tool Cycle definition Drilling i Programming Examples HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Move to starting point for group 1 Call the subprogram for the group Move to starting point for group 2 Call the subprogram for the group Move to starting point for group 3 Call the subprog
55. Cycles i i 8 5 SL Cycles Definition of workpiece blank Define the tool for roughing finishing Call tool drill Retract the tool Define contour subprogram Define general machining parameters W 22 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Cycle definition Pilot drilling Cycle call Pilot drilling Tool change Call the tool for roughing finishing Cycle definition Rough out Cycle call Rough out Cycle definition Floor finishing Cycle call Floor finishing Cycle definition Side finishing Cycle call Side finishing Retract in the tool axis end program 323 8 5 SL Cycles 8 5 SL Cycles WO 24 Contour subprogram 1 left pocket Contour subprogram 2 right pocket Contour subprogram 3 square left island Contour subprogram 4 triangular right island HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Definition of workpiece blank Tool call Retract the tool Define contour subprogram Define machining parameters Cycle call Retract in the tool axis end program 8 5 SL Cycles S i Contour subprogram Saj9A9D 1S G s 26 Notes E Cylinder centered on rotary table Datum at center of rotary table E Description of the midpoint path in the contour subprogram T m J m Z T gt zZ Z O NO Call tool tool axis is Y Retract the tool Position tool on rotary table center Define conto
56. E Optional FOR UPDATE keyword The selected rows are locked against write accesses from other processes HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Example Select all table rows Example Selection of table rows with the WHERE option Example Selection of table rows with the WHERE option and O parameters Example Table name defined with path and file name Tables with SQL Commands sing 10 9 Acce S i 10 9 accell Tables with SQL Commands Equal to Not equal to Less than Less than or equal to Greater than Greater than or equal to Linking multiple conditions Logical AND Logical OR 426 AND OR SQL FETCH SQL FETCH reads the row addressed with INDEX from the result set and places the table entries in the bound assigned Q parameters The result set is addressed with the HANDLE SQL FETCH takes into account all columns entered in the Select command Parameter no for result Q parameter in which the ie SOL server reports the result 0 No error occurred 1 Error occurred incorrect handle or index too large Data bank SQL access ID O parameter with the handle for identifying the result set also see SQL SELECT Data bank Index for SQL result Row number within the result set The table entries of this row are read and are transferred into the bound Q parameters If you do not enter an index the first row is read n 0 Either enter the row number directly or program the
57. Each position on the workpiece is uniquely defined by its absolute coordinates Example 1 Holes dimensioned in absolute coordinates Hole 1 Hole 2 Hole 3 X 10mm X 30mm X 50 mm Y 10 mm Y 20 mm Y 30 mm Incremental workpiece positions Incremental coordinates are referenced to the last programmed nominal position of the tool which serves as the relative imaginary datum When you write a part program in incremental coordinates you thus program the tool to move by the distance between the previous and the subsequent nominal positions Incremental coordinates are therefore also referred to as chain dimensions LA To program a position in incremental coordinates enter the prefix before the axis Example 2 Holes dimensioned in incremental coordinates Absolute coordinates of hole 4 X 10 Mmm Y 10 mm Hole 5 relative to 4 Hole 6 relative to 5 X 20 MM X 20 MM Y 10 mmn Y 10mm Absolute and incremental polar coordinates Absolute polar coordinates always refer to the pole and the reference axis Incremental polar coordinates always refer to the last programmed nominal position of the tool HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 10 77 er 4 1 a er 4 1 Setting the datum A production drawing identities a certain form element of the workpiece usually a corner as the absolute datum When setting the datum you first align the workpiece along the m
58. Enter the desired value in the pop up window Incrementally shift a datum already stored in the CORRECT table This function only saves the datum in the PRESET axis which is currently highlighted Enter the desired corrective value with the correct sign in the pop up window If inch display is active Enter the value in inches and the TNC will internally convert the entered values to mm Directly enter the new datum without calculation EDIT of the kinematics axis specific Only use this FIELD function if your machine has a rotary table and you want to set the datum to the center of the rotary table by entering O This function only saves the datum in the axis which is currently highlighted Enter the desired value in the pop up window If inch display is active Enter the value in inches and the TNC will internally convert the entered values to mm Select the BASIC TRANSFORMATION AXIS OFFSET view The BASIC TRANSFORMATION view shows the X Y and Z columns Depending on the machine the SPA SPB and SPC columns are displayed additionally Here the TNC saves the basic rotation for the Z tool axis the TNC uses the SPC column The OFFSET view shows the offset values to the preset Q 5 Q ap J gt O os O E V m O N Write the currently active datum to a selectable line in the table This function saves the datum in acl allaxes and then activates the appropriate ro
59. HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 8 5 SL Cycles o i Area of intersection Only the area where A and B overlap is to be machined The areas covered by A or B alone are to be left unmachined A and B must be pockets E A must start inside of B 8 5 SL Cycles WY WY Cc Cc s s O O 0 0 D D Ww 06 CONTOUR DATA Cycle 20 Advanced programming features software option Machining data for the subprograms describing the subcontours are entered in Cycle 20 CEP 20 CONTOUR DATA Before programming note the following Cycle 20 is DEF active which means that it becomes effective as soon as it is defined in the part program The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH determines the working direction If you program DEPTH 0 the TNC performs the cycle at the depth 0O The machining data entered in Cycle 20 are valid for Cycles 21 to 24 If you are using the SL cycles in Q parameter programs the cycle parameters Q1 to Q20 cannot be used as program parameters gt Milling depth Q1 incremental value Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of pocket Path overlap factor Q2 Q2 x tool radius stepover factor k Finishing allowance for side O3 incremental value Finishing allowance in the working plane gt Finishing allowance for floor O4 incremental value Finishing allowance in the tool axis Workpiece surface coordinate O5 abs
60. In the Program Run Single Block mode of operation you must start each block separately by pressing the machine START button OnNOUDRDWONP The following TNC functions are available in the program run modes of operation 91 S OVR 11 42 Interrupt program run Start program run from a certain block Optional block skip Editing the tool table TOOL T Check and change O parameters Superimpose handwheel positioning Functions for graphic display with advanced graphic features software option Additional status display 150 F OVR 3 1 857 Y 0 000 S 25 642 321 7 90 Ovr 150 O nm 7min HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 467 11 5 Program Run Running a part program Preparation 1 Clamp the workpiece to the machine table 2 Set the datum 3 Select the necessary tables and pallet files status M 4 Select the part program status M CS You can adjust the feed rate and spindle speed with the override knobs It is possible to reduce the rapid traverse speed when starting the NC program using the FMAX soft key The entered value remains in effect even after the machine has been turned off and on again In order to re establish the original rapid traverse speed you need to re enter the corresponding value Program Run Full Sequence Start the part program with the machine START button Program Run Single Block Start each block of the part program individually with
61. M126 is automatically canceled HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 7 5 Miscellaneous J aii for Rotary Axes i il 7 5 Miscellaneous elffttions for Rotary Axes Reducing display of a rotary axis to a value less than 360 M94 Standard behavior The TNC moves the tool from the current angular value to the programmed angular value Example Current angular value 538 Programmed angular value 180 Actual distance of traverse 358 Behavior with M94 At the start of block the TNC first reduces the current angular value to a value less than 360 and then moves the tool to the programmed value If several rotary axes are active M94 will reduce the display of all rotary axes As an alternative you can enter a rotary axis after M94 The TNC then reduces the display only of this axis Example NC blocks To reduce display of all active rotary axes To reduce display of the C axis only To reduce display of all active rotary axes and then move the tool in the C axis to the programmed value Effect M94 is effective only in the block in which it is programmed M94 becomes effective at the start of block 214 Maintaining the position of the tool tip when positioning with tilted axes TCPM M128 software option 2 Standard behavior The TNC moves the tool to the positions given in the part program If the position of a tilted axis changes in the program the resulting offset in the linear axes must be calculated and traver
62. OF STATUS OF Positions and coordinates ous fe tsstils oir as err Program run full sequence STATUS Type of position display e g actual position 113 H Programming POS REF NOML 1 BLK FORM 0 1 Z X 0 Y 0 Z 20 M 2 BLK FORM 2 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 140 000 f 3 TOOL CALL 3 Z 52000 y 150 000 Number of the active datum from the preset table r n eee EA 6 CYCL DEF 4 0 POCKET MILLING C 0 000 CYCL DEF 4 1 SET UP2 5 321 790 lt Tilt angle of the working plane 9 OVCE DEF Aa Paste ree a 10 CYCL DEF 4 4 X 30 IZ Datum 3 T gt 11 CYCL DEF 4 5 90 4 t Angle of a basic rotation Or eae a r ee a 14 CYCL DEF 5 CIRCULAR POCKET 2 Tilt angle 91 S OVR 11 50 Information on tools 150 F oUR e fae R x 31 857 Y 25 642 2 134 992 n 0 000 S 321 7 90 ACTL mm min Our 150 re Display of tool Tool number a STATUS STATUS STATUS TOOL GUTE STATUS OF STATUS OF STATUS acess M FUNCT PARAM Tool axis Tool lengths and radi Programming Program run full sequence Oversizes delta values from TOOL CALL PGM and 113 H BEGIN PGM 113 MM the tool table TAB TOTEE o f 2 BLK FORM 0 2 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 3 TOOL CALL 3 Z 52000 Z y j 0 0000 4 L 2Z 18 R FMAX M3 4 Tool life maximum tool life TIME 1 and maximum 5 L x 5 Y 50 R FMAX ee Ie 6 cCYCL DEF 4 0 POCKET MILLING
63. OFF Spindle ON clockwise Coolant ON Spindle ON counterclockwise Coolant ON Same function as M02 Vacant miscellaneous function or Cycle call modally effective machine dependent function Within the positioning block Coordinates are referenced to machine datum Within the positioning block Coordinates are referenced to position defined by machine tool builder such as tool change position Reduce the rotary axis display to a value below 360 Machine small contour steps Machine open contours completely Blockwise cycle call Constant contouring speed at tool cutting edge increase and decrease feed rate Constant contouring speed at tool cutting edge feed rate decrease only Cancel M109 M110 Feed rate for rotary tables in mm minn Cancel M116 Superimpose handwheel positioning during program run Pre calculate radius compensated contour LOOK AHEAD Shortest path traverse of rotary axes Cancel M126 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Page 198 Page 475 Page 198 Page 198 Page 198 Page 198 Page 198 Page 198 Page 221 Page 199 Page 199 Page 214 Page 202 Page 204 Page 221 Page 205 Page 212 Page 208 Page 206 Page 213 f il M128 Retain position of tool tip when positioning tilting axes TCPM Page 215 M129 Cancel M128 M130 Within the positioning block Points are referenced to the untilted coordinate Page 201 system M140 Retraction from the contour in the tool axis direction Page 209 M141 Suppress t
64. Programmi HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 185 il T O re O n o 6 6 Path Contours FK Free Contour Programmi Auxiliary points You can enter the coordinates of auxiliary points that are located on the contour or in its proximity for both free programmed straight lines and free programmed circular arcs Auxiliary points on a contour The auxiliary points are located on a Straight line or on the extension of a Straight line or on a circular arc P1 or P2 of a Straight line Y coordinate of an auxiliary point 1Y P2y P1 or P2 of a straight line X coordinate of an auxiliary Pr point a X coordinate of an auxiliary point P1 P2 or P3 of a circular arc E E R 1Y Y coordinate of an auxiliary point P1 P2 or P3 of a circular arc z Auxiliary points near a contour X and Y coordinates of an auxiliary point near a straight line Distance of auxiliary point to straight line A X and Y coordinates of an auxiliary point near a circular arc poy PDY Distance of auxiliary point to circular arc re Example NC blocks Relative data Data whose values are based on another contour element are called relative data The soft keys and program words for entries begin with the letter R for Relative The figure at right shows the entries that should be programmed as relative data CS The coordinates and angles for relative data are always programmed in incremental dimensions You must also
65. RO FMAX M2 LBL 10 Q16 Q06 Q10 Q108 FN 0 020 1 FN 0 024 04 Q25 Q5 Q4 013 CYCL DEF 7 0 DATUM SHIFT CYCL DEF 7 1 X Q1 CYCL DEF 7 2 Y Q2 CYCL DEF 7 3 Z Q3 CYCL DEF 10 0 ROTATION CYCL DEF 10 1 ROT Q8 L X 0 Y 0 RO FMAX L Z 5 RO F1000 M3 LBL 1 CC Z 0 X 0 LP PR Q16 PA Q24 FQ11 L Y Q7 RO FQ12 FN 1 Q20 Q20 1 FN 1 Q24 024 025 FN 11 IF Q20 GT Q13 GOTO LBL 99 LP PR Q16 PA Q24 FQ11 L Y 0 RO FQ12 FN 1 Q20 Q20 1 FN 1 Q24 024 025 FN 12 IF Q20 LT 013 GOTO LBL 1 LBL 99 CYCL DEF 10 0 ROTATION CYCL DEF 10 1 ROT 0 CYCL DEF 7 0 DATUM SHIFT CYCL DEF 7 1 X 0 CYCL DEF 7 2 Y 0 CYCL DEF 7 3 Z 0 LBL 0 END PGM CYLIN HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Retract in the tool axis end program Subprogram 10 Machining operation Account for allowance and tool based on the cylinder radius Set counter Copy starting angle in space Z X plane Calculate angle increment Shift datum to center of cylinder X axis Account for rotational position in the plane Pre position in the plane to the cylinder center Pre position in the tool axis Set pole in the Z X plane Move to starting position on cylinder plunge cutting obliquely into the material Longitudinal cut in Y direction Update the counter Update solid angle Finished If finished jump to end Move in an approximated arc for the next longitudinal cut Longitudinal cut in Y direction Update the counter Updat
66. RULED SURFACE Cycle 231 Advanced programming features software option 1 From the current position the TNC positions the tool in a linear 3 D movement to the starting point 1 2 The tool subsequently advances to the stopping point 2 at the feed rate for milling 3 From this point the tool moves at rapid traverse FMAX by the tool diameter in the positive spindle axis direction and then back to starting point 1 4 At the starting point 1 the TNC moves the tool back to the last traversed Z value 5 Then the TNC moves the tool in all three axes from point 1 in the direction of point 4 to the next line 6 From this point the tool moves to the stopping point on this pass The TNC calculates the end point from point 2 and a movement in the direction of point 3 7 Multipass milling is repeated until the programmed surface has been completed 8 At the end of the cycle the tool is positioned above the highest programmed point in the spindle axis offset by the tool diameter Cutting motion The starting point and therefore the milling direction is selectable because the TNC always moves from point 1 to point 2 and in the total movement from point 1 2 to point 3 4 You can program point 1 at any corner of the surface to be machined If you are using an end mill for the machining operation you can optimize the surface finish in the following ways A shaping cut spindle axis coordinate of point 1 greater than spindle axis coord
67. Select the function for converting a string parameter to a numerical value TONUMB Enter the number of the O parameter to be converted and confirm with the ENT key Close the parenthetical expression with the ENT key and confirm your entry with the END key Example Convert string parameter QS11 to a numerical parameter Q82 438 Checking a string parameter With the INSTR function you can check whether a string parameter is contained in another string parameter FORMULA INSTR Select Q parameter functions Select the FORMULA function Enter the number of the Q parameter in which the TNC is to save the place at which the search text begins Confirm with the ENT key Shift the soft key row Select the function for checking a string parameter Enter the number of the OS parameter in which the text to be searched for Is saved Confirm with the ENT key Enter the number of the OS parameter to be searched and confirm with the ENT key Enter the number of the place starting from which the TNC is to search the substring and confirm with the ENT key Close the parenthetical expression with the ENT key and confirm your entry with the END key Remember that the first character of a text sequence starts internally with the zeroth place If the TNC cannot find the required substring it will save the total length of the string to be searched counting starts at 1 in the result parameter If the substring is fo
68. Wrong rom Radius comp undefined Rounding off undefined Rounding radius too large Program start undefined Excessive nesting Angle reference missing No fixed cycle defined Slot width too small Pocket too small Q202 not defined Q205 not defined Q218 must be greater than Q219 CYCL 210 not permitted CYCL 211 not permitted Q220 too large Q222 must be greater than Q223 Q244 must be greater than 0 Q245 must not equal Q246 Angle range must be lt 360 Q223 must be greater than Q222 Q214 O not permitted Traverse direction not defined No datum table active Position error center in axis 1 Position error center in axis 2 Hole diameter too small Hole diameter too large Stud diameter too small Stud diameter too large Pocket too small rework axis 1 Pocket too small rework axis 2 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 ions Funct itiona 10 8 Add j il ions Funct itiona 10 8 Add 1052 1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 1059 1060 1061 1062 1063 1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 1071 1072 1073 1074 1075 1076 1077 1078 1079 1080 1081 1082 1083 1084 Pocket too large scrap axis 1 Pocket too large scrap axis 2 Stud too small scrap axis 1 Stud too small scrap axis 2 Stud too large rework axis 1 Stud too large rework axis 2 TCHPROBE 425 length exceeds max TCHPROBE 425 length below min TCHPROBE 426 length exceeds max TCHPROBE 426 length below min TCHPROBE 430 diameter too large
69. Z 10 RO FM 20 END PGM 14 MM MM X 0 Y 0 Z 20 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 53500 AX M13 Y 5 RS RL F250 Standard X View 2 A o e 7 4 1 ARC SIN COS TAN x y SQRT 17x PI AX M30 N n o Subtraction Multiplication i Division Parenthetic calculations Arc cosine ARC Sine SIN Cosine COS Tangent TAN Powers of values XAY Square root SORT Inversion 1 x pi 8 14159265359 PI Add value to buffer memory M Save the value to buffer memory MS Recall from buffer memory MR Delete buffer memory contents MC Natural logarithm LN Logarithm LOG Exponential function e x Check algebraic sign SGN Form the absolute value ABS Truncate decimal places INT Truncate integers FRAC HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 DIAGNOSE ot EF aa cs 4 8 Integrated poem catoulator function Shortcut Soft Key Oo T Modulus operator MOD Select view View Delete value CE Q Unit of measure MM or INCH Display mode for angle values DEG degree or RAD radian measure Display mode for numeric values DEC decimal or HEX hexadecimal To transfer the calculated value into the program Use the arrow keys to select the word into which the calculated value is to be transferred Superimpose the on line calculator by pressing the CALC key and perform the desired calculation Press the actual position capture key for the TNC to superimpose a sott key row Press the CALC sof
70. always run a graphical program test before machining This is a simple way of finding out whether the TNC calculated program will provide the desired results Characteristics of the subprograms Coordinate transformations are allowed If they are programmed within the subcontour they are also effective in the following subprograms but they need not be reset after the cycle call The TNC ignores feed rates F and miscellaneous functions M E The TNC recognizes a pocket if the tool path lies inside the contour for example if you machine the contour clockwise with radius compensation RR E The TNC recognizes an island if the tool path lies outside the contour for example if you machine the contour clockwise with radius compensation RL E The subprograms must not contain spindle axis coordinates E Always program both axes in the first block of the subprogram E f you use Q parameters then only perform the calculations and assignments within the affected contour subprograms 300 Example Program structure Machining with SL cycles Characteristics of the fixed cycles The TNC automatically positions the tool to the set up clearance before a cycle Each level of infeed depth is milled without interruptions since the cutter traverses around islands instead of over them The radius of inside corners can be programmed the tool keeps moving to prevent surface b
71. axis set up clearance above the workpiece surface The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH determines the working direction If you program DEPTH 0 the cycle will not be executed Use the machine parameter displayDepthErr to define tt whether if a positive depth is entered the TNC should output an error message on or not off Danger of collision 278 Set up clearance 1 incremental value Distance between tool tip at starting position and workpiece surface Milling depth 2 Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of pocket Plunging depth 3 incremental value Infeed per cut The TNC will go to depth in one movement if E the plunging depth is equal to the depth the plunging depth is greater than the depth gt Feed rate for plunging Traversing speed of the tool during penetration Circular radius Radius of the circular pocket Feed rate F Traversing speed of the tool in the working plane Clockwise DR Climb milling with M3 DR Up cut milling with M3 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Example NC blocks 8 3 Cycles for a eet Studs and Slots C i CIRCULAR POCKET FINISHING Cycle 214 Advanced programming features software option 1 The TNC automatically moves the tool in the spindle axis to the set up clearance or if programmed to the 2nd set up clearance and subsequently to the center of the pocket 2 From the pocket center the tool moves in t
72. clearance Q204 incremental value Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece clamping devices can occur Nominal diameter 0335 absolute value Bore hole diameter If you have entered the nominal diameter to be the same as the tool diameter the TNC will bore directly to the entered depth without any helical interpolation gt Roughing diameter Q342 absolute value As soon as you enter a value greater than O in 0342 the TNC no longer checks the ratio between the nominal diameter and the tool diameter This allows you to Example NC blocks rough mill holes whose diameter is more than twice as large as the tool diameter Y X O S oO b a Kan OD O S Em 5 S m Sn e t N gt Q N 00 Climb or up cut 0351 Type of milling operation with M3 1 climb milling 1 up cut milling HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 241 8 2 Cycles for Drilling Ming and Thread Milling TAPPING NEW with floating tap holder Cycle 206 1 The TNC positions the tool in the spindle axis at rapid traverse FMAX to the programmed set up clearance above the workpiece surface 2 The tool drills to the total hole depth in one movement 3 Once the tool has reached the total hole depth the direction of spindle rotation is reversed and the tool is retracted to the set up clearance at the end of the dwell time If programmed the tool moves to the 2nd set u
73. contour point Pa on a straight line perpendicular to the first contour element The auxiliary point Py is separated by the distance LEN plus the tool radius from the first contour point P4 Use any path function to approach the starting point Ps Initiate the dialog with the APPR DEP key and APPR LN soft key APPR LN gt Coordinates of the first contour point Pp a gt Length Distance to the auxiliary point Py Always enter LEN as a positive value gt Radius compensation RR RL for machining Example NC blocks HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Approach Ps without radius compensation Pa with radius comp RR distance Py to Pa LEN 15 End point of the first contour element Next contour element Approach Ps without radius compensation Pa with radius comp RR End point of the first contour element Next contour element 153 6 3 Contour Appro ch and Departure 6 3 Contour Appro Approaching on a circular path with tangential connection APPR CT The tool moves on a straight line from the starting point Ps to an auxiliary point Py It then moves to the first contour point Pa following a circular arc that is tangential to the first contour element The arc from Py to Pa is determined through the radius R and the center angle CCA The direction of rotation of the circular arc is automatically derived from the tool path for the first contour element Use any path function to approach the starting point Ps
74. contours consisting of several overlapping subcontours cylinder surface interpolation Cycles for face milling of flat or twisted MULTIPASS 331 surfaces MILLING Coordinate transformation cycles which Soe 344 enable datum shift rotation mirror JERS image enlarging and reducing for various contours Special cycles such as dwell time program call oriented spindle stop and tolerance SPECIAL 3 63 CYCLES If you use Indirect parameter assignments in fixed cycles with numbers greater than 200 e g 0210 Q1 any change in the assigned parameter e g Q1 will have no effect after the cycle definition Define the cycle parameter e g Q210 directly in such cases t If you define a feed rate parameter for fixed cycles greater than 200 then instead of entering a numerical value you can use soft keys to assign the feed rate defined in the TOOL CALL block FAUTO soft key or rapid traverse FMAX soft key Note that after a cycle definition a change of the FAUTO feed rate has no effect because internally the TNC assigns the feed rate from the TOOL CALL block when processing the cycle definition If you want to delete a block that is part of a cycle the TNC asks you whether you want to delete the whole cycle 220 Calling cycles The following cycles become effective automatically as soon as they are defined in the part program These cycles cannot and must not be called Cycle 220 for poin
75. cutter O lt R2 lt R Toroid cutter These data also specify the coordinates of the tool datum Pr Using other tools Delta values If you want to use tools that have different dimensions than the ones you originally programmed you can enter the difference between the tool lengths and radii as delta values in the tool table or TOOL CALL Positive delta value DL DR DR2 The tool is larger than the original tool oversize Negative delta value DL DR DR2 The tool is smaller than the original tool undersize The TNC then compensates the tool position by the sum of the delta values from the tool table and the tool call 3 D compensation without tool orientation The TNC displaces the tool in the direction of the surface normal vectors by the sum of the delta values tool table and TOOL CALL Example Block format with surface normal vectors LN Straight line with 3 D compensation Ki Ys Z Compensated coordinates of the straight line end point NX NY NZ Components of the surface normal vector F Feed rate M Miscellaneous function The feed rate F and miscellaneous function M can be entered and changed in the Programming and Editing mode of operation The coordinates of the straight line end point and the components of the surface normal vectors are to be defined by the CAM system 140 Face milling 3 D compensation with and without tool orientation The TNC displaces the tool in the direction of the surf
76. data is based on the new datum The TNC displays the datum shift in each axis in the additional status display Input of rotary axes is also permitted 7 gt Datum shift Enter the coordinates of the new datum Absolute values are referenced to the manually set workpiece datum Incremental values are always referenced to the datum which was last valid this can be a datum which has already been shifted Cancellation A datum shift is canceled by entering the datum shift coordinates X 0 Y 0 and Z 0 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Example NC blocks 8 7 voor Transformation Cycles j i fe Transformation Cycles 5 O O Q ae 00 DATUM SHIFT with datum tables Cycle 7 Ce The datum table used depends on the operating mode or is selectable Program Run operating modes zeroshift d table Test Run operating mode simzeroshift d table Datums from a datum table are referenced to the current datum The coordinate values from datum tables are only effective with absolute coordinate values New lines can only be inserted at the end of the table If you create further datum tables the file name has to start with a letter Application Datum tables are used for frequently recurring machining sequences at various locations on the workpiece frequent use of the same datum shift Within a program you can either program datum points directly in the cycle definition or call them from a datum tab
77. feed rate for pre positioning until the tooth has reached the set up clearance on the underside of the workpiece 4 The TNC then centers the tool again over the bore hole switches on the spindle and the coolant and moves at the feed rate for boring to the depth of bore 5 Ifa dwell time is entered the tool will pause at the top of the bore hole and will then be retracted from the hole again Another oriented spindle stop is carried out and the tool is once again displaced by the off center distance 6 The TNC moves the tool at the pre positioning feed rate to the set up clearance and then if entered to the 2nd set up clearance at FMAX D 8 2 Cycles for Drilling E Before programming note the following Program a positioning block for the starting point hole center in the working plane with radius compensation RO The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter depth determines the working direction Note A positive sign bores in the direction of the positive spindle axis The entered tool length is the total length to the underside of the boring bar and not just to the tooth When calculating the starting point for boring the TNC considers the tooth length of the boring bar and the thickness of the material HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 8 2 Cycles for Drilling I inc and Thread Milling 236 gt Set up clearance Q200 incremental value Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface gt Depth of counter
78. first value or parameter is greater than the second jump to the given label FN12 IF LESS THAN GO TO ce Example FN12 IF Q5 LT 0 GOTO LBL ANYNAME GoTo If the first value or parameter is less than the second jump to the given label 394 Abbreviations used IF EQU NE GT LT GOTO HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 If Equals Not equal Greater than Less than Go to 10 6 i Decisions with Q Parameters j il 10 7 Checking and Changing Q Parameters N Sem vb end eb Procedure Som oO You can check Q parameters when writing testing and running Manual operation Programming programs in all operating modes and except in the test run edit them EX11 H O If you are in a program run interrupt it if required for example by 2 BLK FORM 0 1 Z X 195 V 40 2 5 i E O pressing the machine STOP button and the INTERNAL STOP soft ae stare Sie 3 6 CYCL DEF 200 DRILLING s a key If you are in a test run interrupt it 0201 15 DEPTH pues 4 _ azo2 10 1 7PLUNGIN z O a To call Q parameter functions Press the Q INFO soft 0z10 0 re o Em Ea z c ae key in the Programming and Editing mode of tie zouene Traa PE a operation AAU 0 lt Tare A C The TNC opens a pop up window in which you can 13 GYL DEF 22 CONTOUR CANCEL enter the desired range for display of the aass SALLOUANCE FOR SIDE O Q parameters or string parameters 0518 SURFACE COORDINATE aoz o a a AE In the Program Run Single Bloc
79. for all the information necessary to program the desired function Example of a dialog a Dialog initiation x 10 Enter the target coordinate for the X axis Enter the target coordinate for the Y axis and go to the next question with ENT y s 4 4 Creating and Wri Enter No radius compensation and go to the next question with ENT Enter a feed rate of 100 mm min for this path contour go to the next question with ENT p 00 Enter the miscellaneous function M3 spindle ON Pressing the ENT key terminates this dialog ow The program block window displays the following line HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 V re O O pe A Manual operation P r o g r a m m i n g Miscellaneous function M BEGIN PGM 14 MM i i i 0 Z 20 i i H M bd 1 1 m O O O IE J 30 000 j E ee n R7 i i L H H H 6 5 H 18 L Z 2 RO FMAX z j E EE EE 19 L Z 100 R FMAX M30 i j 20 END PGM 14 MM i i i M M94 mies n118 n120 n128 138 B 99 V Sen O pe am 4 4 Creating and Wri Possible feed rate input Rapid traverse F MAX Traverse feed rate automatically calculated in TOOL CALL ini Move at the programmed feed rate unit of measure is mm min Ignore the dialog question jno ENT Se End the dialog immediately Abort the dialog and erase the block DEL ai Actual position capture The TNC enabl
80. for slot cycle Radius for circular pocket cycle Feed rate for milling in active fixed cycle Direction of rotation for active fixed cycle Dwell time for active fixed cycle Thread pitch for Cycles 17 18 Milling allowance for active fixed cycle Direction angle for rough out in active fixed cycle Probing angle Probing path Probing feed rate Dimensioning 0 absolute G90 1 incremental G91 Result code for the last SOL command Tool length Tool radius Tool radius R2 Oversize in tool length DL Oversize in tool radius DR Oversize for tool radius DR2 Tool inhibited 0 or 1 Number of the replacement tool Maximum tool age TIME1 Maximum tool age TIME2 Current tool age CUR TIME PLC status Pocket table data 51 Pocket number of a tool in the tool pocket table 52 Values programmed immediately after TOOL CALL 60 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 13 14 19 20 21 ZZ 23 24 25 26 27 28 Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Pocket number Pocket number Pocket number Pocket number Pocket number Tool no Tool no Maximum tooth length LCUTS Maximum plunge angle ANGLE TT Number of teeth CUT TT Wear tolerance in length LTOL TT Wear tolerance in radius RTOL TT Rotational direction DIRECT O positive 1 negative TT Offset in plane R OFFS TT Offset in length L OFFS
81. identified by a number between 1 and 65 534 or by a name you define Each LABEL number or LABEL name can be set only once in the program with LABEL SET The number of label names you can enter is only limited by the internal memory CS Do not use a label number or label name more than once LABEL O LBL 0 is used exclusively to mark the end of a subprogram and can therefore be used as often as desired 370 9 2 Subprograms Actions 1 The TNC executes the part program up to the block in which a subprogram is called with CALL LBL 2 The subprogram is then executed from beginning to end The Subprogram end is marked LBL 0 3 The TNC then resumes the part program from the block after the subprogram call CALL LBL 9 2 Subprograms Programming notes A main program can contain up to 254 subprograms You can call subprograms in any sequence and as often as desired A subprogram cannot call itself Write subprograms at the end of the main program after the block with M02 or M30 If subprograms are located before the block with M02 or M30 they will be executed at least once even if they are not called Programming a subprogram To mark the beginning press the LBL SET key SET Enter the subprogram number To mark the end press the LBL SET key and enter the label number O Calling a subprogram To call a subprogram press the LBL CALL key CALL Label number Enter the label number of the subprogram you wish to call
82. in order to calculate the centering depth from the diameter entry Tool type for evaluation in the pocket table HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Tool type Tool description PLC status Tooth length in the tool axis Maximum plunge angle Retract tool Y N Number of the touch probe Point angle Tool type for pocket table 5 2 Tool Data j il 5 2 Tool Data Tool table Tool data required for automatic tool measurement CEP CUT LTOL RTOL DIRECT R OFFS L OFFS LBREAK RBREAK 126 For a description of the cycles governing automatic tool measurement see the Touch Probe Cycles Manual Chapter 4 Number of teeth 20 teeth maximum Permissible deviation from tool length L for wear detection If the entered value is exceeded the TNC locks the tool status L Input range O to 0 9999 mm Permissible deviation from tool radius R for wear detection If the entered value is exceeded the TNC locks the tool status L Input range 0 to 0 9999 mm Cutting direction of the tool for measuring the tool during rotation For tool length measurement Tool offset between stylus center and tool center Preset No value entered offset tool radius Tool radius measurement Tool offset in addition to the offsetToolAxis parameter between upper surface of stylus and lower surface of tool Default O Permissible deviation from tool length L for breakage detection If the entered value is exceeded the TNC
83. is to withdraw the tool from the hole for chip release For chip breaking the TNC retracts the tool each time by the value in Q256 gt Minimum plunging depth Q205 incremental value If you have entered a decrement the TNC limits the plunging depth to the value entered with Q205 gt Dwell time at depth 0211 Time in seconds that the tool remains at the hole bottom Retraction feed rate Q208 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min when retracting trom the hole If you enter Q208 0 the TNC retracts the tool at the feed rate in Q206 Retraction rate for chip breaking Q256 incremental value Value by which the TNC retracts the tool during chip breaking BACK BORING Cycle 204 Advanced programming features software option ing Machine and control must be specially prepared by the oh machine tool builder for use of this cycle This cycle is effective only for machines with controlled spindle Special boring bars for upward cutting are required for this cycle d Thread Mill This cycle allows holes to be bored from the underside of the workpiece 1 The TNC positions the tool in the spindle axis at rapid traverse FMAX to the set up clearance above the workpiece surface 2 The TNC then orients the spindle to the 0 position with an oriented spindle stop and displaces the tool by the off center distance 3 The tool is then plunged into the already bored hole at the
84. key to select the workpiece surface see table below To reduce or magnify the blank form press and hold the ZOOM IN or ZOOM OUT soft keys Shift the soft key row and select the TRANSFER DETAIL soft key Restart the test run or program run by pressing the START soft key RESET START returns the workpiece blank to its original state T 2 ad O hom Oo Y N o hom q o LL K E 11 1 Graphics Advanc 460 Coordinates for magnifying details The TNC displays the selected workpiece side for each axis and the coordinates of the remaining form during a detail magnification Select the left right workpiece surface w X Select the front back workpiece surface Select the top bottom workpiece surface Shift the sectional plane to reduce or magnify the blank form Select the isolated detail a DETAIL TUL E After a new workpiece detail magnification is selected the control forgets previously simulated machining operations The TNC then displays machined areas as unmachined areas HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 raphic Features Software Option T gt O lt T lt S g q q i il raphic Features Software Option 11 1 Graphics Advancec Repeating graphic simulation A part program can be graphically simulated as often as desired either with the complete workpiece or with a detail of it
85. machine referenced coordinates M91 M92 Scale reference point On the scale a reference mark indicates the position of the scale reference point Machine datum The machine datum is required for the following tasks Defining the limits of traverse Software limit switches Moving to machine referenced positions such as tool change positions Setting the workpiece datum The distance in each axis from the scale reference point to the machine datum is defined by the machine tool builder in a machine parameter Standard behavior The TNC references coordinates to the workpiece datum see Datum Setting Without a 3 D Touch Probe page 54 Behavior with M91 Machine datum If you want the coordinates in a positioning block to be referenced to the machine datum end the block with M91 E If you program incremental coordinates in an M91 block enter them with respect to the last programmed M91 position If no M91 position is programmed in the active NC block then enter the coordinates with respect to the current tool position The coordinate values on the TNC screen are referenced to the machine datum Switch the display of coordinates in the status display to REF see Status Displays page 37 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 7 3 Miscellaneous rune for Coordinate Data j il 7 3 Miscellaneous Functii for Coordinate Data Behavior with M92 Additional machine datum In addition to the machine datum th
86. milling a thread in pre drilled material and machining a countersunk chamfer 264 THREAD DRILLING MILLING 254 Cycle for drilling into the solid material with subsequent milling of the thread with a tool 265 HEL THREAD DRILLING MILLING 255 Cycle for milling the thread into the solid material 267 OUTSIDE THREAD MLLNG Cycle for milling an external thread and is machining a countersunk chamfer 224 251 253 257 261 265 CENTERING Cycle 240 Advanced programming features software option 1 The TNC positions the tool in the spindle axis at rapid traverse FMAX to the set up clearance above the workpiece surface 2 The tool is centered at the programmed feed rate F to the entered centering diameter or centering depth 3 If defined the tool remains at the centering depth 4 Finally the tool path is retraced to set up clearance or if programmed to the 2nd set up clearance at rapid traverse FMAX HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Q203 8 2 Cycles for Drilling een and Thread Milling f i 8 2 Cycles for Drilling WA oinc and Thread Milling 226 gt Set up clearance Q200 incremental value Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface Enter a positive value Input range 0 to 99999 9999 gt Select Depth Diameter 0 1 Q343 Select whether centering is based on the entered diameter or depth If the TNC is to center based on the entered diameter the point angle of the tool must be defined in the T A
87. milling path in reference to the starting point in the Ist axis Second side length 0219 incremental value Length of the surface to be machined in the minor axis of the working plane Use the algebraic sign to specify the direction of the first stepover in reference to the starting point in the 2nd axis HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Q227 8 6 u for Multipass Milling Q386 X j il 8 6 Mes for Multipass Milling 340 Maximum plunging depth Q202 incremental value Maximum amount that the tool is advanced each time The TNC calculates the actual plunging depth from the difference between the end point and starting point of the tool axis taking the finishing allowance into account so that uniform plunging depths are used each time Allowance for floor Q309 incremental value Distance used for the last infeed Max path overlap factor 0370 Maximum stepover factor k The TNC calculates the actual stepover from the second side length Q219 and the tool radius so that a constant stepover is used for machining If you have entered a radius R2 in the tool table e g tooth radius when using a face milling cutter the TNC reduces the stepover accordingly Feed rate for milling Q207 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min while milling Feed rate for finishing Q385 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min while milling the last infeed Feed rate for pre positioning 0253 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min when approach
88. need to ask pour network administrator for the appropriate IF settings If the PC that you want to connect the TNC to is already integrated in your company network then keep the PC s Obtain an IP address automatically network address and adapt the TNC s network address Use the following IP address accordingly IP address 160 1 180 subnet mask 200 250 0 To open Network Connections click lt Start gt lt Control Panel gt lt Network and Dial up Connections gt and then Network Parant oalenar E Connections Right click the lt LAN connection gt symbol and then lt Properties gt in the menu that appears Double click lt Internet Protocol TCP IP gt to change the IP settings see figure at top right If it is not yet active select the lt Use the following IP address gt option Advanced In the lt IP address gt input field enter the same IP address that you entered for the PC network settings on the iITNC e g 160 1 180 1 Enter 255 255 0 0 in the lt Subnet mask gt input field Confirm the settings with lt OK gt Save the network configuration with lt OK gt You may have to restart Windows now f Obtain ONS server address automatically 12 8 Ethernet Interface f Use the following DNS server addresses Preferred DNS server Alternate DONS server HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 495 MOVE D 1276 25852 H 22 REIECK H S0 E i E l ihe VEIS H 76 E IS3S1 XY
89. numbers Set the SHOW OMIT BLOCK NR soft key to SHOW To omit block numbers Set the SHOW OMIT BLOCK NR soft key to OMIT Erasing the graphic E Shift the soft key row see figure at upper right Erase graphic Press CLEAR GRAPHICS soft key Magnifying or reducing a detail You can select the graphics display by selecting a detail with the frame overlay You can now magnify or reduce the selected detail Select the soft key row for detail magnification reduction second row see figure at center right The following functions are available Show and move the frame overlay Press and hold the desired soft key to move the frame overlay Ea t Reduce the frame overlay press and hold the soft key to reduce the detail Enlarge the frame overlay press and hold the soft key to magnify the detail Confirm the selected area with the WINDOW DETAIL DETAN soft key With the WINDOW BLK FORM soft key you can restore the original section 108 Programming L 2 5 RO FMAX M3 7 APPR LCT X 10 Y 0 RS RL 8 FPOL X 100 Y 0 9 FC DR R10 CLSD CCX 0 10 FLT 11 FCT DR R15 CCX 100 CCY 0 12 FLT 13 FCT DR R10 CCPR 40 CCPA 110 1 15 18 FCT DR R10 CLSD CCX CCY 19 FSELECT1 20 DEP LCT X 30 Y 0 Z 100 RS FMAX 21 END PGM HEBEL MM RESET K on Ss ptt me zs Oh WINDOW DETAIL 4 6 Structuring Programs Definition and applications
90. of the arc with CR Move to point 4 End point of the arc with CR radius 30 mm Move to point 5 Move to point 6 Move to point 7 End point of the arc circular arc with tangential connection to point 6 TNC automatically calculates the radius 6 4 Path vontours caesien Coordinates HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Move to last contour point 1 Depart the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection Retract in the tool axis end program o i 6 4 Path Contours cl sian Coordinates 70 Definition of workpiece blank Tool call Define the circle center Retract the tool Pre position the tool Move to working depth Approach the starting point of the circle on a circular arc with tangential connection Move to the circle end point circle starting point Depart the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection Retract in the tool axis end program 6 5 Path Contours Polar Coordinates Overview With polar coordinates you can define a position in terms of its angle PA and its distance PR relative to a previously defined pole CC see Fundamentals page 178 Polar coordinates are useful with Positions on circular arcs Workpiece drawing dimensions in degrees e g bolt hole circles Overview of path functions with polar coordinates Line LP P Straight line Circular arc CP P Circular path around circle center pole CC to arc end point Circular arc CTP P
91. operation status M If the program contains a programmed interruption before the startup block the block scan is interrupted Press the machine START button to continue the block scan ACTL fl mm min Our 150 User requests are not possible during mid program startup After a block scan return the tool to the calculated position with RESTORE POSITION Tool length compensation does not take effect until after the tool call and a following positioning block This applies if you have only changed the tool length E The TNC skips all touch probe cycles in a mid program startup Result parameters that are written to from these cycles might therefore remain empty You may not use mid program startup if the following occurs after a tool change in the machining program The program is started in an FK sequence The stretch filter is active Pallet management is used The program is started in a threading cycle Cycles 17 18 19 206 207 and 209 or the subsequent program block Touch probe cycles 0 1 and 3 are used before program start HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 471 il 11 5 Program Run To go to the first block of the current program to start a block scan enter GOTO 0 To select mid program startup press the RESTORE POS AT N soft key Start up at N Enter the block number N at which the block scan should end BLOCK SCAN i Program Enter the name of the program containing block N Repetition
92. pressed Position the tool in such a way that a collision is excluded during the subsequent crossing of the reference points To cross the reference points you have to deactivate the Tilt Working Plane function see Activating manual tilting page 65 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 2 1 Switch On Swi Of 2 1 Switch On swil or Switch off To prevent data from being lost at switch off you need to shut down the operating system of the TNC as follows Select the Manual Operation mode AO Select the function for shutting down confirm again with the YES soft key When the TNC displays the message NOW IT IS SAFE TO TURN POWER OFF in a Superimposed window you may cut off the power supply to the TNC CS Inappropriate switch off of the TNC can lead to data loss Remember that pressing the END key after the control has been shut down restarts the control Switch off during a restart can also result in data loss 48 2 2 Traversing the Machine Axes Note Traversing with the machine axis direction buttons can 4 vary depending on the machine tool The machine tool manual provides further information To traverse with the machine axis direction buttons Select the Manual Operation mode Press the machine axis direction button and hold it as long as you wish the axis to move or Move the axis continuously Press and hold the machine axis direction button then press the and machine START button amp To
93. programming note the following The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH determines the working direction The TNC takes only the first label of Cycle 14 CONTOUR GEOMETRY into account The memory capacity for programming the cycle is limited You can program up to 1000 contour elements in one cycle Cycle 20 CONTOUR DATA is not required Positions that are programmed in incremental dimensions immediately after Cycle 25 are referenced to the position of the tool at the end of the cycle ath Danger of collision To avoid collisions Do not program positions in incremental dimensions immediately after Cycle 25 since they are referenced to the position of the tool at the end of the cycle Move the tool to defined absolute positions in all main axes since the position of the tool at the end of the cycle is not identical to the position of the tool at the start of the cycle HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 8 5 SL Cycles Example NC blocks i i 8 5 SL Cycles N ul k 314 Milling depth Q1 incremental value Distance between workpiece surface and contour floor Finishing allowance for side O3 incremental value Finishing allowance in the working plane Workpiece surface coordinate Q5 absolute value Absolute coordinate of the workpiece surface referenced to the workpiece datum Clearance height Q7 absolute value Absolute height at which the tool cannot collide with the workpiece Position for to
94. programming features software option 274 STUD FINISHING Cycle 213 Advanced programming features software option 2 6 CIRCULAR POCKET Cycle 5 278 CIRCULAR POCKET FINISHING Cycle 214 Advanced programming features software option 280 CIRCULAR STUD FINISHING Cycle 215 Advanced programming features software option 282 SLOT oblong hole with reciprocating plunge cut Cycle 210 Advanced programming features software option 284 CIRCULAR SLOT oblong hole with reciprocating plunge cut Cycle 211 Advanced programming features software option 287 8 4 Cycles tor Machining Point Patterns 293 Overview 293 CIRCULAR PATTERN Cycle 220 Advanced programming features software option 294 LINEAR PATTERN Cycle 221 Advanced programming features software option 296 20 8 5 SL Cycles 300 Fundamentals 300 Overview of SL cycles 302 CONTOUR GEOMETRY Cycle 14 303 Overlapping contours 304 CONTOUR DATA Cycle 20 Advanced programming features software option 307 PILOT DRILLING Cycle 21 Advanced programming features software option 308 ROUGH OUT Cycle 22 Advanced programming features software option 309 FLOOR FINISHING Cycle 23 Advanced programming features software option 311 SIDE FINISHING Cycle 24 Advanced programming features software option 312 CONTOUR TRAIN Cycle 25 Advanced programming features software opt
95. rotation in the FC FCT block The TNC calculates a circle center for free programmed arcs from the data you enter This makes it possible to program full circles in an FK program block If you wish to define the circle center in polar coordinates you must use FPOL not CC to define the pole FPOL is entered in Cartesian coordinates and remains in effect until the TNC encounters a block in which another FPOL is defined T O re O n oO CS A circle center that was calculated or programmed conventionally is then no longer valid as a pole or circle center for the new FK contour If you enter conventional polar coordinates that refer to a pole from a CC block you have defined previously then you must enter the pole again in a CC block after the FK contour Circle center in Cartesian coordinates Circle center in polar coordinates RAJ cc Rotational direction of an arc DR DR Radius of an arc o Example NC blocks 6 6 Path Contours FK Free Contour Programmi 184 Closed contours You can identify the beginning and end of a closed contour with the CLSD soft key This reduces the number of possible solutions for the last contour element lt Enter CLSD as an addition to another contour data entry in the first and last blocks of an FK section Beginning of contour CLSD End of contour CLSD Example NC blocks T O me Q O om oO 6 6 Path Contours FK Free Contour
96. roughing procedure until the program depth is reached 5 Finally the TNC retracts the tool to the clearance height 8 5 SL Cycles Ez Before programming note the following This cycle requires a center cut end mill ISO 1641 or pilot drilling with Cycle 21 You define the plunging behavior of Cycle 22 with parameter Q19 and with the tool table in the ANGLE and LCUTS columns If Q19 0 is defined the TNC always plunges perpendicularly even if a plunge angle ANGLE is defined for the active tool If you define the ANGLE 90 the TNC plunges perpendicularly The reciprocation feed rate O19 is used as plunging feed rate If the reciprocation feed rate Q19 is defined in Cycle 22 and ANGLE is defined between 0 1 and 89 999 in the tool table the TNC plunges on a zigzag path at the defined ANGLE If the reciprocation feed is defined in Cycle 22 and no ANGLE is in the tool table the TNC displays an error message Example NC blocks If you clear out an acute inside corner and use an overlap factor greater than 1 some material might be left over Check especially the innermost path in the test run graphic and if necessary change the overlap factor slightly This allows another distribution of cuts which often provides the desired results During fine roughing the TNC does not take a defined wear value DR of the coarse roughing tool into account HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 309 il 8 5 SL Cycles qs 310 a Plung
97. soft keys of the active working plane Enter the pole coordinates using these soft keys E The pole for FK programming remains active until you define a new one using FPOL HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 2 me Q O D om 6 6 Path Contours FK Free Contour Programmi j il 2 me OQ O D n 6 6 Path Contours FK Free Contour Programmi Free programming of straight lines Straight line without tangential connection FL ia To display the soft keys for free contour programming press the FK key To initiate the dialog for free programming of straight lines press the FL soft key The TNC displays additional soft keys Enter all known data in the block by using these soft keys The FK graphic displays the programmed contour element in red until sufficient data is entered If the entered data describes several solutions the graphic will display the contour element in green see Graphics during FK programming page 180 Straight line with tangential connection If the straight line connects tangentially to another contour element initiate the dialog with the FLT soft key A To display the soft keys for free contour programming press the FK key To initiate the dialog press the FLT soft key Enter all known data in the block by using the soft keys Free programming of circular arcs Circular arc without tangential connection To display the soft keys for free contour p
98. stop the axis press the machine STOP button You can move several axes at a time with these two methods You can change the feed rate at which the axes are traversed with the F soft key see Spindle Speed S Feed Rate F and Miscellaneous Functions M page 52 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 2 2 Traversing the mone Incremental jog positioning With incremental jog positioning you can move a machine axis by a preset distance A Select the Manual Operation or Electronic Handwheel mode INRE Select incremental jog positioning Switch the OFF on INCREMENT soft key to ON 8 conre Enter the jog increment in mm e g 8mm and press AME the CONFIRM VALUE soft key 2 2 Traversing the Machine A fo Finish the entry with the OK soft key x Press the machine axis direction button as often as desired To deactivate the function press the Switch off soft key 50 Traversing with the HR 410 electronic handwheel The portable HR 410 handwheel is equipped with two permissive buttons The permissive buttons are located below the star grip You can only move the machine axes when a permissive button is depressed machine dependent function The HR 410 handwheel features the following operating elements EMERGENCY STOP button Handwheel Permissive buttons Axis address keys Actual position capture key Keys for defining the feed rate slow medium fast the feed rates are set by the machine tool builde
99. surfaces Non modal function Touch probe cycles for measuring workpiece misalignment G400 Basic rotation using two points G401 Basic rotation from two holes G402 Basic rotation from two studs G403 Compensate basic rotation via a rotary axis G404 Set basic rotation G405 Compensating misalignment with the C axis Touch probe cycles for datum setting software option G408 G409 G410 G411 G412 G413 G414 G415 G416 G417 G418 G419 Slot center reference point Reference point at center of hole Datum from inside of rectangle Datum from outside of rectangle Datum from inside of circle Datum from outside of circle Datum in outside corner Datum in inside corner Datum circle center Datum in touch probe axis Datum in center of 4 holes Reference point in selectable axis Touch probe cycles for workpiece measurement software option G55 G420 G421 G422 G423 G424 G425 G426 G427 G430 G431 Measure any coordinate Measure any angle Measure hole Measure cylindrical stud Measure rectangular pocket Measure rectangular stud Measure slot Measure ridge Measure any coordinate Measure circle center Measure any plane Touch probe cycles for tool measurement software option G480 G481 G482 G483 Calibrating the TT Measure tool length Measure tool radius Measure tool length and tool radius Special cycles G04 G36 G39 G62 Dwell time with F seconds Spindle orientation Program call Tole
100. tangentially connecting the contour and a straight line DEP LCT 157 6 4 Path Contours Cartesian Coordinates 158 Overview of path functions 158 Straight line L 159 Inserting a chamfer CHF between two straight lines 160 Corner rounding RND 161 Circle center CC 162 Circular path C around circle center CC 163 Circular path CR with defined radius 164 Circular path CT with tangential connection 166 6 5 Path Contours Polar Coordinates 171 Overview 171 Polar coordinate origin Pole CC 172 Straight line LP 172 Circular path CP around pole CC 173 Circular path CTP with tangential connection 173 Helical interpolation 174 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 17 il 18 6 6 Path Contours FK Free Contour Programming Software Option 178 Fundamentals 178 Graphics during FK programming 180 Initiating the FK dialog 181 Pole for FK programming 181 Free programming of straight lines 162 Free programming of circular arcs 182 Input possibilities 183 Auxiliary points 186 Relative data 187 7 1 Entering Miscellaneous Functions M and STOP 196 Fundamentals 196 7 2 Miscellaneous Functions for Program Run Control Spindle and Coolant 198 Overview 198 7 3 Miscellaneous Functions for Coordinate Data 199 Programming machine referenced coordinates M91 M92 199 Moving to posi
101. the Probing Cycles 400 to 419 see User s Manual Touch Probe Cycles Chapter 3 Manual entry see description below HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 D Touch jee 2 4 Datum Setting Without a 3 obe 2 4 Datum Setting Without a 3 D Touch Manually saving the datums in the preset table In order to set datums in the preset table proceed as follows g Select the Manual Operation mode x Y Move the tool slowly until it touches scratches the workpiece surface or position the measuring dial correspondingly Display the preset table The TNC opens the preset table Select functions for entering the presets The TNC oe displays the available possibilities for entry in the soft key row See the table below for a description of the entry possibilities Select the line in the preset table that you want to change the line number is the preset number If needed select the column axis in the preset table that you want to change CORRECT Use the soft keys to select one of the available entry THE PRESET possibilities see the following table 58 Directly transfer the actual position of the tool a the measuring dial as the new datum This i function only saves the datum in the axis which is currently highlighted Assign any value to the actual position of the tool ENTER the measuring dial This function only saves the PRESET datum in the axis which is currently highlighted
102. the control to the network Function overview of network configuration lt In the Tile manager PGM MGT select the Network soft key EEEE Programming a 14 H contas 1 eae PC N Nde 1pc5323 transfer a x i auteenes Make a connection to the selected network drive Bae ete D SHOW Successful connection is indicated by a check mark Bice eG tapie 4 under Mount T Separates the connection to a network drive EEE DEVICE bad oe S I U LLJ Activates or deactivates the Automount function ae automatic connection of the network drive during MOUNT N control start up The status of the function is indicated by acheck mark under Auto in the network drive table sl c gt CONFIGURE DELETE SESS NETWORK NETWORK AT CONNECTN Use the ping function to check whether a connection to a particular remote station in the network Is available The address is entered as four decimal numerals separated by points dotted decimal notation The TNC displays an overview window with aaa information on the active network connections INFO Configures access to network drives Selectable only DEFINE after entry of the MOD code number NET123 pia Opens the dialog window for editing the data of an EIT existing network connection Selectable only after nee entry of the MOD code number NET123 Configures the network address of the control CONFIGURE Selectable only after
103. the machine START button Interrupting machining There are several ways to Interrupt program run Programmed interruptions Machine STOP button If the TNC registers an error during program run it automatically interrupts the machining process Programmed interruptions You can program interruptions directly in the part program The TNC interrupts the program run at a block containing one of the following entries STOP with and without a miscellaneous function Miscellaneous function MO M2 or M30 Miscellaneous function M6 determined by the machine tool builder 468 Interruption through the machine STOP button Press the machine STOP button The block that the TNC is currently executing is not completed The NC stop signal in the status display blinks see table If you do not wish to continue the machining process you can reset the TNC with the INTERNAL STOP soft key The NC stop signal in the status display goes out In this case the program must be restarted trom the program beginning a Stops the program run Ol Moving the machine axes during an interruption You can move the machine axes during an Interruption in the same way as in the Manual Operation mode Application example Retracting the spindle after tool breakage Interrupt machining Enable the external direction keys Press the MANUAL OPERATION soft key Move the axes with the machine axis direction buttons On some machines you may have
104. to press the machine 4 START button after the MANUAL OPERATION soft key to enable the axis direction buttons Refer to your machine manual HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 11 5 Program Run o il 11 5 Program Run Resuming program run after an interruption CS If a program run is interrupted during a fixed cycle the program must be resumed from the beginning of the cycle This means that some machining operations will be repeated If you interrupt a program run during execution of a subprogram or program section repeat use the RESTORE POS AT function to return to the position at which the program run was interrupted When a program run is interrupted the TNC stores The data of the last defined tool Active coordinate transformations e g datum shift rotation mirroring The coordinates of the circle center that was last defined CS Note that the stored data remain active until they are reset e g If you select a new program The stored data are used for returning the tool to the contour after manual machine axis positioning during an interruption RESTORE POSITION soft key Resuming program run with the START button You can resume program run by pressing the machine START button if the program was interrupted in one of the following ways The machine STOP button was pressed An interruption was programmed Resuming program run after an error If the error message is not blinking Remove the cause of the error
105. tool calls Path function Approaching a safe position Feed rates and spindle speeds as well as Block number Path contours cycles and other functions The last block of a program is identified by END PGM the program name and the active unit of measure After each tool call HEIDENHAIN recommends always uy traversing to a safe position from which the TNC can position the tool for machining without causing a collision Define the blank BLK Form After initiating a new program you define a cuboid workpiece blank To define the workpiece blank press the SPEC FCT soft key and then the BLK FORM soft key This definition is needed for the TNC s graphic simulation feature The sides of the workpiece blank lie parallel to the X Y and Z axes and can be up to 100 000 mm long The blank form is defined by two of its corner points MIN point the smallest X Y and Z coordinates of the blank form entered as absolute values MAX point the largest X Y and Z coordinates of the blank form entered as absolute or incremental values KE You only need to define the blank form if you wish to run a graphic test for the program 96 Creating a new part program You always enter a part program in the Programming and Editing mode of operation An example of program initiation Select the Programming and Editing mode of operation Say Press the PGM MGT key to call the file manager MGT Select the directory in which you
106. under program control Simply press the positive axis direction button of the active spindle axis 8 2 Cycles for Drilling p and Thread Milling HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 245 il 8 2 Cycles for Drilling I inc and Thread Milling TAPPING WITH CHIP BREAKING Cycle 209 Advanced programming features software option Machine and control must be specially prepared by the os machine tool builder for use of this cycle This cycle is effective only for machines with controlled spindle The tool machines the thread in several passes until it reaches the programmed depth You can define in a parameter whether the tool is to be retracted completely trom the hole for chip breaking 1 The TNC positions the tool in the spindle axis at rapid traverse FMAX to the programmed set up clearance above the workpiece surface There it carries out an oriented spindle stop 2 The tool moves to the programmed infeed depth reverses the direction of spindle rotation and retracts by a specific distance or completely for chip release depending on the definition If you have defined a factor for increasing the spindle speed the TNC retracts from the hole at the corresponding speed 3 It then reverses the direction of spindle rotation again and advances to the next infeed depth 4 The TNC repeats this process 2 to 3 until the programmed thread depth is reached 5 The tool is then retracted to the set up clearance If programmed the tool moves to the 2nd s
107. value 1 Milling at an increased feed rate The TNC uses the filter settings that your machine tool builder has defined for roughing operations The TNC works with optimal smoothing of the contour points which results in a reduction of the machining time 8 8 Special Cycles Tolerance for rotary axes TA Permissible position error of rotary axes in degrees when M128 is active The TNC always reduces the feed rate in such a way that if more than one axis is traversed the slowest axis moves at Its maximum feed rate Rotary axes are usually much slower than linear axes You can significantly reduce the machining time for programs for more than one axis by entering a large tolerance value e g 10 since the TNC does not always have to move the rotary axis to the given nominal position The contour will not be damaged by entering a rotary axis tolerance value Only the position of the rotary axis with respect to the workpiece surface will change CS The HSC MODE and TA parameters are only available if on your machine you have software option 2 active HSC machining 368 9 1 Labeling Subprograma Program Section Repeats 9 1 Labeling Subprograms and Program Section Repeats Subprograms and program section repeats enable you to program a machining sequence once and then run it as often as desired Labels The beginnings of subprograms and program section repeats are marked in a part program by labels LBL A LABEL is
108. variables in the program instead of fixed numerical values Sum eb z Example NC blocks SF GON ssi t Q10 is assigned the value 25 A You need write only one program for a whole family of parts entering the characteristic dimensions as Q parameters To program a particular part you then assign the appropriate values to Tp the individual Q parameters Sem Example Cylinder with Q parameters Cylinder radius R Oo Cylinder height H Q2 Cylinder Z1 Q1 30 Q2 10 Cylinder Z2 Q1 10 Q2 50 d A O T LL t A N q 388 02 10 3 Describing Contours through Mathematical Operations Function The Q parameters listed below enable you to program basic mathematical functions in a part program Select a O parameter function Press the O key in the numerical keypad at right The Q parameter functions are displayed in a soft key row To select the mathematical functions press the BASIC ARITHMETIC soft key The TNC then displays the following soft keys Overview FNO ASSIGN Example FNO Q5 60 Assigns a numerical value FN1 ADDITION Example FN1 Q1 Q2 5 Calculates and assigns the sum of two values FN2 SUBTRACTION Example FN2 Q1 10 5 Calculates and assigns the difference of two values FN3 MULTIPLICATION Example FN3 Q2 3 3 Calculates and assigns the product of two values FN4 DIVISION Example FN4 Q4
109. with the machine stop button the TNC will display the soft key MANUAL OPERATION If you press the MANUAL OPERATION key you can retract the tool under program control Simply press the positive axis direction button of the active spindle axis 8 2 Cycles for Drilling E and Thread Milling 248 Example NC blocks Fundamentals of thread milling Prerequisites Your machine tool should feature internal spindle cooling cooling lubricant at least 30 bars compressed air supply at least 6 bars Thread milling usually leads to distortions of the thread profile To correct this effect you need tool specitic compensation values which are given in the tool catalog or are available from the tool manufacturer You program the compensation with the delta value for the tool radius DR in the tool call The Cycles 262 263 264 and 267 can only be used with rightward rotating tools For Cycle 265 you can use rightward and leftward rotating tools The working direction is determined by the following input parameters Algebraic sign Q239 right hand thread left hand thread and milling method Q351 1 climb 1 up cut The table below illustrates the interrelation between the Individual input parameters for rightward rotating tools Right handed 1 RL Z Left handed 1 RR Z Right handed 1 RR Z Left handed 1 RL Z 8 2 Cycles for Drilling p and Thread Milling Right handed
110. working plane If you want to approach the contour on a tangential path you must use the function APPR LCT The block with APPR LCT must contain only coordinates of the working plane If you want to depart the contour on a tangential path use the function DEP LCT The block with DEP LCT must contain only coordinates of the working plane HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 d a gt E aa O So Oo ad Q 74 Miscellaneous Functions i il ontouring Behavior N oa 5 LL N 5 O D D Q S lt M Superimposing handwheel positioning during program run M118 software option 3 Standard behavior In the program run modes the TNC moves the tool as defined in the part program Behavior with M118 M118 permits manual corrections by handwheel during program run Just program M118 and enter an axis specific value linear or rotary axis in millimeters Input If you enter M118 in a positioning block the TNC continues the dialog for this block by asking you the axis specific values Use the ENTER key to switch the axis letters Effect Cancel handwheel positioning by programming M118 once again without coordinate input M118 becomes effective at the start of block Example NC blocks If you want to be able to use the handwheel during program run to move the tool in the working plane X Y by 1 mm from the programmed value E M118 also functions in the Positioning wit
111. 0 tool life for TOOL CALL TIME 2 7 CYCL DEF 4 1 SET UP2 8 CYCL DEF 4 2 DEPTH 10 DL DR DR2 9 CYCL DEF 4 3 PLNGNG10 F333 TAB 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 T i f i 12 Gye EDET aAa PGM 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 qes i Display of the active tool and the next replacement 11 CYCL DEF 4 5 Y 80 12 CYCL DEF 4 6 F888 DR RADIUSS tool 13 L Z 2 R FMAX M99 om CUR TIME TIME1 TENEZ 14 CYCL DEF 5 0 CIRCULAR POCKET 0 00 0 00 0 00 91 S OVR 11 50 TOOL CALL 4 150 F OUR RT lt 0 31 857 Y 25 642 Z 134 992 R 9 000 321 790 ACTL fl mm min Our 150 STATUS STATUS TOOL AES STATUS OF STATUS OF STATUS AN M FUNCT PARAM Coordinate transformation STATUS Program name COORD TRANSF Active datum shift Cycle 7 Mirrored axes Cycle 8 Active rotation angle Cycle 10 Active scaling factor s Cycles 11 26 see Coordinate Transformation Cycles on page 344 Active miscellaneous functions M List of the active M functions with fixed meaning List of the active M functions that are adapted by your machine manufacturer Status of Q parameters EAA List of Q parameters defined with the Q PARAM LIST Q PARAM soft key HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Programming Program run full sequence 113 H BEGIN PGM 113 MM BLK FORM 0 1 Z X 0 Y 0 Z 20 Programs BLK FORM 2 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 Rotatn TOOL CALL 3 Z 52000 L Z 10 R FMAX M3 3 2 3 4 5 L X 50 Y 50 R FMAX 6 7 8 Datum
112. 0 M141 M142 M143 M144 M145 M148 M149 M150 M200 M204 Automatic compensation of machine geometry when working with tilted axes Cancel M114 Feed rate for rotary tables in mm minn Cancel M116 Superimpose handwheel positioning during program run Pre calculate radius compensated contour LOOK AHEAD Contour filter Shortest path traverse of rotary axes Cancel M126 Maintain the position of the tool tip when positioning the tilted axes TCPM Cancel M126 Within the positioning block Points are referenced to the untilted coordinate system Exact stop at nontangential contour transitions when positioning with rotary axes Cancel M134 Selection of tilted axes Retraction from the contour in the tool axis direction Suppress touch probe monitoring Delete modal program information Delete basic rotation Compensating the machine s kinematics configuration for ACTUAL NOMINAL positions at end of block Cancel M144 Retract the tool automatically from the contour at NC stop Cancel M148 Suppress limit switch message Laser cutting functions HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Option 08 Option 21 Option 21 X Option 09 X Option 09 X Option 08 for MC420 X Option 08 for MC420 X X X X X Option 09 for MC420 X X XIXI KI X X Option 09 for MC420 X i il Comparison Touch probe cycles in the Manual and Electronic Handwheel modes Calibrate the effective length Calibrate the ef
113. 09 Definition and applications 109 Displaying the program structure window Changing the active window 109 Inserting a structuring block in the left program window 109 Selecting blocks in the program structure window 109 4 7 Adding Comments 110 Function 110 Adding a comment line 110 Functions for editing of the comment 110 4 8 Integrated Pocket Calculator 111 Operation 111 4 9 Error Messages 113 Display of errors 113 Open the error window 113 Close the error window 113 Detailed error messages 114 INTERNAL INFO soft key 114 Clearing errors 115 Error log 115 Keystroke log 116 Informational texts 117 Saving service files 117 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 5 1 Entering Tool Related Data 120 Feed rate F 120 Spindle speed S 121 5 2 Tool Data 122 Requirements for tool compensation 122 Tool numbers and tool names 122 Tool length L 122 Tool radius R 123 Delta values for lengths and radii 123 Entering tool data into the program 123 Entering tool data in the table 124 Pocket table for tool changer 130 Calling tool data T33 5 3 Tool Compensation 134 Introduction 134 Tool length compensation 134 Tool radius compensation 135 5 4 Three Dimensional Tool Compensation Software Option 2 Introduction 138 Definition of a normali
114. 1 M92 M94 M97 M98 M99 M107 M108 M109 M110 M111 M112 M113 530 Stop program Spindle STOP Coolant OFF Optional program STOP STOP program run Spindle STOP Coolant OFF CLEAR status display depending on machine parameter Go to block 1 Spindle ON clockwise Spindle ON counterclockwise Spindle STOP Tool change STOP program run machine dependent function Spindle STOP Coolant ON Coolant OFF Spindle ON clockwise Coolant ON Spindle ON counterclockwise Coolant ON Same function as M02 Vacant miscellaneous function or Cycle call modally effective machine dependent function Constant contouring speed at corners Within the positioning block Coordinates are referenced to machine datum Within the positioning block Coordinates are referenced to position defined by machine tool builder such as tool change position Reduce the rotary axis display to a value below 360 Machine small contour steps Machine open contours completely Blockwise cycle call Suppress error message for replacement tools with oversize Cancel M107 Constant contouring speed at tool cutting edge increase and decrease feed rate Constant contouring speed at tool cutting edge feed rate decrease only Cancel M109 M110 Enter contour transition between two contour elements Cancel M112 lt x KX X X X lt x KI XJ X X M114 M115 M116 M117 M118 M120 M124 M126 M127 M128 M129 M130 M134 M135 M138 M14
115. 1599 that are stored in the TNC memory QS parameters the S stands for string are also available on the TNC and enable you to process texts In principle the same ranges are available for QS parameters as for Q parameters see table above E Note that for the QS parameters the QS100 to 0S199 range is reserved for internal texts 386 Programming notes You can mix Q parameters and fixed numerical values within a program CS Some O parameters are always assigned the same data by the TNC For example Q108 is always assigned the current tool radius see Preassigned Q Parameters page 442 Calling OQ parameter functions When you are writing a part program press the OQ key in the numeric keypad for numerical input and axis selection below the key The TNC then displays the following soft keys Basic arithmetic assign add subtract pasrc Page 389 multiply divide square root ARITHM Trigonometric functions E Page 391 NOMETRY ti a Function for calculating circles CIRCLE Page 393 LATION If then conditions jumps me Page 394 Other functions ee Page 397 Entering formulas directly roma Page 430 Formula for string parameters ES Page 434 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 10 1 Principle and Overview C il 9 10 2 Part Families Q Parameters in 5 Place of Numerical Values S The O parameter function FNO ASSIGN assigns numerical values to Q parameters This enables you to use
116. 2nd set up clearance Q204 incremental value Z coordinate at which no collision between tool and workpiece clamping devices can occur 8 3 Cycles for Milli Center in 1st axis Q216 absolute value Center of the slot in the reference axis of the working plane Center in 2nd axis Q217 absolute value Center of the slot in the minor axis of the working plane Pitch circle diameter Q244 Enter the diameter of the pitch circle Second side length Q219 Enter the slot width If you enter a slot width that equals the tool diameter the TNC will carry out the roughing process only slot milling Starting angle 0245 absolute value Enter the polar angle of the starting point 288 gt Angular length Q248 incremental value Enter the angular length of the slot Infeed for finishing 0338 incremental value Infeed per cut Q338 0 Finishing in one infeed gt Feed rate for plunging Q206 Traversing speed of the tool while moving to depth in mm min Effective only during finishing If infeed for finishing is entered Pockets Studs and Slots m X D 3 p D Z O za e o A 8 3 Cycles for Milli HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 289 il Definition of workpiece blank Define slotting mill Call the tool for roughing finishing 8 3 Cycles for a ockets Studs and Slots Retract the tool N 90 6 CYCL DEF 213 STUD FINISHING Define cycle for machining the contour outside Q200 2 SET UP CLEARANCE
117. 3 D Touch Probe page 54 Controlled with a HEIDENHAIN 3 D touch probe see the Touch Probe Cycles Manual chapter 2 Automatically by using a HEIDENHAIN 3 D touch probe see the Touch Probe Cycles Manual chapter 3 6 Start the part program in the operating mode Program Run Full Sequence 7 Manual Operation mode Use the 3 D ROT soft key to set the TILT WWORKING PLANE function to INACTIVE Enter an angular value of 0 for each axis in the menu see Activating manual tilting page 65 360 Program sequence E Program the coordinate transformations in the main program For subprograms within a subprogram see Subprograms page 371 T m J m Z T gt zZ Z O NO 130 65 Definition of workpiece blank Tool definition Tool call Retract the tool Shift datum to center Call milling operation Set label for program section repeat Rotate by 45 incremental Call milling operation Return jump to LBL 10 repeat the milling operation six times Reset the rotation Reset the datum shift 361 8 7 voor Transformation Cycles Retract in the tool axis end program Subprogram 1 Define milling operation e Transformation Cycles 8 7 Coordinat W 62 8 8 Special Cycles DWELL TIME Cycle 9 This causes the execution of the next block within a running program to be delayed by the programmed DWELL TIME A dwell ti
118. 3 REC Receive Data 4 Vacant 5 Vacant 6 REC Receive Data 7 Vacant 8 Vacant HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 13 2 Pin ayo Connecting Cables for Data Interfaces j il 13 3 Technical Information Explanation of symbols Standard Axis option Software option 1s Brief description Program entry Position data Tool compensation Tool tables Constant cutting speed Parallel operation Contour elements Approaching and departing the contour FK free contour programming Program jumps 508 13 3 Technical Information Basic version 3 axes plus closed loop spindle 1st additional axis for 4 axes and closed loop spindle 2nd additional axis for 5 axes and closed loop spindle HEIDENHAIN conversational Nominal positions for line segments and arcs in Cartesian or polar coordinates Incremental or absolute dimensions Display and entry in mm or inches Tool radius in the working plane and tool length Radius compensated contour look ahead for up to 99 blocks M120 Multiple tool tables with any number of tools With respect to the path of the tool center With respect to the cutting edge Creating a program with graphical support while another program is being run Straight line Chamfer Circular path Circle center point Circle radius Tangentially connected arc Corner rounding Via straight line tangential or perpendicular Via circular arc FK free contour programming in HEIDENHAIN conversational format with g
119. 4 gt Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute value Coordinate of the workpiece surface 2nd set up clearance Q204 incremental value Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece clamping devices can occur Feed rate for countersinking Q254 Traversing speed of the tool during countersinking in mm min gt Feed rate for milling Q207 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min while milling m x D 3 p D Z O T e zA A OUTSIDE THREAD MILLING Cycle 267 Advanced programming features software option 1 The TNC positions the tool in the spindle axis at rapid traverse FMAX to the programmed set up clearance above the workpiece surface Countersinking at front 2 5 The TNC moves in the reference axis of the working plane from the center of the stud to the starting point for countersinking at front The position of the starting point is determined by the thread radius tool radius and pitch The tool moves at the feed rate for pre positioning to the sinking depth at front The TNC positions the tool without compensation from the center on a semicircle to the offset at front and then follows a circular path at the feed rate for countersinking The tool then moves on a semicircle to the starting point Thread milling 6 The TNC positions the tool to the starting point if there has been no previous countersinking at front S
120. 4 z 6 o F mm min Our 150 M5 91 S OVR 11 42 fea 150 F OVR Left positions right status display POSITION TOUCH PRESET 3D ROT TOOL STATUS M S F PROBE TABLE lt 2 TABLE 27A A 2 i Positioning with Manual Data Input This mode of operation is used for programming simple traversing Positioning with manl data input Progranming movements such as for face milling or pre positioning MDI H m 41 TCH PROBE R es i 2 2 M Soft keys for selecting the screen layout 42 FN 18 SYSREAD Q99 TD36 NR IDX es 43 FN 18 SYSREAD Q180 ID36 NR3 IDX2Z 44 M30 aA MA 45 CYCL DEF 19 0 WORKING PLANE s 46 CYCL DEF 19 1 C 0 47 L X 0 Y 0 R FMAX eF Program 49 TOOL CALL Z a 5 L X Z R FMAX pan 51 TOOL CALL 1 Z 4 t 52 FN 18 SYSREAD Q1 ID350 NR52 IDXZ 53 SEL TABLE TNC N tableNzeroshift d l 54 TCH PROBE 0 0 REF PLANE Q108 Z Left program blocks right status display PROGRAM 91 S OVR 11 43 STATUS SEE 1 50 FONR baat i 31 857 Y 25 642 2 134 992 E 0 000 S 321 790 ne Eerie W T 4 2s a F mm min Ouvr 150 M5 l TOOL TH Programming and Editing Positioning AA PEE Programming HEBEL H BLK FORM 2 X 120 Y 20 Z 0 2 3 TOOL CALL 2 Z 53500 F500 M 4 L Z 100 R FMAX 5 L X 30 Y 0 R FMAX 6 L Z 5 R FMAX M3 7 8 In this mode of operation you can write your part programs The FK free programming fe
121. 6 absolute value Minimum point coordinate of the surface to be multipass milled in the minor axis of the working plane gt Starting point in 3rd axis Q227 absolute value Height in the spindle axis at which multipass milling is carried out First side length Q218 incremental value Length of the surface to be multipass milled in the reference axis of the working plane referenced to the starting point in the 1st axis gt Second side length 0219 incremental value Length of the surface to be multipass milled in the minor axis of the working plane referenced to the starting point In the 2nd axis gt Number of cuts Q240 Number of passes to be made over the width gt Feed rate for plunging Q206 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min when moving from set up clearance to the milling depth Feed rate for milling Q207 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min while milling gt Stepover feed rate Q209 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min when moving to the next pass If you are moving the tool transversely in the material enter Q209 to be smaller than Q207 If you are moving it transversely in the open Q209 may be greater than Q207 gt Set up clearance Q200 incremental value Distance between tool tip and milling depth for positioning at the start and end of the cycle HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 MOE 2207 Example NC blocks 33 WO 8 6 a for Multipass Milling 8 6 Mes for Multipass Milling
122. 800 98000 98000 98000 8 90000 98000 8 90000 1 2 BLK FORM 0 2 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 3 TOOL CALL 3 Z 52000 4 L Z 10 RO FMAX M3 5 L X 50 Y 50 RO FMAX 6 CYCL DEF 4 0 POCKET MILLING 7 CYCL DEF 4 1 SET UP2Z 8 CYCL DEF 4 2 DEPTH 10 9 CYCL DEF 4 3 PLNGNG10 F333 10 CYCL DEF 4 4 X 3 11 CYCL DEF 4 5 90 12 CYCL DEF 4 6 F888 DR RADIUSS 13 L Z 2 R FMAX M99 14 CYCL DEF 5 0 CIRCULAR POCKET vio a wN elo 1191 9 95 9 5 9 0 OO 5 9 5 91 S OVR 11 50 150 F OVR 31 857 Y 25 642z C 0 000 S 321 t39 134 992 a Renie a O TE Omm min Our 150x STATUS STATUS TOOL Sia STATUS OF STATUS OF STATUS eee M FUNCT PARAM 41 HEIDENHAIN 3 D Touch Probes and Electronic Handwhelill 1 5 Accessories 1 5 Accessories HEIDENHAIN 3 D Touch Probes and Electronic Handwheels 3 D touch probes If the Touch probe function software option is active you can use the various HEIDENHAIN 3 D touch probe systems to Automatically align workpieces Quickly and precisely set datums Measure the workpiece during program run Measure and inspect tools CS All of the touch probe functions are described in a separate manual Please contact HEIDENHAIN if you require a copy of this User s Manual ID 661 891 10 TS 220 TS 440 and TS 640 touch trigger probes These touch probes are particularly effective for automatic workpiece alignment datum settin
123. 9 position them before defining the cycle for example with an L block Example NC blocks Position the axis of rotation Define the angle for calculation of the compensation Activate compensation for the spindle axis Activate compensation for the working plane HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 357 8 7 voor Transformation Cycles fe Transformation Cycles E l 7 8 7 Coord Position display in the tilted system On activation of Cycle 19 the displayed positions ACTL and NOML and the datum indicated in the additional status display are referenced to the tilted coordinate system The positions displayed immediately after cycle definition might not be the same as the coordinates of the last programmed position before Cycle 19 Workspace monitoring The TNC monitors only those axes in the tilted coordinate system that are moved If necessary the TNC outputs an error message Positioning in a tilted coordinate system With the miscellaneous function M130 you can move the tool while the coordinate system is tilted to positions that are referenced to the non tilted coordinate system see Moving to positions in a non tilted coordinate system with a tilted working plane M130 page 201 Positioning movements with straight lines that are referenced to the machine coordinate system blocks with M91 or M92 can also be executed in a tilted working plane Constraints Positioning is without length compensation Positioning
124. 915 03 03 2008 09 10 02 EX11 H 1972 04 06 2008 11 45 08 EX4 H 985 25 02 2008 16 40 40 EBE 41 25 02 2008 16 40 40 982 2662 03 06 2008 07 54 34 03 06 2008 07 55 22 15 file s 285 7 MB vacant DIAGNOSE SELECT SELECT but TYPE WINDOW LAST N D FILES bs Selecting drives directories and files MGT Call the file manager Use the arrow keys or the soft keys to move the highlight to the desired position on the screen a Moves the highlight up and down within a window Moves the highlight from the left to the right window and vice versa PAGE pase Moves the highlight one page up or down within a t window Step 1 Select drive Move the highlight to the desired drive in the left window SELEGT Select a drive Press the SELECT soft key or the ENT key Step 2 Select a directory Move the highlight to the desired directory in the left hand window the right hand window automatically shows all files stored in the highlighted directory HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 th mer Manager ing wi 4 3 Work 4 3 Working with the A Manager Step 3 Select a file Press the SELECT TYPE soft key SHOW ALL Press the SHOW ALL soft key to display all files or a Move the highlight to the desired file in the right window The selected file is opened in the operating mode i from which you have ca
125. Class A device in accordance with the specifications in EN 55022 and is intended for use primarily in industrially zoned areas Legal information This product uses open source software Further information is available on the control under Programming and Editing operating mode MOD function LICENSE INFO soft key Contents HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 troduction anual Operation and Setup ositioning with Manual Data Input Programming Fundamentals of File Management Programming Aids rogramming Tools rogramming Programming Contours rogramming Miscellaneous Functions Programming Cycles Programming Subprograms and Program Section Repeats Programming Q Parameters Test Run and Program Run MOD Functions Technical Information 1 1 The TNC 620 30 Programming HEIDENHAIN conversational format 30 Compatibility 30 1 2 Visual Display Unit and Keyboard 31 Visual display unit 31 Sets the screen layout 32 Operating panel 33 1 3 Operating Modes 34 Manual Operation and Electronic Handwheel 34 Positioning with Manual Data Input 34 Programming and Editing 35 Test Run 3D Program Run Full Sequence and Program Run Single Block 36 1 4 Status Displays 37 General status display oT Additional status displays 39 1 5 Accessories HEIDENHAIN 3 D Touch Probes and Electronic Handwheels 42 3 D touch probes
126. DEPTH 0 the cycle will not be executed The cutter diameter must not be larger than the slot width and not smaller than a third of the slot width The cutter diameter must be smaller than half the slot length The TNC otherwise cannot execute this cycle 284 att Danger of collision Use the machine parameter displayDepthErr to define whether if a positive depth is entered the TNC should output an error message on or not off Keep in mind that the TNC reverses the calculation for pre positioning when a positive depth is entered his means that the tool moves at rapid traverse in the tool axis at safety clearance below the workpiece surface 210 Set up clearance Q200 incremental value Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface Depth Q201 incremental value Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of slot Feed rate for milling Q207 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min while milling Plunging depth Q202 incremental value Total extent by which the tool is fed in the spindle axis ip De during a reciprocating movement Uy Machining operation 0 1 2 0QO215 Define the Q201 machining operation T 0 Roughing and finishing D T 1 Only roughing 2 Only finishing Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute value Coordinate of the workpiece surface 2nd set up clearance Q204 incremental value Z coordinate at which no collision between tool and workpiece clamping devices can occu
127. DEPTH Q206 150 FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG Q202 0 1 PLUNGING DEPTH screen the gt gt sign is displayed Grete 290 Der INO ace s J SeA 8 L X 30 Y 0 R FMAX M99 Q210 0 DWELL TIME AT TOP Q203 0 SURFACE COORDINATE T A m Q204 50 72ND SET UP CLEARANCE 4 t Q211 0 DWELL TIME AT DEPTH Adding a comment line 7 te vso ko PRAX Hos 4 7 Addi Select the block after which the comment is to be inserted 12 ae aera ate Press the SPEC FCT key to select the special functions Sarto 7ACOUNEE Pom Stoe Press the INSERT COMMENT soft key eee oraenose Enter your comment using the screen keyboard see Screen Dee es keypad on page 81 aoe MRAN Functions for editing of the comment Jump to beginning of comment oO m y H Z t Jump to end of comment m 2 de Jump to the beginning of a word Words must be nove separated by a space q Jump to the end of a word Words must be nove separated by a space Switch between insert mode and overwrite mM od e OVERWRITE i 110 4 8 Integrated Pocket Calculator Operation The TNC features an integrated pocket calculator with the basic mathematical functions Use the CALC key to show and hide the on line pocket calculator Use soft keys to enter the functions Addition Programming BEGIN PGM 14 BLK FORM 0 1 Z BLK FORM 0 2 TOOL CALL 9 Z L Z 100 RO FM OOVOUDWNP rc x APPR LCT X 12 L Y 6 18 L Z 2 RO FMAX 19 L
128. Example Q44 SIN 45 H OA A A A A Cosine of an angle Example 045 COS 45 Tangent of an angle Example 046 TAN 45 pi Arc sine Inverse of the sine Determines the angle from the ratio of the side opposite the hypotenuse Example 010 ASIN 0 75 ASIN i Arc cosine Inverse of the cosine Determines the angle from the ratio of the side adjacent to the hypotenuse Example Q11 ACOS Q40 430 Arc tangent Inverse of the tangent Determines the angle from the ratio of the opposite to the adjacent side Example Q12 ATAN Q50 Powers of values Example Q15 3 3 Constant pi 3 14159 Example Q15 PI Natural logarithm LN of a number Base 2 7183 Example 015 LN Q11 oon Logarithm of a number base 10 Example 033 LOG Q22 Exponential function 2 7183 to the power of n Example Q1 EXP Q12 Negate multiplication by 1 Example Q2 NEG Q1 NEG 10 Entering Formulas Directly Truncate decimal places form an integer Example Q3 INT Q42 INT Absolute value of a number w Example Q4 ABS Q22 Truncate places before the decimal point form a fraction Example Q5 FRAC Q23 FRAC Check algebraic sign of a number Example 012 SGN Q50 If result for Q12 1 then O50 gt 0 If result for Q12 1 then Q50 lt 0 MRL Calculate modulo value Example 012 400 360 Result Q12 40 a HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 431 il Mb 10 Entering Formulas D
129. H The chart at right illustrates an example of a directory display with different paths 82 SHE TNCA H AUFTR1 KAR25T Overview Functions of the file manager Copying a file Display a specific file type Display the last 10 files that were selected Delete a file or directory Mark a file Rename a file Manage network drives Select the editor Protect a file against editing and erasure Cancel file protection Create new file Sort files by properties Copy a directory Delete directory with all its subdirectories Display all the directories of a particular drive Rename directory Create a new directory HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 SELECT EDITOR PROTECT UNPROTECT TE NEW FILE SORT NEW aoe th mer Manager ing wi 4 3 Work 4 3 Working with the A Manager Calling the file manager PGM MGT Press the PGM MGT key the TNC displays the file management window The figure at right shows the factory default setting If the TNC displays a different screen layout press the WINDOW soft key The narrow window on the left shows the available drives and directories Drives designate devices with which data are stored or transferred One drive is the internal memory of the TNC Other drives are the RS232 RS422 Ethernet and USB interfaces which you can used for example to connect a personal computer or other storage device A directory is a
130. H 76 DEL H 416 DRAT H 90 10 J 22 WAHL PNT 16 Uatei Cen 3716000 kbyte frej Tables and Overviews 13 1 Machine Specific User Parameters 13 1 Machine Specific User Parameters Function To enable you to set machine specific functions your machine tool builder can define which machine parameters are available as user parameters Furthermore your machine tool builder can integrate additional machine parameters which are not described in the following into the TNC 7 Refer to your machine manual CS If you are in the configuration editor for the user parameters you can change the display of the existing parameters In the default setting the parameters are displayed with short explanatory texts To display the actual system names of the parameters press the key for the screen layout and then the SHOW SYSTEM NAME soft key Follow the same procedure to return to the standard display The parameter values are entered in the configuration editor Each parameter object has a name e g CfgDisplayLanguage that gives information about the parameters it contains Each object has a keyname for unique identification 498 Calling the configuration editor Select the Programming mode of operation Press the MOD key Enter the code number 123 Press the END soft key to exit the configuration editor The icon at the beginning of each line in the parameter tree shows additional information about this
131. IN TNC 620 271 il 8 3 Cycles for Milling Pockets Studs and Slots POCKET MILLING Cycle 4 Cycles 1 2 3 4 5 17 18 are in a group of cycles called special cycles Here in the second soft key row select the OLD CYCLS soft key 1 The tool penetrates the workpiece at the starting position pocket center and advances to the first plunging depth 2 The cutter begins milling in the positive axis direction of the longer side on square pockets always starting in the positive Y direction and then roughs out the pocket from the inside out 3 This process 1 to 2 is repeated until the depth is reached 4 Atthe end of the cycle the TNC retracts the tool to the starting position 272 Calculations gt Set up clearance 1 incremental value Distance between tool tip at starting position and workpiece surface gt Depth 2 incremental value Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of pocket gt Plunging depth 3 incremental value Infeed per cut The TNC will go to depth in one movement if the plunging depth is equal to the depth the plunging depth is greater than the depth gt Feed rate for plunging Traversing speed of the tool during penetration First side length 4 Pocket length parallel to the reference axis of the working plane 2nd side length 5 Pocket width Feed rate F Traversing speed of the tool in the working plane Clockwise DR Climb milling with M3 DR Up
132. ISH DUTCH POLISH HUNGARIAN RUSSIAN CHINESE CHINESE_TRAD PLC conversational language See NC conversational language Language for PLC error messages See NC conversational language Language for online help See NC conversational language DisplaySettings Behavior during control startup Acknowledge the Power interrupted message TRUE Start up of the control is not continued until the message has been acknowledged FALSE The Power interrupted message does not appear Display of cycles TNC_STD Display cycles with comments TNC_PARAM Display cycles without comments 502 ProbeSettings Configuration of probing behavior Manual operation Including basic rotation TRUE Including active basic rotation during probing FALSE Always move on paraxial path during probing Automatic mode Multiple measurements in probing functions 1 to 3 Probing measurements per probing process Automatic mode Confidence Interval of multiple measurements 0 002 to 0 999 mm Range within which the measured value must be during multiple measurements CfgloolMeasurement M function for spindle orientation 1 Spindle orientation directly by the NC 0 Function inactive 1 to 999 Number of the M function for spindle orientation Probing direction for tool radius measurement X_Positive Y_Positive X_Negative Y_ Negative depending on the tool axis Distance from lower edge of tool to upper edge of stylus 0 001 to 99 9999 mm Offset of stylus to tool Rapid
133. L CHF CR RND and CT are available The dimensions for the rotary axis X coordinates can be entered as desired either in degrees or in mm or inches Specify with Q17 in the cycle definition 1 The TNC positions the tool over the cutter infeed point taking the allowance for side into account 2 Atthe first plunging depth the tool mills along the programmed contour at the milling feed rate Q12 3 At the end of the contour the TNC returns the tool to the set up clearance and returns to the point of penetration 4 Steps 1 to 3 are repeated until the programmed milling depth Q1 is reached 5 Then the tool moves to the set up clearance 316 gt Milling depth Q1 incremental value Distance between the cylindrical surface and the floor of the contour Enter the milling depth to be greater than the tooth length LCUTS gt Finishing allowance for side O3 incremental value Finishing allowance in the plane of the unrolled cylindrical surface This allowance is effective in the direction of the radius compensation gt Set up clearance O6 incremental value Distance between the tool tip and the cylinder surface The set up clearance entered must always be greater than the tool radius gt Plunging depth Q10 incremental value Dimension by which the tool plunges in each infeed Enter a value less than the cylinder radius Feed rate for plunging O11 Traversing speed of the tool in the spindle axis g
134. L DEF 4 3 PLNGNG10 F333 Soft keys for selecting the screen layout see Program Run Full Sequence and Program Run Single Block page 36 RADIUSS 13 L Z 2 R FMAX M99 14 CYCL DEF 5 CIRCULAR POCKET 15 CYCL DEF 5 1 SET UP2 16 CYCL DEF 5 2 DEPTH 10 17 CYCL DEF 5 3 PLNGNG10 F333 18 CYCL DEF 5 4 RADIUS15 19 CYCL DEF 5 5 F888 DR 20 L 2 8 RO FMAX M99 21 L Z 2 R FMAX 22 CYCL DEF 3 0 SLOT MILLING 23 CYCL DEF 3 1 SET UP2 24 CYCL DEF 3 2 DEPTH 8 25 CYCL DEF 3 3 PLNGNG8 F333 DIAGNOSE X 10 Y 10 R FMAX 31 CYCL DEF 3 SLOT MILLING Seen 00 05 17 START RESET SINGLE erat HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 35 1 3 Operating Modes Program Run Full Sequence and Program Run Single Block In the Program Run Full Sequence mode of operation the TNC executes a part program continuously to its end or to a manual or programmed stop You can resume program run after an interruption In the Program Run Single Block mode of operation you execute each block separately by pressing the machine START button Soft keys for selecting the screen layout Program PGM Left program blocks right status PROGRAM H STATUS Left program blocks right graphics PROGRAM Advanced graphic features software option GRAPHICS Graphics GRAPHICS 36 Program run full 113 H sequence BEGIN PGM 113 MM BLK FOR
135. L in the TOOL CALL block not taken into account by the position display DL 7AB is the oversize for length DL in the tool table 134 Tool radius compensation The NC block for programming a tool movement contains RL or RR for radius compensation RO if there is no radius compensation Radius compensation becomes effective as soon as a tool is called and is moved with a straight line block in the working plane with RL or RR att The TNC automatically cancels radius compensation if yOu program a straight line block with RO depart the contour with the DEP function program a PGM CALL select anew program with PGM MGT For tool radius compensation the TNC takes the delta values from both the TOOL CALL block and the tool table into account Compensation value R DRyo901 caLL DR ag where R is the tool radius R from the TOOL DEF block or tool table DR TOOL CALL is the oversize for radius DR in the TOOL CALL block not taken into account by the position display DR 7AB is the oversize for radius DR in the tool table Contouring without radius compensation RO The tool center moves in the working plane along the programmed path or to the programmed coordinates Applications Drilling and boring pre positioning HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 5 3 Togpompensation j il 5 3 Tolfftompensation Tool movements with radius compensation RR and RL RR The tool moves to the right on the programmed contour RL The
136. L positions at end of block M05 Spindle STOP M1485 Software option M06 Tool change STOP program run depending on Cancel M144 machine parameter Spindle STOP Mo8 Coolant ON Mog Coolant OFF M13 Spindle ON clockwise Coolant ON M14 Spindle ON counterclockwise Coolant ON M30 Same function as M02 M89 Vacant miscellaneous function or Cycle call modally effective depending on machine parameter M99 Blockwise cycle call M91 Within the positioning block Coordinates are referenced to machine datum M92 Within the positioning block Coordinates are referenced to position defined by machine tool builder such as tool change position M94 Reduce the rotary axis display to a value below 360 M97 Machine small contour steps M98 Machine open contours completely M109 Constant contouring speed at tool cutting edge increase and decrease feed rate M110 Constant contouring speed at tool cutting edge feed rate decrease only M111 Cancel M109 M110 M116 Feed rate for rotary axes in mm min software option M117 Cancel M116 M118 Superimpose handwheel positioning during program run software option M120 Pre calculate radius compensated contour LOOK AHEAD software option M126 Shortest path traverse of rotary axes M127 Cancel M126 M130 Within the positioning block Points are referenced to the untilted coordinate system Tool movements GOO G01 G02 G03 G05 G06 G07 G10 G11 G12 G13 G15 G16
137. LCT DEP LOT T l Belo ve 0 A0 to the contour Approach and departure to an auxiliary point outside the contour on a tangentially connecting line Approaching and departing a helix The tool approaches and departs a helix on its extension by moving in a circular arc that connects tangentially to the contour You program helical approach and departure with the APPR CT and DEP CT functions 150 Important positions for approach and departure Starting point Ps You program this position in the block before the APPR block Ps lies outside the contour and Is approached without radius compensation RO Auxillary point Py Some of the paths for approach and departure go through an auxiliary point Py that the TNC calculates from your input in the APPR or DEP block The TNC moves from the current position to the auxiliary point Py at the teed rate last programmed If you have programmed FMAX positioning at rapid traverse in the last positioning block before the approach function the TNC also approaches the auxiliary point Py at rapid traverse First contour point Pa and last contour point Pe You program the first contour point Pa in the APPR block The last contour point Pe can be programmed with any path function If the APPR block also contains a Z axis coordinate the TNC will first move the tool to Py in the working plane and then move it to the entered depth in the tool axis End point PN The position Py lies outside of the co
138. M 0 1 Z X 0 Y 0 Z 20 BLK FORM 2 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 TOOL CALL 3 Z 52000 L Z 10 R FMAX M3 L X 50 Y 50 R FMAX CYCL DEF 4 0 POCKET MILLING CYCL DEF 4 1 SET UP2 CYCL DEF 4 2 DEPTH 18 CYCL DEF 4 3 PLNGNG1 F333 ON oOUBRUONP 10 CYCL DEF 4 4 X 30 11 CYCL DEF 4 5 Y 90 12 CYCL DEF 4 6 F888 DR RADIUSS 13 L Z 2 RO FMAX M99 14 CYCL DEF 5 0 CIRCULAR POCKET 91 S OVR 11 42 150 F OVR 31 85 7mayY C 0 000 S ACTL 4 25 642 321 790 mm min 134 992 DIAGNOSE Ovr 150 M5 mam kc T z 6 o F BEGIN END PAGE PAGE as e BLOCK hiss 73u 1 4 Status Displays General status display Programming Program run full sequence AS Pee Gril BLK FORM 1 Z X Y 0 Z 20 M BLK FORM 2 X 1 0 100 Z 0 Ho 140 000 TOOL CALL 3 Z S2000 150 000 L 2Z 1 RO FMAX M3 Y L X 5 Y 50 R FMAX z lt 10 pan s CYCL DEF 4 POCKET MILLING c 0 000 CYCL DEF 4 1 SET UPZ lt F CYCL DEF 4 2 DEPTH 10 eae 9 CYCL DEF 4 3 PLNGNG10 F333 me 1 CYCL DEF 4 4 X 30 IZ Datum a T 11 CYCL DEF 4 5 Y 90 4 t 12 CYCL DEF 4 6 F888 DR RADIUSS C 0 00000 The status display in the lower part of the screen informs you of the current state of the machine tool It is displayed automatically in the following modes of operation Program Run Single Block and Program Run Full Sequence except if the screen layout is set to display graphics only and Positio
139. MIT and conclude the transaction SQL ROLLBACK If INDEX is not programmed Discard any changes insertions and conclude the transaction If INDEX is programmed The indexed row remains in the result set All other rows are deleted from the result set The transaction is not concluded SAL ROLLBACK i g OA eee 422 SQL BIND SQL BIND binds a Q parameter to a table column The SQL commands Fetch Update and Insert evaluate this binding assignment during data transfer between the result set and the NC program An SQL BIND command without a table or column name cancels the binding Binding remains effective at most until the end of the NC program or subprogram CS You can program any number of bindings Read and write processes only take into account the columns that were entered in the Select command SQL BIND must be programmed before Fetch Update or Insert commands are programmed You can program a Select command without a preceding Bind command f in the Select command you Include columns for which no binding is programmed an error occurs during read write processes program interrupt Parameter no for result O parameter that is 2 bound assigned to the table column Database Column name Enter the table name and column name separated by a period Table name Synonym or path and file name of this table The synonym is entered directly whereas the path and file n
140. NAL LOG MORE CHANGE DELETE DELETE END INFO INFO FILES FUNCTIONS WINDOW ALL Clearing errors Clearing errors outside of the error window To clear the error message in the header Press the CE button T S D T V L CS In some operating modes such as the Editing mode the CE button cannot be used to clear the error since the button is reserved for other functions Clearing more than one error Open the error window Clear individual errors Position the highlight on the error message and press the DELETE soft key Clear all errors Press the DELETE ALL soft key DELETE DELETE ALL CS If the cause of the error has not been removed the error message cannot be deleted In this case the error message remains in the window Error log The TNC stores errors and important events e g system startup in an error log The capacity of the error log is limited If the log is full the TNC uses a second file If this is also full the first error log is deleted and written to again and so on To view the error history switch between CURRENT FILE and PREVIOUS FILE Open the error window Press the LOG FILES soft key LOG FILES e To open the error log press the ERROR LOG FILE soft Los key rs If you need the previous log file press the PREVIOUS use FILE soft key es If you need the current log Tile press the CURRENT ER FILE soft key The oldest entry is at the beginning of th
141. NGLE column of the tool table TOOL T 0 Centering based on the entered depth 1 Centering based on the entered diameter gt Depth Q201 incremental value Distance between workpiece surface and centering bottom tip of centering taper Only effective if O343 0 is defined Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Diameter algebraic sign 0344 Centering diameter Only effective if Q343 1 is defined Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Feed rate for plunging Q206 Traversing speed of the tool during centering in mm min Input range O to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO FU gt Dwell time at depth 0211 Time in seconds that the tool remains at the hole bottom Input range O to 3600 0000 gt Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute value Coordinate of the workpiece surface Input range 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 2nd set up clearance Q204 incremental value Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece clamping devices can occur Input range 0 to 99999 9999 m X D 3 O za e zA A DRILLING Cycle 200 1 2 The TNC positions the tool in the spindle axis at rapid traverse FMAX to the set up clearance above the workpiece surface The tool drills to the first plunging depth at the programmed feed rate F The TNC returns the tool at FMAX to the set up clearance dwells there if a dwell time was entered and the
142. Open contours M98 204 Operating modes 34 Operating panel 33 Operating times 483 Option number 480 Oriented spindle stop 365 P Parametric programming See Q parameter programming Part families 388 Path 82 Path contours Cartesian coordinates Circular arc with tangential connection 166 Circular path around circle center CC 163 Circular path with defined radius 164 Overview 158 Straight line 159 Free contour programming FK See FK programming Polar coordinates Circular arc with tangential connection 173 Circular path around pole CC 173 Overview 171 Straight line 172 P Path functions Fundamentals 146 Circles and circular arcs 148 Pre position 148 Pecking 237 Deepened starting point 239 Pin layout for data interfaces 506 Plan view 457 PLC and NC synchronization 416 Pocket table 130 Point pattern Overview 293 Point patterns Polar coordinates Approach depart contour 152 Fundamentals 76 Programming 171 Positioning With a tilted working plane 201 With manual data input MDI 68 Preset table 56 Principal axes 75 Probe cycles see User s Manual for Touch Probe Cycles Program Open new 97 Structuring 109 Program blocks Editing 101 Structure 96 Program call Any desired program as subroutine 373 Via cycle 364 Program management see File management Progra
143. PLC Transferring values to the PLC The function FN 29 PLC transfers up to eight numerical values or Q parameters to the PLC Increments and units 0 1 um or 0 0001 Example Transfer the numerical value 10 which means 1 um or 0 001 to the PLC FN37 EXPORT You need the FN37 EXPORT function if you want to create your own cycles and integrate them in the TNC The Q parameters O to 99 are effective only locally This means that the O parameters are effective only in the program in which they were defined With the FN37 EXPORT function you can export locally effective O parameters into another calling program Example The local Q parameter Q25 is exported Example The local Q parameters Q25 to Q30 are exported E The TNC exports the value that the parameter has at the time of the EXPORT command The parameter is exported only to the presently calling program 418 10 9 Accessing Tables with SQL Commands Introduction Accessing of tables is programmed on the TNC with SOL commands in transactions A transaction consists of multiple SOL commands that guarantee an orderly execution of the table entries Tables are configured by the machine manufacturer ot Names and designations required as parameters for SOL commands are also specified The following terms are used Table A table consists of x columns and y rows It is saved as a file in the File Manager of the TNC and is addressed with the path and file nam
144. Q201 30 DEPTH Q206 250 FEED RATE FOR PLNGN Q202 5 PLUNGING DEPTH Q207 250 FEED RATE FOR MILLING Q203 0 SURFACE COORDINATE Q204 20 3 2ND SET UP CLEARANCE Q216 50 CENTER 1ST AXIS Q217 50 CENTER 2ND AXIS Q218 90 3 FIRST SIDE LENGTH Q219 80 SECOND SIDE LENGTH Q220 0 CORNER RADIUS Q221 5 s OVERSIZE 7 CYCL CALL M3 Call cycle for machining the contour outside 8 CYCL DEF 5 0 CIRCULAR POCKET Define CIRCULAR POCKET MILLING cycle 9 CYCL DEF 5 1 SETUP 2 10 CYCL DEF 5 2 DEPTH 30 11 CYCL DEF 5 3 PLNGNG 5 F250 12 CYCL DEF 5 4 RADIUS 25 13 CYCL DEF 5 5 F400 DR 8 3 Cycles for Milling Pockets Studs and Slots 14 L Z 2 RO F MAX M99 Call CIRCULAR POCKET MILLING cycle 15 L Z 250 RO F MAX M6 Tool change 16 TOOL CALL 2 Z S5000 Call slotting mill 17 CYCL DEF 211 CIRCULAR SLOT Cycle definition for slot 1 Q200 2 SET UP CLEARANCE Q201 20 DEPTH Q207 250 FEED RATE FOR MILLING Q202 5 PLUNGING DEPTH Q215 0 sMACHINING OPERATION Q203 0 SURFACE COORDINATE Q204 100 2ND SET UP CLEARANCE Q216 50 CENTER IN 1ST AXIS Q217 50 CENTER IN 2ND AXIS Q244 80 PITCH CIRCLE DIAMETR Q219 12 SECOND SIDE LENGTH Q245 45 STARTING ANGLE Q248 90 ANGULAR LENGTH HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 291 il 8 3 Cycles for a ockets Studs and Slots 2 92 Call cycle for slot 1 New starting angle for slot 2 Call cycle for slot 2 Retract in the tool axis end program 8 4 Cycles for Machining Point Patterns Overview The TNC provides two cycles for m
145. S SEG tO lt b SC oes P Polar coordinates angle Enter the total angle of tool traverse along the helix in incremental dimensions After entering the angle specify the tool axis with an axis selection key Coordinate Enter the coordinate for the height of the helix in incremental dimensions Direction of rotation DR Clockwise helix DR Counterclockwise helix DR Example NC blocks Thread M6 x 1 mm with 5 revolutions HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 olar Coordinates as Oo Q Q E me 0 LO co i i olar Coordinates 6 5 Path Contours _ Definition of workpiece blank Tool call Detine the datum for polar coordinates Retract the tool Pre position the tool Move to working depth Approach the contour at point 1 on a circular arc with tangential connection Move to point 2 Move to point 3 Move to point 4 Move to point 5 Move to point 6 Move to point 1 Depart the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection Retract in the tool axis end program HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 a x Sf gt Definition of workpiece blank Tool call Retract the tool Pre position the tool Transfer the last programmed position as the pole Move to working depth Approach the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection Helical interpolation Depart the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection Retract in the tool axis end program 177 Polar Coordinat
146. S868 eo 8 8 mm Min 99999 99999 Max 99999 99999 TNC table preset pr 8 differently aligned 91 S OVR 11 54 l l 158 F OVR The preset table can contain any number of lines datums N ee To optimize the file size and the processing speed you z TI ses AET DIAGNOSE should use only as many lines as you need for datum ACTL aml io mm min Our 150 M management T 4 iz Ss F 5 BEGIN END PAGE pace onance Ee ACTIVATE For safety reasons new lines can be inserted only at the t 4 t l pRecet di ear reer Ta A end of the preset table END Saving the datums in the preset table The preset table has the name PRESET PR and is saved in the directory TNC table PRESET PR is editable only in the Manual Operation and Electronic Handwheel modes In the Programming mode you can only read the table not edit It It is permitted to copy the preset table into another directory for data backup Never change the number of lines in the copied tables That could cause problems when you want to reactivate the table To activate the preset table copied to another directory you have to copy It back to the directory TNC table 2 4 Datum Setting Without a 3 D Touch 56 There are several methods for saving datums and or basic rotations in the preset table E Through probing cycles in the Manual Operation or Electronic Handwheel modes see User s Manual Touch Probe Cycles Chapter 2 E Through
147. TT Break tolerance for length LBREAK TT Break tolerance in radius RBREAK PLC value Center misalignment in reference axis CAL OF1 Probe center offset in minor axis CAL OF2 Spindle angle for calibration CAL ANG Tool type for pocket table Maximum speed NMAX Tool number Special tool O no 1 yes Fixed pocket O no 1 yes Locked pocket O no 1 yes PLC status Pocket number Tool magazine number Tool number T Active tool axis O X6 U LAL Tey 2 amp 28 W Spindle speed S ions Funct itiona 10 8 Add o il ions Funct itiona 10 8 Add Values programmed immediately after TOOL DEF 61 Active tool compensation 200 Active transformations 210 410 oO 1 BR O 1 without oversize 2 with oversize 3 with oversize and oversize from TOOL CALL 1 without oversize 2 with oversize 3 with oversize and oversize from TOOL CALL 1 without oversize 2 with oversize 3 with oversize and oversize from TOOL CALL Oversize in tool length DL Oversize in tool radius DR Automatic TOOL CALL 0 yes 1 no Oversize in tool radius DR2 Tool index Active feed rate Tool number T Length Radius Index Tool data programmed in TOOL DEF 1 yes 0 no Active radius Active length Rounding radius R2 Basic rotation in MANUAL OPERATION mode Programmed rotation with Cycle 10 Active mirrored axes 0 mirroring not active 1 X axis mirrored 2 Y a
148. The additional status displays contain detailed information on the program run They can be called in all operating modes except for the Q Programming mode EL To switch on the additional status display Call th ft k t B all the soft key row for screen layout Q S V Select the layout option for the additional status q STATUS display q To select an additional status display G Shift the soft key rows until the STATUS soft keys appear Select the desired additional status display e g di general program information You can choose between several additional status displays with the following soft keys HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 39 il General program information Programming Program run full sequence er i i M PEENE Name of the active main program B E a 27a JURIN EEK 3 TOOL CALL 3 Z 52000 STR 4 L Z 10 R FMAX M3 5 L X 50 Y 50 R FMAX Z 10 000 s 6 CYCL DEF 4 POCKET MILLING c 0 000 7 CYCL DEF 4 1 SET UP2 T Active programs 8 CYCL DEF 4 2 DEPTH 10 C c ra z 9 CYCL DEF 4 3 PLNGNG10 F333 10 CYCL DEF 4 4 X 30 LZ Datum T A SO 11 CYCL DEF 4 5 90 4 t Active machining cycle CSE Ee aa c 9 e80e0 z 14 CYCL DEF 5 CIRCULAR POCKET 2 Tilt angle Circle center CC pole es K Basic rotation 0 14477 150 F OUR Machining time 31 85 may 25 642 Z 134 992 C 0 000 S 321 790 Dwell time counter o A T IEU STATUS STATUS TOOL A STATUS
149. Time difference to universal time h 12 to 13 Time difference in hours relative to Greenwich Mean Time 13 1 Machine Specific User Parameters HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 505 il 13 2 Pin ayina Connecting Cables for Data Interfaces 13 2 Pin Layout and Connecting Cables for Data Interfaces RS 232 C V 24 interface for HEIDEHAIN devices E The interface complies with the requirements of EN 50 178 for low voltage electrical separation When using the 25 pin adapter block Do not assign Yellow U D UO X DTR Signal GND DSR RTS CTR Do not assign Hsg Ext shield Green Brown Blue Gray Pink Ext shield CO CO N A BR WI ND gt Ext shield Hsg Hsg When using the 9 pin adapter block i C a a E s Donotassign o feen po poo p Green Hsg Hsg Ext shield Hsg Hsg Hsg 506 Non HEIDENHAIN devices The connector pin layout of a non HEIDENHAIN device may differ considerably from that on a HEIDENHAIN device It depends on the unit and the type of data transfer The table below shows the connector pin layout on the adapter block Yellow White Brown Black Violet Gray White Green N CO BY O1 M NM O gt Co Green oi NI 0 A OI N gt Hsg Hsg Hsg External Hsg shield Ethernet interface RJ45 socket Maximum cable length Unshielded 100 m Shielded 400 m 1 TX Transmit Data 2 TX Transmit Data
150. YCLE DEF Label jumped to during M2 M30 instead of ending the current program Value 0 M2 M30 has the normal effect Label jumped to if FN14 ERROR after the NC CANCEL reaction instead of aborting the program with an error The error number programmed in the FN14 command can be read under ID992 NR14 Value 0 FN14 has the normal effect Label jumped to in the event of an internal server error SQL PLC CFG instead of aborting the program with an error Value 0 Server error has the normal effect Active tool number Prepared tool number Active tool axis 0 X 1 Y 2 Z 6 U 7 V 8 W Programmed spindle speed Active spindle status 1 undetined 0 M3 active 1 M4 active 2 Mbd after M3 3 Mb after M4 Coolant status O off 1 on Active feed rate Index of prepared tool Index of active tool Channel number Set up clearance of active fixed cycle Drilling depth milling depth of active fixed cycle Plunging depth of active fixed cycle Feed rate for pecking in active fixed cycle ions Funct itiona 10 8 Add j il ions Funct itiona 10 8 Add Modal condition 35 Data for SOL tables 40 Data from the tool table 50 408 or BY O Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no 1st side length for rectangular pocket cycle 2nd side length for rectangular pocket cycle 1st side length for slot cycle 2nd side length
151. a 4 857 MoD Position Program entry ot S Position display 1 ACTL z Poon T Enter code number ee Ee 642 input HEIDENHAIN X i gt Machine specific user parameters if provided cae m 992 474 Control model TNC320 NC software 340551 02B e Q Q Q Test Run NC kernel C_NCK_HSCI_445 7 9 Feature Content Level e Display software numbers CANCEL Show active tool table in the test run eo Sima ae TE E Show active datum table in the test run In all other modes Display software numbers Select position display Unit of measurement mm inches Programming language for MDI Select the axes for actual position capture Display operating times HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 91 S OVR 11 46 150 F OVR DIAGNOSE POSITION MACHINE OK CANCEL INPUT PGM TIME FE 479 12 1 Selecting MOD Functions 7 D 2 5 hm S N a O Y N N q 12 2 Software Numbers Function The following software numbers are displayed on the TNC screen after the MOD functions have been selected 480 Control model Designation of the control managed by HEIDENHAIN NC software Number of the NC software managed by HEIDENHAIN Feature Content Level FCL Development level of the software installed on the control see Feature Content Level upgrade functions on page 8 NC Kernel Number of the NC software managed by HEIDENHAIN PLC software Number or name of t
152. a non tilted plane If required define Cycle 19 WORKING PLANE with other angular values to execute machining in a different axis position In this case it is not necessary to reset Cycle 19 You can define the new angular values directly Reset Cycle 19 WORKING PLANE program 0 for all tilt axes Disable the WORKING PLANE function redefine Cycle 19 and answer the dialog question with NO ENT Reset datum shift if required Position the rotary axes to the 0 position if required 2 Clamp the workpiece 3 Preparations in the operating mode Positioning with Manual Data Input MDI Pre position the rotary axis axes to the corresponding angular value s for setting the datum The angular value depends on the selected reference plane on the workpiece HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 8 7 voor Transformation Cycles j il fe Transformation Cycles O O Q ae 00 4 Preparations in the operating mode Manual Operation Use the 3D ROT soft key to set the function TILT WORKING PLANE to ACTIVE in the Manual Operating mode For open loop axes enter the angular values for the rotary axes into the menu If the axes are not controlled the angular values entered in the menu must correspond to the actual position s of the rotary axis or axes respectively The TNC will otherwise calculate a wrong datum 5 Set the datum Manually by touching the workpiece with the tool in the untilted coordinate system see Datum Setting Without a
153. ace normal vectors by the sum of the delta values tool table and TOOL CALL If M128 see Position der Werkzeugspitze beim Positionieren von Schwenkachsen beibehalten TCPM M128 Software Option 2 page 308 is active the TNC maintains the tool perpendicular to the workpiece contour If no tool orientation is programmed in the LN block If there is a tool orientation T defined in the LN block and M128 or FUNCTION TCPM is active at the same time then the TNC will position the rotary axes automatically so that the tool can reach the defined orientation If you have not activated M128 or FUNCTION TCPM then the TNC ignores the direction vector T even if it is defined in the LN block This function is possible only on machines for which you 4 can define spatial angles for the tilting axis configuration Refer to your machine manual The TNC is not able to automatically position the rotary axes on all machines Refer to your machine manual ath Danger of collision On machines whose rotary axes only allow limited traverse sometimes automatic positioning can require the table to be rotated by 180 In this case make sure that the tool head does not collide with the workpiece or the clamps Example Block format with surface normal vectors without tool orientation HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 N 2 a O S 5 4 Three Dimensional Tool Compensation S j il Pa Example Block format with surface normal v
154. ach drive Establish the network connection If the T connection is active the TNC marks the Mnt column Delete network connection Ea Automatically establish network connection re whenever the TNC is switched on The TNC MOUNT marks the Auto column if the connection is established automatically Use the PING function to test your network connection If you press the NETWORK INFO soft key the ae TNC displays the current network settings INFO 94 Program run Programming full sequence table Mount Auto Mount point Mount device 1 a PC de01pc5323 transfer 4 CONFIGURE NETWORK DELETE NETWORK aa CONNECTN 4 x ve E DIAGNOSE el USB devices on the TNC Backing up data from or loading onto the TNC is especially easy with USB devices The TNC supports the following USB block devices Floppy disk drives with FAT VFAT file system Memory sticks with the FAT VFAT file system Hard disks with the FAT VFAT file system CD ROM drives with the Joliet ISO 9660 Tile system The TNC automatically detects these types of USB devices when connected The TNC does not support USB devices with other file systems such as NTFS After connection the TNC displays an error message CS The TNC also displays an error message If you connect a USB hub In this case simply acknowledge the message with the CE key In theory you should be able to connect all USB devices with the file sy
155. achine axes and then move the tool in each axis to a defined position relative to the workpiece Set the display of the TNC either to zero or to a known position value for each position This establishes the reference system for the workpiece which will be used for the TNC display and your part program If the production drawing is dimensioned in relative coordinates simply use the coordinate transformation cycles see Coordinate Transformation Cycles on page 344 If the production drawing is not dimensioned for NC set the datum at a position or corner on the workpiece which is suitable for deducing the dimensions of the remaining workpiece positions The fastest easiest and most accurate way of setting the datum is by using a 3 D touch probe from HEIDENHAIN See Setting the Datum with a 3 D Touch Probe in the Touch Probe Cycles User s Manual Example The workpiece drawing at right shows holes 1 to 4 whose dimensions are shown with respect to an absolute datum with the coordinates X 0 Y 0 Holes 5 to 7 are dimensioned with respect to a relative datum with the absolute coordinates X 450 Y 750 With the DATUM SHIFT cycle you can temporarily set the datum to the position X 450 Y 750 to be able to program holes 5 to 7 without further calculations 78 4 2 File Management lt Fundamentals Files Programs In HEIDENHAIN format A In DIN ISO format Hi ss ass Tables for PT Tools
156. achining point patterns directly 220 CIRCULAR PATTERN 220 294 aes 221 LINEAR PATTERN 221 296 You can combine Cycle 220 and Cycle 221 with the following fixed cycles Cycle 200 Cycle 201 Cycle 202 Cycle 203 Cycle 204 Cycle 205 Cycle 206 Cycle 207 Cycle 208 Cycle 209 Cycle 212 Cycle 213 Cycle 214 Cycle 215 Cycle 240 Cycle 262 Cycle 263 Cycle 264 Cycle 265 Cycle 267 DRILLING REAMING BORING UNIVERSAL DRILLING BACK BORING UNIVERSAL PECKING TAPPING NEW with a floating tap holder RIGID TAPPING without a floating tap holder NEW BORE MILLING TAPPING WITH CHIP BREAKING POCKET FINISHING STUD FINISHING CIRCULAR POCKET FINISHING CIRCULAR STUD FINISHING CENTERING THREAD MILLING THREAD MILLING COUNTERSINKING THREAD DRILLING MILLING HELICAL THREAD DRILLING MILLING OUTSIDE THREAD MILLING HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Point Patterns ining ach t p amp gt Q x 00 j il 2 CIRCULAR PATTERN Cycle 220 Advanced programming features software option E 1 The TNC moves the tool at rapid traverse from its current position oO to the starting point for the first machining operation Sequence pe Move to the 2nd set up clearance spindle axis O Approach the starting point in the spindle axis A Move to the set up clearance above the workpiece surface O spindle axis 2 From this position the TNC executes the last defined fixed cycle 3 The tool then approaches on a straight line or cir
157. also program the corresponding numerical value e g F30000 Unlike FMAX this rapid traverse remains in effect not only in the individual block but in all blocks until you program a new feed rate Duration of effect A feed rate entered as a numerical value remains in effect until a block with a different feed rate is reached FMAX is only effective in the block in which it is programmed After the block with FMAX is executed the feed rate will return to the last feed rate entered as a numerical value Changing during program run You can adjust the feed rate during program run with the teed rate override knob F 120 Spindle speed S The spindle speed S is entered in revolutions per minute rom in a TOOL CALL block Programmed change In the part program you can change the spindle speed in a TOOL CALL block by entering the spindle speed only To program a tool call press the TOOL CALL key CALL Ignore the dialog question for Tool number with the NO ENT key Ignore the dialog question for Working spindle axis X Y Z with the NO ENT key Enter the new spindle speed for the dialog question Spindle speed S and confirm with END Changing during program run You can adjust the spindle speed during program run with the spindle speed override knob S HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 5 1 Entering i Data il 5 2 Tool Data 5 2 Tool Data Requirements for tool compensation You usually program the coordinat
158. ame are entered in single quotation marks Column designation Designation of the table column as given in the configuration data HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Example Bind a Q parameter to a table column Example Cancel binding 10 9 Tables with SQL Commands f i 10 9 Accell Tables with SQL Commands SQL SELECT SQL SELECT selects table rows and transfers them to the result set The SOL server places the data in the result set row by row The rows are numbered in ascending order starting from 0 This row number called the INDEX is used in the SOL commands Fetch and Update Enter the selection criteria in the SQL SELECT WHERE option This lets you restrict the number of rows to be transferred If you do not use this option all rows in the table are loaded Enter the sorting criteria in the SQL SELECT ORDER BY option Enter the column designation and the keyword for ascending descending order If you do not use this option the rows are placed in random order Lock out the selected rows for other applications with the SQL SELECT FOR UPDATE option Other applications can continue to read these rows but cannot change them We strongly recommend using this option if you are making changes to the table entries Empty result set If no rows match the selection criteria the SOL server returns a valid handle but no table entries 424 SQL EXECUTE Parameter no for result O parameter for the handle Th
159. amt f B T Verbindung Protokoll Schnittstelle 115200 LSY 2 com2 Baudrate Auto Detect DNC Verbindung aktiv 489 12 7 Setting the Data Interfaces 12 8 Ethernet Interface Introduction The TNC is shipped with a standard Ethernet card to connect the control as a client in your network The TNC transmits data via the Ethernet card with the smb protocol server message block for Windows operating systems or the TCP IP protocol family Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol and with support from the NFS Network File System Connection possibilities sb jm hom vb ad 4 b o os ad LLI 0 N q You can connect the Ethernet card in your TNC to your network through the RJ45 connection X26 100BaseTX or 10BaseT or directly to a PC The connection is metallically isolated from the control electronics For a 100BaselX or 10Basel connection you need a Twisted Pair cable to connect the TNC to your network CS The maximum cable length between TNC and a node depends on the quality grade of the cable the sheathing and the type of network 100BaseTX or 10BaseT No great effort is required to connect the TNC directly to a PC that has an Ethernet card Simply connect the TNC Eset OET port X26 and the PC with an Ethernet crossover cable sa ces trade names crossed patch cable or STP cable 490 Connecting
160. an table File system sMB gt 45 D Connect the TNC port X26 with a network or a PC xP fteolt_ easis7_ 4 e l Username 213608 z Sa In the Tile manager PGM MGT select the Network soft key Worksroup i a Password PETTITT ee Press the MOD key Then enter the keyword NET123 Further options po M es sockopt SO_RCVTIMEO 18 sockopt SO_SNDTIMEO 10 ad Press the DEFINE NETWORK CONNECTN soft key Automatic connection ho g LL It opens the dialog window for the network configuration _ canoeL E reve Setting Meaning e n OK CANCEL ae eee Mount device Connection over NFS Directory name to be mounted This is formed trom the network address of the device a colon a slash and the name of the directory Entry of the network address as four decimal numbers separated by points dotted decimal notation e g 160 1 180 4 PC When entering the path name pay attention to capitalization To connect individual Windows computers via SMB Enter the network name and the share name of the computer e g PC1791NT PC Mount point Device name The device name entered here is displayed on the control in the program management for the mounted network e g WORLD The name must end with a colon File system File system type NFS Network File System SMB Windows network NFS option rsize Packet size in bytes for data reception wsize Packet size for data transmission In bytes time0 Time in tenths of a second after whi
161. and torque motors 13 3 Technical Information HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 513 il 13 3 Technical Information Positions coordinates circle radii chamfer lengths Tool numbers Tool names Delta values for tool compensation Spindle speeds Feed rates Dwell time in Cycle 9 Thread pitch in various cycles Angle of spindle orientation Angle for polar coordinates rotation tilting the working plane Polar coordinate angle for helical interpolation CP Datum numbers in Cycle 7 Scaling factor in Cycles 11 and 26 Miscellaneous functions M Q parameter numbers Q parameter values Surface normal vectors N and T with 3 D compensation Labels LBL for program jumps Labels LBL for program jumps Number of program section repeats REP Error number with Q parameter function FN14 514 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 5 4 places before and after the decimal point mm O to 32 767 9 5 1 16 characters enclosed by quotation marks with TOOL CALL Permitted special characters amp 99 9999 to 99 9999 2 4 mm O to 99 999 999 5 3 rom O to 99 999 999 5 3 mm min or mm tooth or mm rev O to 3600 000 4 3 s 99 9999 to 99 9999 2 4 mm O to 360 0000 3 4 360 0000 to 360 0000 3 4 5 400 0000 to 5 400 0000 4 4 O to 2 999 4 0 0 000001 to 99 999999 2 6 O to 999 3 0 O to 1999 4 0 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 5 4 9 99999999 to 9 99999999 1 8 O
162. are option 1 From the current position in the working plane the TNC positions the tool at rapid traverse FMAX to the starting point 1 the TNC moves the tool by its radius to the left and upward The tool then moves at FMAX in the spindle axis to the set up clearance From there it approaches the programmed starting position in the spindle axis at the feed rate for plunging The tool then moves at the programmed feed rate for milling to the end point 2 The TNC calculates the end point from the programmed starting point the program length and the tool radius The TNC offsets the tool to the starting point in the next pass at the stepover feed rate The offset is calculated from the programmed width and the number of cuts The tool then returns in the negative direction of the first axis Multipass milling is repeated until the programmed surface has been completed At the end of the cycle the tool is retracted at FMAX to the set up clearance CS Before programming note the following From the current position the TNC positions the tool at the starting point first in the working plane and then in the spindle axis Pre position the tool in such a way that no collision between tool and clamping devices can occur 332 gt Starting point in 1st axis Q225 absolute value Minimum point coordinate of the surface to be multipass milled in the reference axis of the working plane gt Starting point in 2nd axis Q22
163. art of the contour A teed rate programmed in the RND block is effective only in that block After the RND block the previous feed rate becomes effective again 6 4 Path vontours Caa Coordinates You can also use an RND block for a tangential contour approach if you do not want to use an APPR function HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 161 il 6 4 Path Contours cl sian Coordinates Circle center CC You can define a circle center CC for circles that are programmed with the C key circular path C This is done in the following ways E Entering the Cartesian coordinates of the circle center in the working plane or E Using the circle center defined in an earlier block or E Capturing the coordinates with the ACTUAL POSITION CAPTURE key g gt Coordinates CC Enter the circle center coordinates If you want to use the last programmed position do not enter any coordinates Example NC blocks The program blocks 10 and 11 do not refer to the illustration Duration of effect The circle center definition remains in effect until a new circle center IS programmed Entering the circle center CC incrementally If you enter the circle center with incremental coordinates you have programmed it relative to the last programmed position of the tool CS The only effect of CC is to define a position as circle center The tool does not move to this position The circle center is also the pole for polar coordinates Circular path C around ci
164. ation Select the Test Run operating mode Call the file manager with the PGM MGT key and select the file you wish to test or 11 4 Test Run Go to the program beginning Select line O with the GOTO key and confirm your entry with the ENT key The TNC then displays the following soft keys Reset the blank form and test the entire program RESET Test the entire program EH Test each program block individually START Halt program test soft key only appears once you have started the program test You can interrupt the program test and continue it again at any point even within a machining cycle In order to continue the test the following actions must not be performed Selecting another block with the GOTO key Making changes to the program Switching the operating mode Selecting a new program 466 11 5 Program Run Function Programming In the Program Run Full Sequence mode of operation the TNC executes a part program continuously to its end or up to a program stop Program run full sequence 3TH BEGIN PGM 113 MM BLK FORM 0 1 Z X 0 Y 0 Z 20 BLK FORM 2 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 TOOL CALL 3 Z 52000 L Z 10 RO FMAX M3 L X 50 Y 50 R FMAX CYCL DEF 4 0 POCKET MILLING CYCL DEF 4 1 SET UP2 CYCL DEF 4 2 DEPTH 10 9 CYCL DEF 4 3 PLNGNG1 F333 10 CYCL DEF 4 4 X 3 11 CYCL DEF 4 5 Y 90 12 CYCL DEF 4 6 F888 DR RADIUSS 13 L Z 2 RO FMAX M99 14 CYCL DEF 5 0 CIRCULAR POCKET 11 5 Program Run
165. atum 78 4 2 File Management Fundamentals 79 Files 79 screen keypad 81 Data backup 81 4 3 Working with the File Manager 82 Directories 32 Paths 82 Overview Functions of the file manager 83 Calling the file manager 84 Selecting drives directories and Tiles 85 Creating a new directory 86 Copying a single file 87 Copying a directory 87 Choosing one of the last 10 files selected 88 Deleting a file 88 Deleting a directory 88 Marking files 89 Renaming a file 90 File sorting 90 Additional functions 90 Data transfer to or from an external data medium 91 Copying files into another directory 93 The TNC in a network 94 USB devices on the TNC 95 4 4 Creating and Writing Programs 96 Organization of an NC program in HEIDENHAIN conversational format 96 Define the blank BLK FORM 96 Creating a new part program 97 Programming tool movements in conversational format 99g Actual position capture 100 Editing a program 101 The TNC search function 105 14 4 5 Interactive Programming Graphics 107 Generating Not generating graphics during programming 107 Generating a graphic for an existing program 107 Block number display ON OFF 108 Erasing the graphic 108 Magnifying or reducing a detail 108 4 6 Structuring Programs 1
166. ature the various cycles and the Q parameter functions help you with programming and add necessary information If desired you can have the programming graphics show the individual steps APPR LCT X 10 Y 0 R5 RL FPOL X 100 Y 0 s 9 FC DR R10 CLSD CCX 0 10 FLT 11 FCT DR R15 CCX 100 CCY 0 tD LT 13 FCT DR R10 CCPR 40 CCPA 110 14 FLT PDX 100 PDY 0 D15 T a 15 FSELECT1 2 16 FCT DR RS 17 FLT PDX 10 PDY D15 Soft keys for selecting the screen layout 18 FCT DR R10 CLSD CCX 0 CCY 0 19 FSELECT1 20 DEP LCT X 30 Y 0 Z 100 RS FMAX 21 END PGM HEBEL MM gt pm om D Q O m q Program z Left program blocks right program structure PROGRAM cn Left program blocks right graphics PROGRAM e geet Saraer Test Run Positioning With mdi Test run 113 H In the Test Run mode of operation the TNC checks programs and program sections for errors such as geometrical incompatibilities missing or incorrect data within the program or violations of the work space This simulation is supported graphically in different display modes Advanced graphic features software option BEGIN PGM 113 MM 1 BLK FORM 0 1 Z X 0 Y 0 Z 20 2 BLK FORM 0 2 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 3 TOOL CALL 3 Z 52000 4 L Z 10 R FMAX M3 5 L X 5 Y 50 RO FMAX 6 CYCL DEF 4 0 POCKET MILLING P 8 9 CYCL DEF 4 1 SET UP2 CYCL DEF 4 2 DEPTH 10 CYC
167. blocks Point Patterns Ining ach tj V amp gt Q q 0 j i Point Patterns ining io 8 4 Cycles fo LINEAR PATTERN Cycle 221 Advanced programming features software option CS Before programming note the following Cycle 221 is DEF active which means that Cycle 221 automatically calls the last defined fixed cycle If you combine Cycle 221 with one of the fixed cycles 200 to 209 212 to 215 261 to 267 the set up clearance workpiece surface and 2nd set up clearance that you defined in Cycle 221 will be effective for the selected fixed cycle 1 The TNC automatically moves the tool from its current position to the starting point for the first machining operation Sequence Move to the 2nd set up clearance spindle axis Approach the starting point in the spindle axis Move to the set up clearance above the workpiece surface spindle axis 2 From this position the TNC executes the last defined fixed cycle 3 The tool then approaches the starting point for the next machining operation in the positive reference axis direction at the set up clearance or the 2nd set up clearance 4 This process 1 to 3 is repeated until all machining operations on the first line have been executed The tool is located above the last point on the first line 5 The tool subsequently moves to the last point on the second line where it carries out the machining operation 6 From this position th
168. bore Q249 incremental value Distance between underside of workpiece and the top of the hole A positive sign means the hole will be bored in the positive spindle axis direction Material thickness Q250 incremental value Thickness of the workpiece gt Of f center distance 0251 incremental value Off center distance for the boring bar value from tool data sheet gt Tool edge height Q252 incremental value Distance between the underside of the boring bar and the main cutting tooth value from tool data sheet gt Feed rate for pre positioning Q253 Traversing speed of the tool when moving in and out of the workpiece in mm min gt Feed rate for countersinking Q254 Traversing speed of the tool during countersinking in mm min gt Dwell time Q255 Dwell time in seconds at the top of the bore hole gt Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute value Coordinate of the workpiece surface gt 2nd set up clearance Q204 incremental value Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece clamping devices can occur gt Disengaging direction 0 1 2 3 4 Q214 Determine the direction in which the TNC displaces the tool by the off center distance after spindle orientation Input of O is not permitted 1 Retract tool in the negative ref axis direction 2 Retract tool in the neg minor axis direction 3 Retract tool in the positive ref axis direction 4 Retract tool in the p
169. ch the control repeats an unanswered Remote Procedure Call soft f YES is entered the Remote Procedure Call is repeated until the NFS server answers If NO is entered It is not repeated HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 493 SMB option Options that concern the SMB file system type Options are given without space characters separated only by commas Pay attention to capitalization Options ip IP address of the Windows PC to which the control is to be connected username User name with which the control should log tn workgroup Workgroup under which the control should log In sb jm hom eb ad 4 b o Z me LLI 0 N q password Password with which the TNC is to log on up to 80 characters Further SMB options Input of further options for the Windows network Automatic Automount YES or NO Here you specify connection whether the network will be automatically mounted when the control starts up Devices not automatically mounted can be mounted anytime later in the program management CS You do not need to indicate the protocol with the TNC 620 It uses the transmission protocol according to RFC 894 494 Settings on a PC with Windows 2000 Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties E 2 ajx E Prerequisite EEE The network card must already be installed on the PC and ou can get IF settings assigned automatically if your network supports rea dy for operation this capability Othenvse you
170. characters with the screen keypad or if available with a PC keyboard connected over the USB port Enter the text with the screen keypad Press the GOTO key if you want to enter a text for example a program name or directory name using the screen keypad The TNC opens a window in which the numeric entry field of the TNC is displayed with the corresponding letters assigned You can move the cursor to the desired character by repeatedly pressing the respective key Wait until the selected character is transferred to the entry field before you enter the next character Use the OK soft key to load the text into the open dialog field Use the abc ABC soft key to select upper or lower case If your machine tool builder has defined additional special characters you can call them with the SPECIAL CHARACTER soft key and insert them To delete individual characters use the Backspace soft key Data backup We recommend saving newly written programs and files on a PC at regular intervals HEIDENHAIN provides a backup function for this purpose in the data transfer software TNCremoNT Your machine tool builder can provide you with a copy of TNCBACK EXE You additionally need a data medium on which all machine specitic data such as the PLC program machine parameters etc are stored Please contact your machine tool builder for more information on both the backup program and the floppy disk CS Take the time occasionally to delete any unneede
171. chine tool builder adapts the functional range of 4 the filter function to the requirements of your machine The machine tool manual provides further information HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Tool table editing Tool name Programming File tnc NtableNtool t INAKTIV TS 1 8 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 99 9999 113 8237 0 ttttttttttt Seseoousssss t ttt t t ttrrrrtt tt Seeeeeoceocsoeneqgggqg 127 5 2 Tool Data 5 2 Tool Data To open any other tool table Select the Programming mode of operation Call the file manager Press the SELECT TYPE soft key to select the file type Press the SHOW T soft key to show type T Tiles Select a file or enter a new file name Conclude your entry with the ENT key or the SELECT soft key When you have opened the tool table you can edit the tool data by moving the cursor to the desired position in the table with the arrow keys or the soft keys You can overwrite the stored values or enter new values at any position The available editing functions are illustrated in the table below If the TNC cannot show all positions in the tool table in one screen page the highlight bar at the top of the table will display the gt gt or lt lt symbols Select beginning of table BEGIN Select end of table Select previous page in table PAGE Select next page in table IREE Find the text or n
172. cking EVEN Number of stop bits 1 stop bit Specify type of handshake RTS_CTS File system for file operations FE1 Setting the mode of the external device fileSystem CS The functions Transfer all files Transfer selected file and Transfer directory are not available in the FE2 and FEX modes PC with HEIDENHAIN data transfer LSV2 software TNCremoNT Non HEIDENHAIN devices such as FEX punchers PC without TNCremoNT HEIDENHAIN floppy disk units FE1 m HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 12 7 Setting the Data Interfaces j il 12 7 Setting the Data Interfaces Software for data transfer For transfer of files to and from the TNC we recommend using the HEIDENHAIN TNCremoNT data transfer software With TNCremoNT data transfer is possible with all HEIDENHAIN controls via the serial interface or the Ethernet interface E You can download the current version of TNCremoNT free of charge from the HEIDENHAIN Filebase www heidenhain de lt service gt lt download area gt lt TNCremo NT gt System requirements for TNCremoNT PC with 486 processor or higher Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 Windows XP or Windows Vista operating system 16 MB RAM 5 MB free memory space on your hard disk An available serial interface or connection to the TCP IP network Installation under Windows Start the SETUP EXE installation program with the File Manager Explorer Follow the setup program instructions
173. clearance Q204 incremental value Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece clamping devices can occur gt Disengaging direction 0 1 2 3 4 Q214 Determine the direction in which the TNC retracts the tool at the hole bottom after spindle orientation 0 Do not retract tool Retract tool in the negative ref axis direction Retract tool in the neg minor axis direction Retract tool in the positive ref axis direction Retract tool in the pos minor axis direction Bm O Na Danger of collision Select a disengaging direction in which the tool moves away from the edge of the hole Check the position of the tool tip when you program a spindle orientation to the angle that you enter in Q336 for example in the Positioning with Manual Data Input mode of operation Set the angle so that the tool tip is parallel to a coordinate axis During retraction the TNC automatically takes an active rotation of the coordinate system into account gt Angle for spindle orientation 0336 absolute Angle at which the TNC positions the tool before retracting It m X D 3 p D O T e zA A UNIVERSAL DRILLING Cycle 203 Advanced programming features software option 1 The TNC positions the tool in the spindle axis at rapid traverse FMAX to the programmed set up clearance above the workpiece surface 2 The tool drills to the first plunging depth at the pr
174. collision between tool and workpiece clamping devices can Occur gt Dwell time at depth 0211 Time in seconds that the tool remains at the hole bottom m X D 3 p D O T e zA A REAMING Cycle 201 Advanced programming features software option 1 The TNC positions the tool in the spindle axis at rapid traverse FMAX to the programmed set up clearance above the workpiece surface 2 The tool reams to the entered depth at the programmed feed rate F 3 If programmed the tool remains at the hole bottom for the entered dwell time 4 The tool then retracts to the set up clearance at the feed rate F and from there if programmed to the 2nd set up clearance at 8 2 Cycles for Drilling Tapping and Thread Milling HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 229 il 8 2 Cycles for Drilling Wh oinc and Thread Milling 230 gt Set up clearance Q200 incremental value Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface gt Depth Q201 incremental value Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of hole gt Feed rate for plunging Q206 Traversing speed of the tool during reaming in mm min gt Dwell time at depth 0211 Time in seconds that the tool remains at the hole bottom gt Retraction feed rate O208 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min when retracting from the hole If you enter Q208 0 the tool retracts at the reaming feed rate gt
175. cular arc the E starting point for the next machining operation The tool stops at the set up clearance or the 2nd set up clearance 4 This process 1 to 3 is repeated until all machining operations have been executed CS Before programming note the following Cycle 220 is DEF active which means that Cycle 220 automatically calls the last defined fixed cycle If you combine Cycle 220 with one of the fixed cycles 200 to 209 212 to 215 and 261 to 265 or 267 the set up clearance workpiece surface and 2nd set up clearance that you defined in Cycle 220 will be effective for the selected fixed cycle 8 4 Cycles fo Center in 1st axis 0216 absolute value Center of the pitch circle in the reference axis of the working plane Center in 2nd axis 0217 absolute value Center of the pitch circle in the minor axis of the working plane SZ Pitch circle diameter Q244 Diameter of the pitch circle Starting angle Q245 absolute value Angle between the reference axis of the working plane and the starting point for the first machining operation on the pitch circle Stopping angle Q246 absolute value Angle between the reference axis of the working plane and the starting point for the last machining operation on the pitch circle does not apply to complete circles Do not enter the same value for the stopping angle and starting angle If you enter the stopping angle greater than the starting angle machining wil
176. cut milling with M3 Rounding radius Radius for the pocket corners If radius O is entered the pocket corners will be rounded with the radius of the cutter Stepover factork KxR K Overlap factor preset in the PocketOverlap machine parameter R Cutter radius HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Example NC blocks 27 Ow 8 3 Cycles for ae ees Studs and Slots POCKET FINISHING Cycle 212 Advanced programming features software option 1 The TNC automatically moves the tool in the spindle axis to the set up clearance or if programmed to the 2nd set up clearance and subsequently to the center of the pocket 2 From the pocket center the tool moves in the working plane to the starting point for machining The TNC takes the allowance and tool radius into account for calculating the starting point If necessary the TNC penetrates at the pocket center 3 If the tool is at the 2nd set up clearance it moves at rapid traverse FMAX to the set up clearance and from there advances to the first plunging depth at the feed rate for plunging 4 The tool then moves tangentially to the contour of the finished part and using climb milling machines one revolution 5 The tool then departs the contour on a tangential path and returns to the starting point in the working plane This process 3 to 5 is repeated until the programmed depth is reached 7 Atthe end of the cycle the TNC retracts the tool at rapid traverse to the set u
177. cycle using the GOTO function CYCL The soft key row shows the available groups of DEE cycles The TNC opens a pop up window 2 Lg Press the arrow keys to cursor to the cycle you need and press ENT or Enter the cycle number and confirm it twice with the ENT key The TNC then initiates the cycle dialog as described above m x D 3 D O 2 e o A HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Positioning With mdi Programming Set up clearance BEGIN PGM EX11 MM 3 ANY COMMENT 2 BLK FORM 1 Z X 135 Y 40 2 5 3 BLK FORM 2 X 30 40 Z 0 4 TOOL CALL 3 Z 51500 5 L Z 20 R FMAX M3 6 CYCL DEF Z200 DRILLING eee Q200 SET UP CLEARANCE 15 7FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG D 1 lt PLUNGING DEPTH 7DWELL TIME AT TOP SURFACE COORDINATE 72ND SET UP CLEARANCE 7DWELL TIME AT DEPTH sALLOWANCE FOR SIDE 7ALLOWANCE FOR FLOOR SURFACE COORDINATE SET UP CLEARANCE CLEARANCE HEIGHT ROUNDING RADIUS ROTATIONAL DIRECTION 219 E Working with Cycles Cycles Overview Cycles for pecking reaming boring counterboring tapping and thread milling Cycles for milling pockets studs and slots Cycles for producing point patterns such as circular or linear hole patterns SL Subcontour List cycles which allow DRILLINGZ THREAD POCKETS STUDS7 SLOTS PATTERN S L ii 223 271 293 300 E Working with Cycles the contour parallel machining of relatively complex
178. d press the horizontal arrow key repeatedly until the desired dialog appears You can then enter the desired value 102 Looking for the same words in different blocks To use this function set the AUTO DRAW soft key to OFF To select a word in a block press the arrow keys repeatedly until the highlight is on the desired word Programs Select a block with the arrow keys The word that is highlighted in the new block is the same as the one you selected previously Finding any text To select the search function press the FIND soft key The TNC displays the Find text dialog prompt Enter the text that you wish to find To find the text press the FIND soft key O J as Q lt T a HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 103 il below Marking copying deleting and inserting program sections The TNC provides certain functions for copying program sections within an NC program or into another NC program see the table 4 4 Creating and ae Programs To copy a program section proceed as follows Select the soft key row containing the marking functions Select the first last block of the section you wish to copy To mark the first last block Press the SELECT BLOCK soft key The TNC then highlights the first character of the block and the CANCEL SELECTION soft key appears Move the highlight to the last first block of the program section you wish to copy or delete The TNC shows the marke
179. d blocks in a different color You can end the marking function at any time by pressing the CANCEL SELECTION soft key To copy the selected program section press the COPY BLOCK soft key To delete the selected section press the DELETE BLOCK soft key The TNC stores the selected block Using the arrow keys select the block after which you wish to insert the copied deleted program section CS To insert the section into another program select the corresponding program using the file manager and then mark the block after which you wish to insert the copied block To insert the block press the INSERT BLOCK soft key To end the marking function press the CANCEL SELECTION soft key Switch marking function on SELECT BLOCK CANCEL SELECTION DELETE BLOCK INSERT BLOCK Copy marked block er BLOCK Switch marking function off Delete marked block Insert block that is stored in the buffer memory 104 14 H 53500 L Z 100 RO FMAX M13 WOOVNTUBUONeP SD EL 17 DEP LCT X 15 Y 5 RS 18 L Z 2 R FMAX 19 L Z 100 RO FMAX M30 20 END PGM 14 MM ot B Ee e E m CANCEL DELETE COPY T SELECTION BLOCK BLOCK g INSERT LAST NC BLOCK The TNC search function With the search function of the TNC you can search for any text within a program and replace it by a new text if required Searching for texts If required select the block containing the word you
180. d displays The available MOD functions depend on the selected operating mode Selecting the MOD functions Call the operating mode in which you wish to change the MOD functions moD Press the MOD key to select the MOD functions Changing the settings Select the desired MOD function in the displayed menu with the arrow keys There are three possibilities for changing a setting depending on the function selected Enter only the number Change the setting by pressing the ENT key Change a setting via a selection window If more than one possibility is available for a particular setting you can superimpose a window listing all of the given possibilities by pressing the GOTO key Select the desired setting directly by pressing the arrow keys and then confirming with ENT If you don t want to change the setting close the window again with END Exiting the MOD functions Close the MOD functions with the END key or END soft key 478 Manual operation P ro g ramm i n g Code number Control model NC software NC kernel PLC software a TNC320 340551 02B C_NCK_HSCI_445 Basis NCK V 2 1 Feature Content Level CANCEL ot A an Ba USER LICENSE DIAGNOSIS lia END PARAMETER INFO Overview of MOD functions Depending on the selected mode of operation you can make the following changes Programming Display software numbers Manual operation Programming Av
181. d files so that the TNC always has enough memory space for system files Such as the tool table HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Positioning With mdi Programming HEGEL 4H Bo PLO N A Ba NCES TNC nc_prog screens H config HA nec_pro Tt File name Bytes Status Date Time Auto_Tast Man_Tast a screens 007 SHOW ae 4 H test 1 H table 111 ABC DEF Source f aH GHI JKL MNO fas 2 oK PARS TUV WXYZ Iil ane 06 2008 07 54 34 06 2008 07 55 22 OK CANCEL a T a Ea E 15 file s 285 7 MB vacant DIAGNOSE ede E ee 81 aL er c 4 2 File Management th the AiL Manager ing wi 4 3 Work 4 3 Working with the File Manager Directories If you Save many programs in the TNC we recommend that you save your files in directories folders so that you can easily find your data You can divide a directory into further directories which are called subdirectories With the key or ENT you can show or hide the subdirectories Paths A path indicates the drive and all directories and subdirectories under which a file is saved The individual names are separated by a backslash W Example The directory AUFTR1 was created on the TNC drive Then in the AUFTR1 directory the directory NCPROG was created and the part program PROG1 H was copied into it The part program now has the following path TNC AUFTR1 NCPROG PROG1
182. data often are not sufficient to fully define a workpiece contour In this case the TNC indicates the possible solutions in the FK graphic You can then select the contour that matches the drawing The FK graphic displays the elements of the workpiece contour in different colors White The contour element is fully defined Green The entered data describe a limited number of possible solutions select the correct one Red The entered data are not sufficient to determine the contour element enter further data If the entered data permit a limited number of possible solutions and the contour element is displayed in green select the correct contour element as follows Press the SHOW SOLUTION soft key repeatedly until eee the correct contour element is displayed Use the zoom function 2nd soft key row if you cannot distinguish possible solutions in the standard setting If the displayed contour element matches the oe drawing select the contour element with SELECT SOLUTION If you do not yet wish to select a green contour element press the EDIT soft key to continue the FK dialog CS Select the green contour elements as soon as possible with the SELECT SOLUTION soft key This way you can reduce the ambiguity of subsequent elements The machine tool builder may use other colors for the FK graphics NC blocks from a program that you called with PGM CALL are displayed in another color Show block number in graphic window To sho
183. dataBits By setting the data bits you define whether a character is transmitted with 7 or 8 data bits Parity check parity The parity bit helps the receiver to detect transmission errors The parity bit can be formed in three different ways No parity NONE There is no error detection Even parity EVEN Here there is an error if the receiver finds that it has received an odd number of set bits Odd parity ODD Here there is an error if the receiver finds that It has received an even number of set bits Setting the stop bits stopBits The start bit and one or two stop bits enable the receiver to synchronize to every transmitted character during serial data transmission Setting the handshake flowControl By handshaking two devices control data transfer between them A distinction is drawn between software and hardware handshaking No dataflow checking NONE Handshaking is not active Hardware handshaking RTS_CTS Transmission stop is active through RTS Software handshaking CKON_XOFF Transmission stop is active through DC3 XOFF 486 Settings for data transfer with the TNCserver PC software Enter the following settings in the user parameters seriallnterfaceRS232 definition of data blocks for the serial ports RS232 Data transfer rate in baud Has to match the setting in TNCserver Communications protocol BLOCKWISE Data bits in each transferred 7 bits character Type of parity che
184. desired datum by the value d Select the Manual Operation mode x Y Move the tool slowly until it touches scratches the workpiece surface z Select the axis O TF Zero tool in spindle axis Set the display to a known workpiece position here 0 or enter the thickness d of the shim In the tool axis offset the tool radius Repeat the process for the remaining axes If you are using a preset tool set the display of the tool axis to the length L of the tool or enter the sum Z L d E The TNC automatically saves the datum set with the axis keys in line O of the preset table HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 3 Q 0 Oo ao S b Y m T N Datum management with the preset table abe Manual operation Programming CS You should definitely use the preset table if aatom sheet No 4 DOC x y z SPC 30 698 17 18896 144 9917 0 144772 M 12 52855 22 46222 131 57333 0 162 618 7 25 133 8237 0 pea CERE 1 361 133 5987 0 162 618 7 25 133 8237 0 5 140 173 1 361 133 5987 0 144772 0 0 0 0 0 lt 2 v l l l p4 d Your machine is equipped with rotary axes tilting table or swivel head and you work with the function for tilting the working plane Up to now you have been working with older TNC controls with REF based datum tables You wish to machine identical workpieces that are OYUNDAN ee 9
185. dicates the export version of the TNC The export version of the TNC has the following limitations Simultaneous linear movement in up to 4 axes The machine tool builder adapts the usable features of the TNC to his machine by setting machine parameters Some of the functions described in this manual may therefore not be among the features provided by the TNC on your machine tool TNC functions that may not be available on your machine include Probing function for the 3 D touch probe Rigid tapping Returning to the contour after an interruption Please contact your machine tool builder to become familiar with the features of your machine Many machine manufacturers as well as HEIDENHAIN offer programming courses for the TNCs We recommend these courses as an effective way of improving your programming skill and sharing information and ideas with other TNC users CS Touch Probe Cycles User s Manual All of the touch probe functions are described in a separate manual Please contact HEIDENHAIN if you need a copy of this User s Manual ID 661 891 20 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Software options The TNC 620 features various software options that can be enabled by you or your machine tool builder Each option is to be enabled separately and contains the following respective functions Additional axis for 4 axes and closed loop spindle Additional axis for 5 axes and closed loop spindle Cylinder surface interpolation Cycles 27 28 a
186. e a t m d a L ai i amp s i Aj 5 J o i 3 E oo En 4 ss Gi i b e amp Pa e Hp _ i TEE X a _ F ip s A iy i a sj r m m p he b i lt hi Tir F L f Fs N ma t gt Oo 8 6 1 Tool Movements Path functions A workpiece contour is usually composed of several contour elements such as Straight lines and circular arcs With the path functions you can program the tool movements for straight lines and circular arcs FK free contour programming Advanced programming features software option If a production drawing is not dimensioned for NC and the dimensions given are not sufficient for creating a part program you can program the workpiece contour with the FK free contour programming The TNC calculates the missing data With FK programming you also program tool movements for straight lines and circular arcs Miscellaneous functions M With the TNC s miscellaneous functions you can affect Program run e g a program interruption Machine functions such as switching spindle rotation and coolant supply on and oft The path behavior of the tool Subprograms and program section repeats If a machining sequence occurs several times in a program you can save time and reduce the chance of programming errors by entering the sequence once and then defining it as a Subprogram or program section repeat If you wis
187. e table name Synonyms can also be used for addressing as an alternative to the path and Tile name Columns The number and names of the columns are specified when configuring the table In some SOL commands the column name is used for addressing Rows The number of rows is variable You can insert new rows There are no row numbers or other designators However you can select rows based on the contents of a column Rows can only be deleted in the table editor not by an NC program Cell The part of a column in a row Table entry Content of a cell Result set During a transaction the selected columns and rows are managed in the result set You can view the result set as a sort of intermediate memory which temporarily assumes the set of selected columns and rows Synonym This term defines a name used for a table instead of its path and file name Synonyms are specified by the machine manufacturer in the configuration data HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Tables with SQL Commands i 10 9 Acce i il 10 9 Accell Tables with SQL Commands A Transaction In principle a transaction consists of the following actions Address table file select rows and transfer them to the result set Read rows from the result set change rows or insert new rows Conclude transaction If changes insertions were made the rows from the result set are placed in the table file Other actions are also necessary so that table entries ca
188. e Advanced graphic features software option This function is activated with the BLANK IN WORKSPACE soft key You can activate or deactivate the function with the SW limit monitoring soft key 2nd soft key row Software Option 123 000 16 000 128 000 56 000 29 000 on T7 et e ES 0 000 100 000 x y 2 000 z Another transparent cuboid represents the workpiece blank Its dimensions are shown in the BLK FORM table The TNC takes the dimensions from the workpiece blank definition of the selected program The workpiece cuboid defines the coordinate system for input Its datum lies within the traverse range cuboid 100 000 20 000 0 000 x 182 302 Y 10 811 108 992 0 000 0 000 N hom 4 LL E hm g O Q gt O lt Q For a test run it normally does not matter where the workpiece blank is located within the working space However if you activate working space monitoring you must graphically shift the workpiece blank so that it lies within the working space Use the soft keys shown in the table You can also activate the current datum for the Test Run operating mode see the last line of the following table Shift workpiece blank in positive negative X direction X the Work Shift workpiece blank in positive negative Y direction Y4 iece in
189. e SQL server returns the handle for the group of columns and rows selected with the current select command In case of an error Selection could not be carried out the SOL server returns the code 1 Code 0 Identifies an invalid handle Data bank SQL command text with the following elements SELECT keyword Name of the SOL command Names of the table columns to be transferred Separate column names with a comma See examples Q parameters must be bound to all columns entered here FROM table name Synonym or path and file names of this table The synonym is entered directly whereas the path and table names are entered in single quotation marks see examples of the SOL command names of the table columns to be transferred separate several columns by a comma O parameters must be bound to all columns entered here E Optional WHERE selection criteria A selection criterion consists of a column name condition see table and comparator Link selection criteria with logical AND or OR Program the comparator directly or with a Q parameter A Q parameter is introduced with a colon and placed In single quotation marks see example E Optional ORDER BY column name ASC to sort in ascending order or ORDER BY column name DESC to sort in descending order If neither ASC nor DESC are programmed then ascending order is used as the default setting The TNC places the selected rows in the indicated column
190. e TNC is not able to automatically position the rotary axes on all machines Refer to your machine manual Note that the TNC makes a compensating movement by the defined delta values The tool radius R defined in the tool table has no effect on the compensation 5 4 Three Dimensional Tool Compensation S att Danger of collision On machines whose rotary axes only allow limited traverse sometimes automatic positioning can require the table to be rotated by 180 In this case make sure that the tool head does not collide with the workpiece or the clamps 142 There are two ways to define the tool orientation In an LN block with the components TX TY and TZ E n an L block by indicating the coordinates of the rotary axes Example Block format with tool orientation LN X Y Z TX TY TZ RR F M Straight line with 3 D compensation Compensated coordinates of the straight line end point Components of the normalized vector for workpiece orientation Tool radius compensation Feed rate Miscellaneous function Example Block format with rotary axes A wore xr gt ec v eo oO lt N T Straight line Compensated coordinates of the straight line end point Straight line Coordinates of the rotary axes for tool orientation Radius compensation Feed rate Miscellaneous function HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 are Option 2 5 4 Three Dimensional Tool Compensation S b i _
191. e angle from the arc tangent of two sides or from the sine and cosine of the angle 0 lt angle lt 360 and assigns it to a parameter 392 10 5 Calculating Circles Function The TNC can use the functions for calculating circles to calculate the circle center and the circle radius from three or four given points on the circle The calculation is more accurate if four points are used Application These functions can be used if you wish to determine the location and size of a hole or a pitch circle using the programmable probing function FN23 Determining the CIRCLE DATA from three rues points OF CIRCLE Example FN23 Q20 CDATA Q30 The coordinate pairs of three points on a circle must be saved in Q30 and the following five parameters in this case up to O35 The TNC then saves the circle center of the reference axis X if spindle axis Is Z in parameter Q20 the circle center in the minor axis Y if spindle axis is Z in parameter Q21 and the circle radius in parameter O22 FN24 Determining the CIRCLE DATA from four ee points OF CIRCLE Example FN24 Q20 CDATA Q30 The coordinate pairs of four points on a circle must be saved in Q30 and the following seven parameters in this case up to Q37 The TNC then saves the circle center of the reference axis X if spindle axis is Z In parameter Q20 the circle center in the minor axis Y if spindle axis is Z in parameter O21 and the circle radius in parameter Q22
192. e are also referred to as tool axis principal axis 1st axis and minor axis 2nd axis The assignment of the tool axis is decisive for the assignment of the principal and minor axes X Y Z Y Z X Z X Y HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 75 il N rar amm Polar coordinates If the production drawing is dimensioned in Cartesian coordinates you also write the part program using Cartesian coordinates For parts containing circular arcs or angles it is often simpler to give the dimensions in polar coordinates While the Cartesian coordinates X Y and Z are three dimensional and can describe points in space polar coordinates are two dimensional and describe points in a plane Polar coordinates have their datum at a circle center CC or pole A position in a plane can be clearly defined by the E Polar Radius the distance from the circle center CC to the position and the E Polar Angle the value of the angle between the reference axis and the line that connects the circle center CC with the position Setting the pole and the angle reference axis The pole is set by entering two Cartesian coordinates in one of the three planes These coordinates also set the reference axis for the polar angle PA X Y X Y Z R7 Z X 4Z 76 Absolute and incremental workpiece positions Absolute workpiece positions Absolute coordinates are position coordinates that are referenced to the datum of the coordinate system origin
193. e center coordinates at a setup clearance of 5 mm above the workpiece surface Then drill the hole with Cycle 200 DRILLING 3 1 Programming and Executing Simple Mach Straight line function L see Straight line L on page 159 DRILLING cycle see DRILLING Cycle 200 on page 227 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Call tool tool axis Z Spindle speed 1860 rom Retract tool F MAX rapid traverse Move the tool at F MAX to a position above the hole Spindle on Define DRILLING cycle Set up clearance of the tool above the hole Total hole depth algebraic sign working direction Feed rate for drilling Depth of each plunge before retraction Dwell time after every retraction in seconds Coordinate of the workpiece surface Set up clearance of the tool above the hole Dwell time in seconds at the hole bottom Call DRILLING cycle Retract the tool End of program 69 erations e amp ining m e O a ining 3 1 Programming and Executing Simple Mach Example 2 Correcting workpiece misalignment on machines with rotary tables Use the 3 D touch probe to rotate the coordinate system Touch probe function software option See Touch Probe Cycles in the Manual and Electronic Handwheel Operating Modes section Compensating workpiece misalignment in the Touch Probe Cycles User s Manual Write down the rotation angle and cancel the basic rotation a Select operating mode Positio
194. e error log file and the most recent entry is at the end HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 115 il 4 9 ae Messages Keystroke log The TNC stores keystrokes and important events e g system startup in a keystroke log The capacity of the keystroke log is limited If the keystroke log is full the control switches to a second keystroke log If this second file becomes full the first keystroke log Is cleared and written to again and so on To view the keystroke history switch between CURRENT FILE and PREVIOUS FILE Press the LOG FILES soft key LOG FILES aa To open the keystroke log Tile press the KEYSTROKE Los LOG FILE soft key If you need the previous log file press the PREVIOUS FILE soft key TERETI If you need the current log file press the CURRENT jae FILE soft key The TNC saves each key pressed during operation in a keystroke log The oldest entry is at the beginning and the most recent entry is at the end of the file PREVIOUS FILE Overview of the buttons and soft keys for viewing the log files Go to beginning of log file BEGIN ha Go to end of log file END Current log file CURRENT ELLE Previous log file PREVIOUS FILE Up down one line Return to main menu 116 Informational texts After a faulty operation such as pressing a key without function or entering a value outside of the valid range the TNC displays a green text in the header informing you that the operatio
195. e following Program defaults for cylindrical surface machining cycles see page 315 This cycle enables you to program a ridge in two dimensions and then transfer it onto a cylindrical surface With this cycle the TNC adjusts the tool so that with radius compensation active the walls of the slot are always parallel Program the midpoint path of the ridge together with the tool radius compensation With the radius compensation you specify whether the TNC cuts the ridge with climb milling or up cut milling At the ends of the ridge the TNC always adds a semicircle whose radius is half the ridge width 1 The TNC positions the tool over the starting point of machining The TNC calculates the starting point from the ridge width and the tool diameter It is located next to the first point defined in the contour subprogram offset by half the ridge width and the tool diameter The radius compensation determines whether machining begins from the left 1 RL climb milling or the right of the ridge 2 RR up cut milling 2 After the TNC has positioned to the first plunging depth the tool moves on a circular arc at the milling feed rate Q12 tangentially to the ridge wall If so programmed it will leave metal for the finishing allowance 3 At the first plunging depth the tool mills along the programmed ridge wall at the milling feed rate Q12 until the stud is completed 4 The tool then departs the ridge wall on a tangential path and ret
196. e from the datum in one of these directions A position in a plane is thus described through two coordinates and a position in space through three coordinates Coordinates that are referenced to the datum are referred to as absolute coordinates Relative coordinates are referenced to any other known position reference point you define within the coordinate system Relative coordinate values are also referred to as Incremental coordinate values 74 lt Reference system on milling machines When using a milling machine you orient tool movements to the Cartesian coordinate system The illustration at right shows how the Cartesian coordinate system describes the machine axes The figure illustrates the right hand rule for remembering the three axis directions the middle finger points in the positive direction of the tool axis from the workpiece toward the tool the Z axis the thumb points in the positive X direction and the index finger in the positive Y direction aL er As an option the TNC 620 can control up to 5 axes The axes U V and W which are not presently supported by the TNC 620 are secondary linear axes parallel to the main axes X Y and Z respectively Rotary axes are designated as A B and C The illustration at lower right shows the assignment of secondary axes and rotary axes to the main axes 4 1 Designation of the axes on milling machines The X Y and Z axes on your milling machin
197. e in the same sequence in the NC block Always indicate all of the coordinates and all of the surface normal vectors in an LN block even if the values have not changed from the previous block TX TY and TZ must always be defined with numerical values You cannot use O parameters Always calculate and output normal vectors to seven decimal places in order to avoid drops in the feed rate during machining 3 D compensation with surface normal vectors is only effective for coordinates in the main axes X Y Z If you Insert a tool with oversize positive delta value the TNC outputs an error message You can suppress the error message with the M function M107 The TNC will not display an error message if an entered tool oversize would cause damage to the contour MP7680 defines whether the CAM system has calculated the tool length compensation from the center of sphere Py or the south pole of the sphere Psp see figure 5 4 Three Dimensional Tool Compensation S HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 139 il are Option 2 5 4 Three Dimensional Tool Compensation So Permissible tool forms You can describe the permissible tool shapes in the tool table via tool radius R and R2 see figure Tool radius R Distance from the tool center to the tool circumference Tool radius 2 R2 Radius of the curvature between tool tip and tool circumference The ratio of R to R2 determines the shape of the tool R2 O End mill R2 R Radius
198. e machine tool builder can also define an additional machine based position as a reference point For each axis the machine tool builder defines the distance between the machine datum and this additional machine datum Refer to the machine manual for more information If you want the coordinates in a positioning block to be based on the additional machine datum end the block with M92 E Radius compensation remains the same in blocks that are programmed with M91 or M92 The tool length however is not compensated Effect M91 and M92 are effective only in the blocks in which they are programmed M91 and M92 take effect at the start of block Workpiece datum If you want the coordinates to always be referenced to the machine datum you can inhibit datum setting for one or more axes If datum setting is inhibited for all axes the TNC no longer displays the SET DATUM soft key in the Manual Operation mode The figure shows coordinate systems with the machine datum and workpiece datum M91 M92 in the Test Run mode In order to be able to graphically simulate M91 M92 movements you need to activate working space monitoring and display the workpiece blank referenced to the set datum see Show the Workpiece in the Working Space Advanced Graphic Features Software Option page 463 200 Moving to positions in a non tilted coordinate system with a tilted working plane M130 Standard behavior with a til
199. e range from a string parameter O Select Q parameter functions Select the STRING FORMULA function Enter the number of the string parameter in which the TNC is to save the copied string Confirm with the ENT key Select the function for cutting out a substring Enter the number of the QS parameter from which the substring is to be copied Confirm with the ENT key Enter the number of the place starting from which to copy the substring and confirm with the ENT key Enter the number of characters to be copied and confirm with the ENT key Close the parenthetical expression with the ENT key and confirm your entry with the END key CS Remember that the first character of a text sequence starts internally with the zeroth place Example A four character substring LEN4 is read from the string parameter QS10 beginning with the third character BEG2 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 10 11 String Parameters K il 10 11 String Parameters Converting a string parameter to a numerical value The TONUMB function converts a string parameter to a numerical value The value to be converted should be only numerical CS The OS parameter must contain only one numerical value Otherwise the TNC will output an error message Select O parameter functions Select the FORMULA function Enter the number of the string parameter in which the TNC is to save the numerical value Confirm with the ENT key Shift the soft key row FORMULA
200. e solid angle Unfinished If not finished return to LBL 1 Reset the rotation Reset the datum shift End of subprogram 451 10 13 Programming Examples Program sequence This program requires an end mill E The contour of the sphere is approximated by many short lines in the Z X plane defined in 014 The smaller you define the angle increment the smoother the curve becomes You can determine the number of contour cuts through the angle increment in the plane defined in Q18 E The tool moves upward in three dimensional cuts The tool radius is compensated automatically m 10 13 Programming Examples A 52 Center in X axis Center in Y axis Starting angle in space Z X plane End angle in space Z X plane Angle increment in space Radius of the sphere Starting angle of rotational position in the X Y plane End angle of rotational position in the X Y plane Angle increment in the X Y plane for roughing Allowance in sphere radius for roughing Set up clearance for pre positioning in the tool axis Feed rate for milling Definition of workpiece blank Tool call Retract the tool Call machining operation Reset allowance Angle increment in the X Y plane for finishing Call machining operation Retract in the tool axis end program Subprogram 10 Machining operation Calculate Z coordinate for pre positioning Copy starting angle in space Z X plane
201. e spindle No spindle status defined Q110 1 M03 Spindle ON clockwise O110 0 M04 Spindle ON counterclockwise Q110 1 M05 after M03 Q110 2 M05 after M04 OVO 3 Coolant on off Q111 M08 Coolant ON O111 1 M09 Coolant OFF 0111 0 Overlap factor Q112 The overlap factor for pocket milling parameter pocketOverlap is assigned to Q112 Unit of measurement for dimensions in the program Q113 During nesting the PGM CALL the value of the parameter 0113 depends on the dimensional data of the program from which the other programs are called Metric system mm 0113 0 Inch system inches olis 1 Tool length Q114 The current value for the tool length is assigned to Q114 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 m Preassigned Q Parameters i il E 12 Preassigned O Parameters Coordinates after probing during program run The parameters Q115 to Q119 contain the coordinates of the spindle position at the moment of contact during programmed measurement with the 3 D touch probe The coordinates refer to the datum point that is active in the Manual operating mode The length of the stylus and the radius of the ball tio are not compensated in these coordinates X axis Q115 Y axis Q116 Z axis Q117 4th Axis Q118 Machine dependent 5th axis Q119 Machine dependent 444 Deviation between actual value and nominal value during automatic tool measurement with the TT 130 Tool length Q115 Tool radius Q116 Tilting the
202. e surface 2nd set up clearance Q204 incremental value Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece clamping devices can occur gt Feed rate for plunging Q206 Traversing speed of the tool during drilling in mm min gt Feed rate for milling Q207 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min while milling m x D 3 p D Z O T e zA A HELICAL THREAD DRILLING AND MILLING Cycle 265 Advanced programming features software option 1 The TNC positions the tool in the spindle axis at rapid traverse FMAX to the programmed set up clearance above the workpiece surface Countersinking at front 2 f countersinking is before thread milling the tool moves at the feed rate for countersinking to the sinking depth at front If countersinking is after thread milling the tool moves at the feed rate for pre positioning to the countersinking depth 3 The TNC positions the tool without compensation from the center on a semicircle to the offset at front and then follows a circular path at the feed rate for countersinking 4 The tool then moves ina semicircle to the hole center Thread milling 5 The tool moves at the programmed feed rate for pre positioning to the starting plane for the thread 6 The tool then approaches the thread diameter tangentially in a helical movement 7 The tool moves on a continuous helical downward path until it reaches t
203. e tool approaches the starting point for the next machining operation in the negative reference axis direction 7 This process 6 is repeated until all machining operations in the second line have been executed 8 The tool then moves to the starting point of the next line 9 All subsequent lines are processed in a reciprocating movement 296 221 Starting point 1st axis Q225 absolute value Coordinate of the starting point in the reference axis of the working plane gt Starting point 2nd axis Q226 absolute value Coordinate of the starting point in the minor axis of the working plane gt Spacing in 1st axis Q237 incremental value Spacing between each point on a line gt Spacing in 2nd axis 0238 incremental value Spacing between each line gt Number of columns 0242 Number of machining operations on a line Number of lines Q243 Number of passes gt Rotational position Q224 absolute value Angle by which the entire pattern is rotated The center of rotation lies in the starting point gt Set up clearance Q200 incremental value Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface gt Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute value Coordinate of the workpiece surface gt 2nd set up clearance Q204 incremental value Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece clamping devices can Occur Moving to clearance height 0301 Definition of ho
204. e transformed tool axis changes in relation to the machine based coordinate system Thus if you rotate the swivel head of your machine and therefore the tool in the B axis by 90 for example the coordinate system rotates also If you press the Z axis direction button in the Manual Operation mode the tool moves In X direction of the machine based coordinate system In calculating the transformed coordinate system the TNC considers both the mechanically influenced offsets of the particular swivel head the so called translational components and offsets caused by tilting of the tool 3 D tool length compensation 2 5 Tilting the Working Plane Software Opti HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 63 il 2 5 Tilting the Working Plane Software opii 1 Traversing the reference points in tilted axes The TNC automatically activates the tilted working plane if this function was enabled when the control was switched off Then the TNC moves the axes in the tilted coordinate system when an axis direction key is pressed Position the tool in such a way that a collision is excluded during the subsequent crossing of the reference points To cross the reference points you have to deactivate the Tilt Working Plane function Position display in a tilted system The positions displayed in the status window ACTL and NOML are referenced to the tilted coordinate system Limitations on working with the tilting function PLC positioning determined b
205. e value in the TOOL CALL block of the part program A negative delta value describes a tool undersize DL DR DR2 lt 0 An undersize is entered in the tool table for wear Delta values are usually entered as numerical values In a TOOL CALL block you can also assign the values to Q parameters Inout range You can enter a delta value with up to 99 999 mm CS Delta values from the tool table influence the graphical representation of the tool The representation of the workpiece remains the same in the simulation Delta values from the TOOL CALL block change the represented size of the workpiece during the simulation The simulated tool size remains the same Entering tool data into the program The number length and radius of a specific tool is defined in the TOOL DEF block of the part program To select tool definition press the TOOL DEF key aaa Tool number Each tool is uniquely identified by its tool Jer number Tool length Compensation value for the tool length Tool radius Compensation value for the tool radius CS In the programming dialog you can transfer the value for tool length and tool radius directly into the input line by pressing the desired axis soft key Example HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 5 2 Tool Data k il 5 2 Tool Data Entering tool data in the table You can define and store up to 9999 tools and their tool data in a tool table Also see the Editing Functions later in this Chapter In o
206. e0ge0g S9eeseeeseessesg 9gggggggsgsgge0qgqggggqgg a SB9eSesssssegaegqgggsgg0gg0gggsgsg0ggggggqg Status displays In the additional status display the TNC shows the values of the active datum shift see Coordinate transformation on page 41 DIAGNOSE END PAGE PAGE INSERT DELETE FIND LINE LINE 5 O O Q ae 00 26 2 BEGIN 348 DATUM SETTING Cycle 247 With the Cycle DATUM SETTING you can activate as the new datum a preset defined in a preset table Effect After a DATUM SETTING cycle definition all of the coordinate inputs and datum shifts absolute and incremental are referenced to the new preset 247 Number for datum Enter the number of the datum to aoe be activated from the preset table CS When activating a datum from the preset table the TNC resets the active datum shift If you activate preset number O line 0 then you activate the datum that you last set In a manual operating mode Cycle 247 is not functional in Test Run mode Status display In the additional status display POS DISP STATUS the TNC shows the active preset number behind the datum dialog HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Example NC blocks 8 7 coordi aa Transformation Cycles j il fe Transformation Cycles O O Q ae 00 MIRROR IMAGE Cycle 8 The TNC can machine the mirror image of a contour in the working plane Effect The mirror image cycle becomes effective as soon as It Is defined
207. earance above the workpiece surface and then moves the tool to the bore hole circumference on a rounded arc if enough space is available The tool mills in a helix from the current position to the first plunging depth at the programmed feed rate When the drilling depth is reached the TNC once again traverses a full circle to remove the material remaining after the initial plunge The TNC then positions the tool at the center of the hole again Finally the TNC returns to the set up clearance at FMAX If programmed the tool moves to the 2nd set up clearance at FMAX 208 gt Set up clearance Q200 incremental value Distance between tool lower edge and workpiece surface gt Depth Q201 incremental value Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of hole gt Feed rate for plunging Q206 Traversing speed of the tool during helical drilling in mm min gt Infeed per helix 0334 incremental value Depth of the tool plunge with each helix 360 CS Note that if the infeed distance is too large the tool or the workpiece may be damaged To prevent the inteeds from being too large enter the maximum plunge angle of the tool in the ANGLE column of the tool table see Tool Data page 122 The TNC then automatically calculates the max infeed permitted and changes your entered value accordingly gt Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute value Coordinate of the workpiece surface gt 2nd set up
208. eater than go to label number If less than go to label number Angle from c sinaandc cosa Error number Print Assignment PLC HEIDENHAIN DR JOHANNES HEIDENHAIN GmbH Dr Johannes Heidenhain Strafge 5 83301 Traunreut Germany 49 8669 31 0 49 8669 5061 E Mail info heidenhain de Technical support 49 8669 32 1000 Measuring systems 49 8669 31 3104 E Mail service ms support heidenhain de TNC support gt 49 8669 31 3101 E Mail service nc support heidenhain de NC programming 49 8669 31 3103 E Mail service nc ogm heidenhain de PLC programming amp 49 8669 31 3102 E Mail service plc heidenhain de Lathe controls lt gt 49 8669 31 3105 E Mail service lathe support heidenhain de www heidenhain de 3 D Touch Probe Systems from HEIDENHAIN help you to reduce non cutting time For example in e workpiece alignment e datum setting e workpiece measurement e digitizing 3 D surfaces with the workpiece touch probes TS 220 with cable TS 640 with infrared transmission e tool measurement e wear monitoring e tool breakage monitoring with the tool touch probe TT 140 i me n 8360 ADOITO 636 026 20 SW01 3 9 2008 F amp W Printed in Germany Subject to change without notice
209. ectors and tool N orientation amm hand 6 fab LN Straight line with 3 D compensation oS X Y Z Compensated coordinates of the straight line end point NX NY NZ Components of the surface normal vector TX TY TZ Components of the normalized vector for workpiece orientation F Feed rate M Miscellaneous function The feed rate F and miscellaneous function M can be entered and changed in the Programming and Editing mode of operation The coordinates of the straight line end point and the components of the surface normal vectors are to be defined by the CAM system Peripheral milling 3 D radius compensation with workpiece orientation The TNC displaces the tool perpendicular to the direction of movement and perpendicular to the tool direction by the sum of the delta values DR tool table and TOOL CALL Determine the compensation direction with radius compensation RL RR see figure traverse direction Y For the TNC to be able to reach the set tool orientation you need to activate the function M128 see Position der Werkzeugspitze beim Positionieren von Schwenkachsen beibehalten TCPM M128 Software Option 2 on page 308 The TNC then positions the rotary axes automatically so that the tool can reach the defined orientation with the active compensation This function is possible only on machines for which you a can define spatial angles for the tilting axis configuration Refer to your machine manual Th
210. ed If not finished return to LBL 1 Reset the rotation Reset the datum shift Move to set up clearance End of subprogram 10 13 Programming Examples i i nn 10 13 Programming Examples A Program sequence E Program functions only with a spherical cutter The tool length refers to the sphere center The contour of the cylinder is approximated by many short line segments defined in Q13 The more line segments you define the smoother the curve becomes E The cylinder is milled in longitudinal cuts here parallel to the Y axis E The machining direction can be altered by changing the entries for the starting and end angles in space Clockwise machining direction starting angle gt end angle Counterclockwise machining direction starting angle lt end angle The tool radius is compensated automatically Center in X axis Center in Y axis Center in Z axis Starting angle in space Z X plane End angle in space Z X plane Cylinder radius Length of the cylinder Rotational position in the X Y plane Allowance for cylinder radius Feed rate for plunging Feed rate for milling Number of cuts Definition of workpiece blank Tool call Retract the tool Call machining operation Reset allowance Call machining operation 50 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 L Z 100
211. el Tool changers TCH T Datums D 5 Presets PR Touch probes F e Backup files BAK Texts as ASCII files A rc Log files TXT ee LL When you write a part program on the TNC you must first enter a file N name The TNC saves the program as a file with the same name The q TNC can also save texts and tables as files The TNC provides a special file management window in which you can easily find and manage your files Here you can call copy rename and erase files With the TNC you can manage and save files up to a total size of 300 MB E Depending on the setting the TNC generates a backup file bak after editing and saving of NC programs This can reduce the memory space available to you HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 79 il a er c b 4 2 File Management File names When you store programs tables and texts as files the TNC adds an extension to the Tile name separated by a point This extension indicates the Tile type Poco File name File type File names should not exceed 25 characters otherwise the TNC cannot display the entire file name The following characters are not permitted in file names I lt gt 3 CS The space HEX 20 and delete HEX 7F characters are not permitted in file names either The maximum limit for the path and file name together is 256 characters see Paths on page 82 80 Screen keypad You can enter letters and special
212. enabled by the machine tool 4 builder The TNC retracts the tool in the direction of the tool axis if in the LIFTOFF column of the tool table you set the parameter Y for the active tool see Tool table Standard tool data on page 124 Remember that especially on curved surfaces the uid surface can be damaged during return to the contour Back the tool off before returning to the contour In the CfgLiftOff machine parameter define the value by which the tool is to be retracted In the CfgLiftOff machine parameter you can also switch off the function Effect M148 remains in effect until deactivated with M149 M148 becomes effective at the start of block M149 at the end of block HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 d a gt E aa O So Oo ad Q 74 Miscellaneous Functions 7 5 Miscellaneous elfittions for Rotary Axes 7 5 Miscellaneous Functions for Rotary Axes Feed rate in mm min on rotary axes A B C M116 software option 1 Standard behavior The TNC interprets the programmed feed rate in a rotary axis in degrees per minute The contouring feed rate therefore depends on the distance from the tool center to the center of the rotary axis The larger this distance becomes the greater the contouring feed rate Feed rate in mm min on rotary axes with M116 The machine manufacturer must enter the machine a geometry Your machine manual provides more detailed information M116 works o
213. enter the block number of the contour element on which the data are based T O me Q O om oO The block number of the contour element on which the relative data are based can only be located up to 64 positioning blocks before the block in which you program the reference If you delete a block on which relative data are based the TNC will display an error message Change the program first before you delete the block Data relative to block N End point coordinates 6 6 Path Contours FK Free Contour Programmi Cartesian Coordinates relative to block N Rx Nee RY New Polar coordinates relative to block N era eit Example NC blocks HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 187 il 3 O a O hom N m Oo 6 6 Path Contours FK Free Contour Programmi Data relative to block N Direction and distance of the contour element Angle between a straight line and another element or between the entry tangent of the arc and another element Straight line parallel to another contour element par A Distance from a straight line to a parallel contour a x lt D 2 e9 Z O O O O 7N O Data relative to block N Circle center CC Cartesian coordinates of the circle center relative to block N Polar coordinates of the circle center relative to block N Example NC blocks 88 T O me Q O om oO HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 De
214. entry of the MOD code number mee NET123 Deletes an existing network connection Selectable DELETE only after entry of the MOD code number NET123 ee HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 491 Configuring the control s network address Connect the TNC port X26 with a network or a PC Cine Programming In the file manager PGM MGT select the Network soft key ae al Shar E ERT g Press the MOD key Then enter the keyword NET123 o Pe aaa a a Press the CONFIGURE NETWORK soft key to enter the network setting screens D PE for a specific device see figure at center right E D Hostname simulator Pab It opens the dialog window for the network configuration DHCP No x a IP address 160 1 247 208 4 L a Subnet mask zss z5slo e 5 Setting Meaning S aes aa io HOSTNAME Name under which the control logs onto the CANCEL AT network If you use a host name server you must enter the Fully Qualified Hostname DIAGNOSE cO here If you do not enter a name here the i N control uses the so called null authentication o SE RTE OK CANCEL FIELD FIELD DHCP DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol In the drop down menu set YES Then the control automatically draws its network address IP address subnet mask default router and any broadcast address from a DHCP server in the network The DHCP server identifies the control by its hostname Your company network must be specially prepared for this functi
215. er the file type after the program name You can also call a program with CYCLE 12 PGM CALL As a rule Q parameters are effective globally with a PGM CALL So please note that changes to Q parameters in the called program can also influence the calling program HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 BEGIN PGM A CALL PGM B 9 4 a i Program as Subprogram o il 9 5 Nesting Te 01 lt V af Q Types of nesting E Subprograms within a subprogram Program section repeats within a program section repeat Subprograms repeated Program section repeats within a subprogram program sections or subprograms can call further program sections or subprograms Maximum nesting depth for subprograms approx 64 000 E Maximum nesting depth for main program calls The nesting depth is limited only by the available working memory E You can nest program section repeats as often as desired Subprogram within a subprogram m x D 3 pi D lt O ex e z A W 74 Call the subprogram marked with LBL SP1 Last program block of the main program with M2 Beginning of subprogram SP1 Call the subprogram marked with LBL 2 End of subprogram 1 Beginning of subprogram 2 End of subprogram 2 Program execution 1 Main program SUBPGMS is executed up to block 17 2 Subprogram 1 is called and executed up to block 39 3 Subprogram 2 is called and executed up to bloc
216. ers HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 503 il 13 1 Machine Specific User Parameters ChannelSettings CH_NC Active kinematics Kinematic to be activated List of machine kinematics Geometry tolerances Permissible deviation from the radius 0 0001 to 0 016 mm Permissible deviation of the radius at the circle end point compared with the circle start point Configuration of the fixed cycles Overlap factor for pocket milling 0 001 to 1 414 Overlap factor for Cycle 4 POCKET MILLING and Cycle 5 CIRCULAR POCKET MILLING Display the Spindle error message If M3 M4 is not active On Issue error message Off No error message Display the Enter a negative depth error message On Issue error message Off No error message Behavior when moving to wall of slot in the cylinder surface LineNormal Approach on a straight line CircleTangential Approach on a circular path M function for spindle orientation 1 Spindle orientation directly by the NC 0 Function inactive 1 to 999 Number of the M function for spindle orientation Geometry filter for culling linear elements Type of stretch filter Off No filter active ShortCut Omit individual points on a polygon Average The geometry filter smoothes corners Maximum distance of the filtered to the unfiltered contour 0 to 10 mm The filtered points lie within this tolerance to the resulting new path Maximum length of the path as a result of filtering 0 to 1000 mm Length over which geometry filtering is active
217. es 6 5 Path Contours 2 oa OQ O D n 6 6 Path Contours FK Free Contour Programmi 6 6 Path Contours FK Free Contour Programming Software Option Fundamentals Workpiece drawings that are not dimensioned for NC often contain unconventional coordinate data that cannot be entered with the gray path function keys You may for example have only the following data on a specific contour element Known coordinates on the contour element or in its proximity Coordinate data that are referenced to another contour element Directional data and data regarding the course of the contour You can enter such dimensional data directly by using the FK free contour programming function Advanced programming features software option The TNC derives the contour from the known coordinate data and supports the programming dialog with the interactive programming graphics The figure at upper right shows a workpiece drawing for which FK programming is the most convenient programming method 178 E The following prerequisites for FK programming must be observed The FK free contour programming feature can only be used for programming contour elements that lie in the working plane The working plane is defined in the first BLK FORM block of the part program You must enter all available data for every contour element Even the data that does not change must be entered in every block otherwise it will not be recogni
218. es Context sensitive help function for error messages Graphic support for the programming of cycles Comment blocks in the NC program Actual positions can be transferred directly into the NC program Graphic simulation before a program run even while another program is being run Plan view projection in 3 planes 3 D view Magnification of details In the Programming mode the contour of the NC blocks is drawn on screen while they are being entered 2 D pencil trace graphics even while another program is running Graphic simulation of real time machining in plan view projection in 3 planes 3 D view Calculating the machining time in the Test Run mode of operation Display of the current machining time in the Program Run modes 509 13 3 Technical Information Returning to the contour Mid program startup in any block in the program returning the tool to the calculated nominal position to continue machining Program interruption contour departure and return Datum tables Multiple datum tables for storing workpiece related datums Touch probe cycles Touch probe calibration Compensation of workpiece misalignment manual or automatic Datum setting manual or automatic Automatic workpiece measurement Cycles for automatic tool measurement Specifications Components Main computer with TNC keyboard and integrated 15 1 inch TFT color flat panel display with soft keys 13 3 Technical Information Program memory 300 MB on CFR compact f
219. es of path contours as they are dimensioned in the workpiece drawing To allow the TNC to calculate the tool center path i e the tool compensation you must also enter the length and radius of each tool you are using Tool data can be entered either directly in the part program with TOOL DEF or separately in a tool table In a tool table you can also enter additional data for the specific tool The TNC will consider all the data entered for the tool when executing the part program Tool numbers and tool names Each tool is identified by a number between 0 and 9999 If you are working with tool tables you can use higher numbers and you can also enter a tool name for each tool Tool names can have up to 16 characters The tool number O is automatically defined as the zero tool with the length L 0 and the radius R 0 In tool tables tool TO should also be defined with L 0 and R 0 Tool length L You should always enter the tool length L as an absolute value based on the tool reference point The entire tool length is essential for the TNC in order to perform numerous functions Involving multi axis machining 122 ES L1 E Tool radius R You can enter the tool radius R directly Delta values for lengths and radii Delta values are offsets in the length and radius of a tool A positive delta value describes a tool oversize DL DR DR2 gt 0 If you are programming the machining data with an allowance enter the oversiz
220. es you to transfer the current tool position into the program for example during Positioning block programming and Cycle programming To transfer the correct position values proceed as follows Place the input box at the position in the block where you want to insert a position value Select the actual position capture function In the soft key row the TNC displays the axes whose positions can be transferred Select the axis The TNC writes the current position of the selected axis into the active input box In the working plane the TNC always captures the coordinates of the tool center even though tool radius compensation is active i ES In the tool axis the TNC always captures the coordinates of the tool tip and thus always takes the active tool length compensation into account The actual position capture function is not allowed if the tilted working plane function is active Editing a program in a machine operating mode The TNC allows you to edit the program but it does not save the changes and responds instead with an error message If you wish you can save changes under another file name att You cannot save a program while it is being run by the TNC While you are creating or editing a part program you can select any desired line in the program or individual words in a block with the arrow keys or the soft keys Go to previous page PA 0 E Go to next page v D Qo m Go to beginning of progra
221. et up clearance at FMAX 6 The TNC stops the spindle turning at set up clearance CS Before programming note the following Program a positioning block for the starting point hole center in the working plane with radius compensation RO The algebraic sign for the parameter thread depth determines the working direction The TNC calculates the feed rate from the spindle speed If the spindle speed override is used during tapping the teed rate is automatically adjusted The feed rate override knob is disabled At the end of the cycle the spindle comes to a stop Before the next operation restart the spindle with M3 or M4 246 Use the machine parameter displayDepthErr to define uy whether if a positive depth is entered the TNC should output an error message on or not off Danger of collision Keep in mind that the TNC reverses the calculation for pre positioning when a positive depth is entered his means that the tool moves at rapid traverse in the tool axis at safety clearance below the workpiece surface 208 RT Set up clearance Q200 incremental value Distance between tool tip at starting position and workpiece Fe IER t 7p a surface p YY NNI N ye RAY Thread depth 0201 incremental value Distance between workpiece surface and end of thread Pitch O239 Pitch of the thread The algebraic sign differentiates between right hand and left hand threads right hand thread
222. f there is not enough room the TNC moves the tool to depth vertically The tool then clears the finishing allowance remaining from rough out 23 gt Feed rate for plunging Q11 Traversing speed of the Cafe tool during penetration gt Feed rate for milling O12 Traversing speed for milling gt Retraction feed rate Q208 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min when retracting after machining If you enter Q208 0 the TNC retracts the tool at the teed rate in Q12 Input range 0 to 99999 9999 alternatively HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Example NC blocks 8 5 SL Cycles i i SIDE FINISHING Cycle 24 Advanced programming features software option The subcontours are approached and departed on a tangential arc Each subcontour is finish milled separately CS Before programming note the following The sum of allowance for side 014 and the radius of the finish mill must be smaller than the sum of allowance for side Q3 Cycle 20 and the radius of the rough mill 8 5 SL Cycles This calculation also holds if you run Cycle 24 without having roughed out with Cycle 22 in this case enter O for the radius of the rough mill The TNC automatically calculates the starting point for finishing The starting point depends on the available space in the pocket and the allowance programmed in Cycle 20 24 gt Direction of rotation Clockwise 1 O9 E t Machining direction 1 Counterclockwise 1 Clockwise gt
223. fective radius Measure a basic rotation using a line Set the reference point in any axis Set a corner as datum Set a center line as datum Set a circle center as datum Measure a basic rotation using two holes cylindrical studs Set the datum using four holes cylindrical studs Set circle center using three holes cylindrical studs 532 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 X X XI XI X XI X X XJ X Comparison Touch probe cycles for automatic workpiece inspection O Reference plane 1 Polar datum 2 Calibrate TS 3 Measuring 9 Calibrate TS length 30 Calibrate TT 31 Measure tool length 32 Measure tool radius 33 Measure tool length and radius 400 401 402 403 404 405 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 Basic rotation Basic rotation from two holes Basic rotation from two studs Compensate a basic rotation via a rotary axis Set basic rotation Compensating workpiece misalignment by rotating the C axis Slot center datum Ridge center datum Datum from inside of rectangle Datum from outside of rectangle Datum from inside of circle Datum from outside of circle Datum in outside corner Datum at inside corner Datum circle center Datum in touch probe axis Datum at center of 4 holes Datum in one axis HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 Optio
224. ffect The TNC will then overwrite the angle values entered in the menu with the values from Cycle 19 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 65 il Positioning with Manual Data Input MDI e O a ining 3 1 Programming and Executing Simple Mach 3 1 Programming and Executing Simple Machining Operations The Positioning with Manual Data Input mode of operation is particularly convenient for simple machining operations or pre positioning of the tool You can write a short program in HEIDENHAIN conversational programming and execute It Immediately You can also call TNC cycles The program is stored in the file MDI In the Positioning with MDI mode of operation the additional status displays can also be activated Positioning with Manual Data Input MDI Select the Positioning with MDI mode of operation Program the file MDI as you wish O To start program run press the machine START key Constraints The following functions are not available in the MDI mode FK free contour programming Program section repeats Subprogramming Path compensation The programming graphics Program call PGM CALL The program run graphics 68 Example 1 A hole with a depth of 20 mm is to be drilled into a single workpiece After clamping and aligning the workpiece and setting the datum you can program and execute the drilling operation in a few lines First you pre position the tool in L blocks straight line blocks to the hol
225. finition of workpiece blank Tool call Retract the tool Pre position the tool Move to working depth Approach the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection FK contour section Program all known data for each contour element Depart the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection Retract in the tool axis end program 189 6 6 Path Contours FK Free Contour Programmi m 3 O re O hom N m Oo 6 6 Path Contours FK Free Contour Programmi 90 Definition of workpiece blank Tool call Retract the tool Pre position the tool Pre position the tool in the tool axis Move to working depth HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Approach the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection FK contour section Program all known data for each contour element Depart the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection Retract in the tool axis end program O J O b as Oo 6 6 Path Contours FK Free Contour Programmi j i 3 O re O hom N m Oo 6 6 Path Contours FK Free Contour Programmi 1 92 Definition of workpiece blank Tool call Retract the tool Pre position the tool Move to working depth HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Approach the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection FK contour section Program all known data for each contour element Depart the contour on a circular arc with ta
226. from the PC to the TNC select the file in the PC window with a mouse click and drag and drop the highlighted file into the TNC window 2 If you want to control data transfer from the TNC establish the connection with your PC in the following manner Select lt Extras gt lt I NCserver gt TNCremoNT is now in server mode It can receive data from the TNC and send data to the TNC You can now call the file management functions on the TNC by pressing the PGM MGT key see Data transfer to or from an external data medium on page 91 and transfer the desired files End TNCremoNT Select the menu items lt File gt lt Exit gt CS Refer also to the TNCremoNT context sensitive help texts where all of the functions are explained in more detail The help texts must be called with the F1 key HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 TNCremoNT Datei Ansicht Extras Hilfe lolx Name G e Attribute Daum sd OZTCHPANT A AH 813 CAY1E H 1 379 E 1F H 360 04 03 97 11 34 06 04 03 97 11 34 08 02 09 97 14 51 30 02 09 97 14 51 30 02 09 97 14 51 30 02 09 97 14 51 30 EA 200 H 1596 E 201 H 1004 E 202 H 1892 F 203 H 2 2340 E 210 H 3974 A 211 H 3604 4 212 H 3352 naa 704 06 04 99 15 39 42 06 04 99 15 39 44 06 04 99 15 39 44 06 04 99 15 39 46 06 04 99 15 39 46 06 04 99 15 39 40 06 04 99 15 39 40 ne 14 0040 90 47 m Steuerung TNC 400 Maskiert Dateistatus Frei 899 MByte Insges
227. ft keys In the footer the TNC indicates additional functions in a soft key row You can select these functions by pressing the keys immediately below them The lines immediately above the soft key row indicate the number of soft key rows that can be called with the black arrow keys to the right and left The active soft key row Is indicated by brightened bar Soft key selection keys Shift between soft key rows Selecting the screen layout Shift key for switchover between machining and programming modes Soft key selection keys for machine tool builders Switches soft key rows for machine tool builders USB connection HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Ko HEIDENHAIN Manual operation 003 000 500 000 Ona ain Our 111x nS s e u 0 S IST 10 19 138 S OVR 1 2 Visual Display Unit and Kevybo ig 1 2 Visual Display Unit and Keyboarc Sets the screen layout You select the screen layout yourself In the programming mode of operation for example you can have the TNC show program blocks in the left window while the right window displays programming graphics You could also display status information in the right window instead of the graphics or display only program blocks in one large window The available screen windows depend on the selected operating mode To change the screen layout Press the SPLIT SCREEN key The soft key row o7 shows the available layout options see Operating Modes page 34
228. function Sometimes machine specific cycles also use transfer parameters that HEIDENHAIN already used in the standard cycles The TNC executes DEF active cycles as soon as they are defined See also Calling cycles on page 221 It executes CALL active cycles only after they have been called See also Calling cycles on page 221 When DEF active cycles and CALL active cycles are used simultaneously it is important to prevent overwriting of transfer parameters already in use Use the following procedure As a rule always program DEF active cycles before CALL active cycles If you do want to program a DEF active cycle between the definition and call of a CALL active cycle do it only if there is no common use of specific transfer parameters 218 Defining a cycle using soft keys cYCL The soft key row shows the available groups of PER cycles DRILLING Press the soft key for the desired group of cycles for TREA example DRILLING for the drilling cycles 282 Select the cycle for example THREAD MILLING The 22 TNC initiates a dialog and asks for all input values At the same time a graphic of the input parameters is displayed in the right screen window The parameter that is asked for in the dialog prompt is highlighted i OB Enter all parameters requested by the TNC and conclude each entry with the ENT key The TNC ends the dialog when all required data has been entered Defining a
229. g and workpiece measurement The TS 220 transmits the triggering signals to the TNC via cable and may be a more economical alternative The TS 440 TS 444 TS 640 and TS 740 see figure at right feature infrared transmission of the triggering signal This makes them highly convenient for use on machines with automatic tool changers Principle of operation HEIDENHAIN triggering touch probes feature a wear resistant optical switch that generates an electrical signal as soon as the stylus is deflected This signal is transmitted to the control which stores the current position of the stylus as an actual value 42 TT 140 tool touch probe for tool measurement The TT 140 is a triggering 3 D touch probe for tool measurement and inspection Your TNC provides three cycles for this touch probe with which you can measure the tool length and radius automatically either with the spindle rotating or stopped The TT 140 features a particularly rugged design and a high degree of protection which make it insensitive to coolants and swart The triggering signal is generated by a wear resistant and highly reliable optical switch HR electronic handwheels Electronic handwheels facilitate moving the axis slides precisely by hand A wide range of traverses per handwheel revolution is available Apart from the HR 130 and HR 150 integral handwheels HEIDENHAIN also offers the HR 410 portable handwheel HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 HEIDENHAIN 3 D Touch P
230. g depth Q202 incremental value Infeed per cut Enter a value greater than 0 gt Feed rate for milling Q207 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min while milling Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute value Coordinate of the workpiece surface ockets Studs and Slots gt 2nd set up clearance Q204 incremental value Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece clamping devices can occur Center in 1st axis Q216 absolute value Center of the pocket in the reference axis of the working plane Center in 2nd axis Q217 absolute value Center of the pocket in the minor axis of the working plane First side length Q218 incremental value Pocket length parallel to the reference axis of the working plane gt Second side length Q219 incremental value Pocket length parallel to the minor axis of the working plane Corner radius Q220 Radius of the pocket corner If you make no entry here the TNC assumes that the corner radius is equal to the tool radius gt Allowance in 1st axis 0221 incremental value Allowance for pre positioning in the reference axis of the working plane referenced to the length of the pocket al 3 3 z O T 8 8 3 Cycles for Milli HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 275 il 8 3 Cycles for a ockets Studs and Slots STUD FINISHING Cycle 213 Advanced programming features software option 1 The TNC moves the tool in the spindle axis
231. g the character 474 Erasing the character 474 11 8 Optional Program Run Interruption 475 Function 475 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 25 il 12 1 Selecting MOD Functions 478 Selecting the MOD functions 478 Changing the settings 478 Exiting the MOD functions 478 Overview of MOD functions 479 12 2 Software Numbers 480 Function 480 12 3 Position Display Types 481 Function 481 12 4 Unit of Measurement 482 Function 482 12 5 Displaying Operating Times 483 FUNCTION ssas 483 12 6 Entering Code Numbers 484 Function 484 12 7 Setting the Data Interfaces 485 Serial interface on the TNC 620 485 Function 485 Setting the RS 232 interface 485 Setting the baud rate baudRate 485 Set the protocol protocol 485 Set the data bits dataBits 486 Parity check parity 486 Setting the stop bits StopBits 486 Setting the handshake flowControl 486 Settings for data transfer with the TNCserver PC software 487 Setting the mode of the external device fileSystem 487 Software for data transfer 488 12 8 Ethernet Interface 490 Introduction 490 Connection possibilities 490 Connecting the control to the network 491 26 13 1 Machine Specific User Parameters 498 Function A98 13 2 Pin Layout and Connecting Cables for Data Interface
232. ge 353 Page 364 Page 365 Page 303 Page 355 Page 307 Page 308 Page 309 Page 311 Page 312 Page 354 Page 366 Page 227 Page 229 Page 231 Page 233 Page 235 Page 237 Page 242 Page 244 Page 240 i il 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 220 230 231 232 240 247 262 263 264 265 267 522 Tapping with chip breaking Slot with reciprocating plunge Circular slot Rectangular pocket finishing Rectangular stud finishing Circular pocket finishing Circular stud finishing Circular point pattern Linear point pattern Multipass milling Ruled surface Face milling Centering Datum setting Thread milling Thread milling countersinking Thread drilling milling Helical thread drilling milling Outside thread milling Page 246 Page 284 Page 287 Page 274 Page 2 6 Page 280 Page 282 Page 294 Page 296 Page 332 Page 334 Page 337 Page 225 Page 349 Page 251 Page 253 Page 257 Page 261 Page 265 Table of Miscellaneous Functions M00 M01 M02 M03 M04 M05 M06 M08 M09 M13 M14 M30 M89 M91 M92 M94 M97 M98 M99 M109 M110 M111 M116 M117 M118 M120 M126 M127 Stop program Spindle STOP Coolant OFF Optional program STOP STOP program run Spindle STOP Coolant OFF CLEAR status display depending on machine parameter Go to block 1 Spindle ON clockwise Spindle ON counterclockwise Spindle STOP Tool change STOP program run machine dependent function Spindle STOP Coolant ON Coolant
233. gn for the cycle parameter DEPTH determines the working direction If you program DEPTH 0 the cycle will not be executed After the cycle is completed the TNC restores the coolant and spindle conditions that were active before the cycle call Use the machine parameter displayDepthErr to define whether if a positive depth is entered the TNC should output an error message on or not off Danger of collision Keep in mind that the TNC reverses the calculation for pre positioning when a positive depth is entered his means that the tool moves at rapid traverse in the tool axis at safety clearance below the workpiece surface HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 8 2 Cycles for Drilling Tapping and Thread Milling gogy i il 8 2 Cycles for Drilling WM oinc and Thread Milling a 232 gt Set up clearance Q200 incremental value Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface gt Depth Q201 incremental value Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of hole gt Feed rate for plunging Q206 Traversing speed of the tool during boring in mm min gt Dwell time at depth 0211 Time in seconds that the tool remains at the hole bottom Retraction feed rate O208 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min when retracting from the hole If you enter Q208 OQ the tool retracts at feed rate for plunging gt Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute value Coordinate of the workpiece surface gt 2nd set up
234. grammed you can position it on the workpiece at various locations and in different sizes through the use of coordinate transformations The TNC provides the following coordinate transformation cycles 7 DATUM SHIFT 345 For shifting contours directly within the program or from datum tables 247 DATUM SETTING 247 349 Datum setting during program run wee 8 MIRROR IMAGE ae 350 Mirroring contours Go 10 ROTATION 10 352 For rotating contours in the working ha plane 11 SCALING FACTOR 11 353 For increasing or reducing the size of contours 26 AXIS SPECIFIC SCALING FACTOR 28 cc 354 For increasing or reducing the size of Sm contours with scaling factors for each axis 19 WORKING PLANE 355 Machining in tilted coordinate system on B machines with swivel heads and or rotary tables Effect of coordinate transformations Beginning of effect A coordinate transformation becomes effective as soon as it is defined it is not called It remains in effect until it is changed or canceled To cancel coordinate transformations Define cycles for basic behavior with a new value such as scaling factor 1 0 Execute the miscellaneous function M02 or M30 or an END PGM block depending on the clearMode machine parameter Select a new program 344 DATUM SHIFT Cycle 7 A DATUM SHIFT allows machining operations to be repeated at various locations on the workpiece Effect When the DATUM SHIFT cycle is defined all coordinate
235. h MDI mode of operation If M118 is active the MANUAL TRAVERSE function is not available after a program interruption You cannot use the function M118 if M128 is active 208 Retraction from the contour in the tool axis direction M140 Standard behavior In the program run modes the TNC moves the tool as defined in the part program Behavior with M140 With M140 MB move back you can enter a path in the direction of the tool axis for departure from the contour Input If you enter M140 in a positioning block the TNC continues the dialog and asks for the desired path of tool departure from the contour Enter the requested path that the tool should follow when departing the contour or press the MAX soft key to move to the limit of the traverse range In addition you can program the feed rate at which the tool traverses the entered path If you do not enter a feed rate the TNC moves the tool along the entered path at rapid traverse Effect M140 is effective only in the block in which it is programmed M140 becomes effective at the start of the block Example NC blocks Block 250 Retract the tool 50 mm from the contour Block 251 Move the tool to the limit of the traverse range CS With M140 MB MAX you can only retract in positive direction HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 d a gt E aa O So Oo ad Q 74 Miscellaneous Functions i il ontouring Behavior N oa
236. h a miscellaneous function M Proceed in the same way to enter a miscellaneous function M Feed rate F After entering a feed rate F you must confirm your entry with the OK key instead of the machine START button The following is valid for feed rate F If you enter F 0 then the lowest feed rate from the machine parameter minFeed is effective If the feed rate entered exceeds the value defined in the machine parameter maxFeed then the parameter value is effective F is not lost during a power interruption Changing the spindle speed and feed rate With the override knobs you can vary the spindle speed S and feed rate F trom 0 to 150 of the set value HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 2 3 Spindle Speed S Feed Rate F and Miscellaneous Functiage M be 2 4 Datum Setting Without a 3 D Touch Pro 2 4 Datum Setting Without a 3 D Touch Probe Note E For datum setting with a 3 D touch probe refer to the Touch Probe Cycles Manual You fix a datum by setting the TNC position display to the coordinates of a known position on the workpiece Preparation Clamp and align the workpiece Insert the zero tool with known radius into the spindle Ensure that the TNC is showing the actual position values 54 Datum setting with axis keys ath Fragile workpiece If the workpiece surface must not be scratched you can lay a metal shim of known thickness don it Then enter a tool axis datum value that is larger than the
237. h to execute a specific program section only under certain conditions you also define this machining sequence as a subprogram In addition you can have a part program call a separate program for execution Programming with subprograms and program section repeats is described in Chapter 9 Programming with Q parameters Instead of programming numerical values in a part program you enter markers called Q parameters You assign the values to the Q parameters separately with the Q parameter functions You can use the Q parameters for programming mathematical functions that control program execution or describe a contour Programming with O parameters is described in Chapter 10 146 6 2 Fundamentals of Path 2 Functions 2 pe S Programming tool movements for workpiece machining LL os You create a part program by programming the path functions for the re individual contour elements in sequence You usually do this by Y entering the coordinates of the end points of the contour X A elements given in the production drawing The TNC calculates the tj actual path of the tool from these coordinates and from the tool data and radius compensation The TNC moves all axes programmed in a single block simultaneously A Movement parallel to the machine axes The program block contains only one coordinate The TNC thus moves the tool parallel to the programmed axis Depending on the Individual machine tool
238. he PLC software managed by your machine tool builder 12 3 Position Display Types Function In the Manual Operation mode and in the Program Run modes of operation you can select the type of coordinates to be displayed The figure at right shows the different tool positions Starting position Target position of the tool Workpiece datum Machine datum The TNC position displays can show the following coordinates Nominal position the value presently NOML commanded by the TNC Actual position current tool position ACTL Reference position the actual position relative to REF ACTL the machine datum Reference position the nominal position relative REF NOML to the machine datum Servo lag difference between nominalandactual LAG positions following error Distance remaining to the programmed position DIST difference between actual and target positions With the MOD function Position display 1 you can select the position display in the status display With the MOD function Position display 2 you can select the position display in the status display HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 lay Types Isp D ItiON 12 3 Pos i il 12 4 Unit of Measurement 12 4 Unit of Measurement Function This MOD function determines whether the coordinates are displayed in millimeters metric system or inches To select the metric system e g X 15 789 mm set the Change mm inches function to mm The value is displayed t
239. he number of the second OS parameter to be compared and confirm with the ENT key Close the parenthetical expression with the ENT key and confirm your entry with the END key The TNC returns the following results 0 The compared OS parameters are identical 1 The first OS parameter precedes the second OS parameter alphabetically 1 The first OS parameter follows the second OS parameter alphabetically Example QS12 and QS14 are compared for alphabetic priority HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 10 11 String Parameters i il __ Preassigned Q Parameters 10 12 Preassigned Q Parameters The Q parameters Q100 to Q122 are assigned values by the TNC The following are assigned to Q parameters Values from the PLC Tool and spindle data Data on operating status etc Values from the PLC Q100 to Q107 The TNC uses the parameters Q100 to Q107 to transfer values from the PLC to an NC program Active tool radius Q108 The active value of the tool radius is assigned to Q108 Q108 is calculated from Tool radius R tool table or TOOL DEF block Delta value DR from the tool table Delta value DR from the TOOL CALL block Tool axis Q109 The value of Q109 depends on the current tool axis No tool axis defined Q109 1 X axis Q109 0 Y axis Q109 1 Z axis Q109 2 U axis Q109 6 V axis 0109 7 W axis Q109 8 442 Spindle status Q110 The value of the parameter Q110 depends on the M function last programmed for th
240. he thread depth 8 After this the tool departs the contour tangentially and returns to the starting point in the working plane 9 Atthe end of the cycle the TNC retracts the tool at rapid traverse to the set up clearance or if programmed to the 2nd set up clearance HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 8 2 Cycles for Drilling p and Thread Milling i il Buil Peay pue Budde Hulj iq 10 sajdAQ Z 8 262 265 Nominal diameter 0335 Nominal thread diameter Thread pitch Q239 Pitch of the thread The algebraic sign differentiates between right hand and left hand threads right hand thread left hand thread Thread depth Q201 incremental value Distance between workpiece surface and root of thread Feed rate for pre positioning Q253 Traversing speed of the tool when moving in and out of the workpiece In mm min Depth at front 0358 incremental value Distance between tool tip and the top surface of the workpiece for countersinking at the front of the tool Countersinking offset at front Q359 incremental value Distance by which the TNC moves the tool center away from the hole center Countersink Q360 Execution of the chamfer 0 before thread machining 1 after thread machining Set up clearance Q200 incremental value Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 263 8 2 Cycles for Drilling p and Thread Milling 8 2 Cycles for Drilling ing and Thread Milling 26
241. he tool in the spindle axis at rapid traverse FMAX to the programmed set up clearance above the workpiece surface 2 The tool drills to the total hole depth in one movement 3 Once the tool has reached the total hole depth the direction of spindle rotation is reversed and the tool is retracted to the set up clearance at the end of the dwell time If programmed the tool moves to the 2nd set up clearance at FMAX 4 At set up clearance the TNC restores the spindle settings that were active before the cycle 244 207 RT gt Set up clearance Q200 incremental value Distance between tool tip at starting position and workpiece surface Uy NII Nye A RY AMAN Total hole depth Q201 incremental value Distance between workpiece surface and end of thread gt Pitch 0239 Pitch of the thread The algebraic sign differentiates between right hand and left hand threads right hand thread left hand thread A AMAF INAN gt Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute value Coordinate of the workpiece surface 2nd set up clearance Q204 incremental value Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece clamping devices can occur Retracting after a program interruption If you interrupt program run during thread cutting with the machine stop button the TNC will display the soft key MANUAL OPERATION If you press the MANUAL OPERATION key you can retract the tool
242. he tool moves at rapid traverse in the tool axis at safety clearance below the workpiece surface HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 8 2 Cycles for Drilling p and Thread Milling j il 8 2 Cycles for Drilling WM oinc and Thread Milling m X D 3 pea D Z O T e o A 234 gt Set up clearance Q200 incremental value Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface gt Depth Q201 incremental value Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of hole tip of drill taper gt Feed rate for plunging Q206 Traversing speed of the tool during drilling in mm min gt Plunging depth Q202 incremental value Infeed per cut The depth does not have to be a multiple of the plunging depth The TNC will go to depth in one movement If the plunging depth is equal to the depth E the plunging depth is greater than the depth gt Dwell time at top Q210 Time in seconds that the tool remains at set up clearance after having been retracted from the hole for chip release gt Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute value Coordinate of the workpiece surface gt 2nd set up clearance Q204 incremental value Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece clamping devices can occur gt Decrement Q212 incremental value Value by which the TNC decreases the plunging depth Q202 after each infeed gt No of breaks before retracting Q213 Number of chip breaks after which the TNC
243. he working plane to the starting point for machining The TNC takes the workpiece blank diameter and tool radius into account for calculating the starting point If you enter a workpiece blank diameter of 0 the TNC plunge cuts into the pocket center 3 If the tool is at the 2nd set up clearance it moves at rapid traverse FMAX to the set up clearance and from there advances to the first plunging depth at the feed rate for plunging 4 The tool then moves tangentially to the contour of the finished part and using climb milling machines one revolution After this the tool departs the contour tangentially and returns to the starting point in the working plane This process 3 to 5 is repeated until the programmed depth is reached 7 Atthe end of the cycle the TNC retracts the tool at FMAX to the set up clearance or if programmed to the 2nd set up clearance and then to the center of the pocket end position starting position CS Before programming note the following The TNC automatically pre positions the tool in the tool axis and working plane The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH determines the working direction If you program ve DEPTH 0 the cycle will not be executed Wy A If you want to clear and finish the pocket with the same tas tool use a center cut end mill ISO 1641 and enter a low teed rate for plunging 8 3 Cycles for a ockets Studs and Slots Use the machine parameter displa
244. hine tool aL builder for use of the automatic program start function Refer to your machine manual att CAUTION danger to life The autostart function must not be used on machines that do not have an enclosed working space In a Program Run operating mode you can use the AUTOSTART soft key see figure at upper right to define a specific time at which the program that is currently active in this operating mode is to be started Show the window for entering the starting time see ES figure at center right Time h min sec Time of day at which the program is to be started Date DD MM YYYY Date at which the program is to be started To activate the start select OK HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Program run full sequence 456 H Programming BEGIN PGM 456 MM Programs 456 BLK FORM 0 1 Z X 0 Y 0 Z 20 BLK FORM 2 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 TOOL CALL 10 Z S1200 L Z 100 R FMAX M3 CYCL DEF 200 DRILLING Q200 2 Q201 18 5 PGM CALU DUN e Automatic program start Q206 150 Q202 18 5 Current gars 4 6 8 Q210 0 Current time Ag 42 36 a Start program eae Date DD MM YY gt 4 6 8 6 CYCL DEF 220 Time CHRS MIN SEC g 21 37 Start enabled No Autostart active No C 0 000 S 321 90 ACTL 1 Omm min CANCEL A 00 80 00 00 80 00 134 992 Our 150 M 1k T 4 Zs o F oK EXIT CANCEL 5 COPY FIELD ot Ss A PASTE FIELD 473 11 6 Automatic Progra
245. hree graphic display modes im Press the soft key for plan view Regarding depth display remember The deeper the surface the darker the shade HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 457 raphic Features Software Option 11 1 Graphics Advancec raphic Features Software Option 11 1 Graphics Advanc Projection in 3 planes Similar to a workpiece drawing the part is displayed with a plan view and two sectional planes Details can be isolated in this display mode for magnification see Magnifying details page 460 In addition you can shift the sectional planes with the corresponding soft keys Select the soft key for projection in three planes Shift the soft key row and select the soft key for oll sectional planes The TNC then displays the following soft keys il Shift the vertical sectional plane to the right or left EE EE Shift the vertical sectional plane forward or backward i i Ei Shift the horizontal sectional plane upwards _ or downwards The positions of the sectional planes are visible during shifting The default setting of the sectional plane is selected so that it lies in the working plane and in the tool axis on the workpiece center 458 DIAGNOSE 0 06 17 ON an START START RESET SINGLE inst START _ pos hl pol 3 D view The workpiece is dis
246. in Cycle 14 14 Label numbers for the contour Enter all label ab deed numbers for the individual subprograms that are to be superimposed to define the contour Confirm every label number with the ENT key When you have entered all numbers conclude entry with the END key HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 8 5 SL Cycles j il Overlapping contours Pockets and islands can be overlapped to form a new contour You can thus enlarge the area of a pocket by another pocket or reduce it by an island Subprograms Overlapping pockets 8 5 SL Cycles CS The subsequent programming examples are contour subprograms that are called by Cycle 14 CONTOUR GEOMETRY in a main program Pockets A and B overlap The TNC calculates the points of intersection S4 and S They do not have to be programmed The pockets are programmed as Tull circles Subprogram 1 Pocket A Example NC blocks Subprogram 2 Pocket B WO 04 Area of inclusion Both surfaces A and B are to be machined including the overlapping area E The surfaces A and B must be pockets E The first pocket in Cycle 14 must start outside the second pocket Surface A N E e O D UJ Area of exclusion Surface A is to be machined without the portion overlapped by B E Surface A must be a pocket and B an island E A must start outside of B E B must start inside of A WY WY Cc s 3 O O 0 0 D gt
247. in the program It is also effective in the Positioning with MDI mode of operation The active mirrored axes are shown in the additional status display If you mirror only one axis the machining direction of the tool is reversed except in fixed cycles If you mirror two axes the machining direction remains the same The result of the mirror image depends on the location of the datum If the datum lies on the contour to be mirrored the element simply flips over If the datum lies outside the contour to be mirrored the element also jumps to another location CS If you mirror only one axis the machining direction is reversed for the milling cycles Cycles 2xx Exception Cycle 208 in which the direction defined in the cycle applies 350 oe Mirrored axis Enter the axis to be mirrored You C32 can mirror all axes including rotary axes except for the spindle axis and its auxiliary axes You can enter up to three axes Cancellation Program the MIRROR IMAGE cycle once again with NO ENT HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Example NC blocks 8 7 voor Transformation Cycles 8 7 coordi lile Transformation Cycles ROTATION Cycle 10 The TNC can rotate the coordinate system about the active datum in the working plane within a program Effect The ROTATION cycle becomes effective as soon as it is defined in the program It is also effective in the Positioning with MDI mode of operation The active rotation ang
248. in which they are called Some M functions are effective only in the block in which they are programmed Unless the M function is only effective blockwise either you must cancel it in a subsequent block with a separate M function or it is automatically canceled by the TNC at the end of the program 196 Entering an M function in a STOP block If you program a STOP block the program run or test run is interrupted at the block for example for tool inspection You can also enter an M function in a STOP block To program an interruption of program run press the STOP key Enter a miscellaneous function M Example NC blocks HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 7 1 Entering misoalancousmgnctions M and STOP i il 7 2 Miscellaneous Functions for Program Run Control Spindle and Coolant Overview M00 Stop program run Spindle STOP Coolant OFF M01 Optional program STOP M02 Stop program run Spindle STOP Coolant OFF Go to block 1 Clear the status display dependent on the clearMode machine parameter M03 Spindle ON clockwise M04 Spindle ON counterclockwise M05 Spindle STOP M06 Tool change machine dependent function spindle STOP Stop program run M08 Coolant ON M09 Coolant OFF M13 Spindle ON clockwise Coolant ON M14 Spindle ON counterclockwise Coolant ON M30 Same as M02 7 2 Miscellaneous Functions for Program Run a ee and Coolant 198 73 Miscellaneous Functions for Coordinate Data Programming
249. inate of point 2 for slightly inclined surfaces A drawing cut spindle axis coordinate of point 1 smaller than spindle axis coordinate of point 2 for steep surfaces When milling twisted surfaces program the main cutting direction from point 1 to point 2 parallel to the direction of the steeper inclination If you are using a spherical cutter for the machining operation you can optimize the surface finish in the following way When milling twisted surfaces program the main cutting direction from point 1 to point 2 perpendicular to the direction of the steepest inclination CS Before programming note the following The TNC positions the tool from the current position in a linear 3 D movement to the starting point 1 Pre position the tool in such a way that no collision between tool and clamping devices can occur The TNC moves the tool with radius compensation RO to the programmed positions If required use a center cut end mill ISO 1641 334 231 Starting point in 1st axis Q225 absolute value Starting point coordinate of the surface to be multipass milled in the reference axis of the working plane Starting point in 2nd axis Q226 absolute value Starting point coordinate of the surface to be multipass milled in the minor axis of the working plane Starting point in 3rd axis Q227 absolute value Starting point coordinate of the surface to be multipass milled in the spindle axis 2nd poin
250. inates of the straight line end point M M94 M103 M118 M120 cee ne na b ENT Ea Select the radius compensation here press the RO LL Re soft key the tool moves without compensation N Enter the feed rate here 100 mm min and confirm your entry with ENT For programming in inches enter 100 for a feed rate of 10 ipm To traverse with the feed rate defined in the TOOL CALL block press the F AUTO soft key Move at rapid traverse press the FMAX soft key Enter a miscellaneous function here M3 and terminate the dialog with ENT oS The part program now contains the following line HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 149 ch and Departure 6 3 Contour Appro 6 3 Contour Approach and Departure Overview Types of paths for contour approach and departure The functions for contour approach APPR and departure DEP are activated with the APPR DEP key You can then select the desired 1 H path function with the corresponding soft key 1 BLK FOR 0 1 Z x10 vso 2 20 3 TOOL CALL 5 Z 53000 4 et Xx he 20 Y 30 RO FMAX M3 _Function Approach _ Departure _ Eo DEP LT Straight line with tangential connection Straight line perpendicular to a contour point Circular arc with tangential connection APPR CT on Ss ptt E i te an en ee lt lt APPR LT a LN a CT pie LCT E N D Circular arc with tangential connection APPR
251. ine Lock the pocket at right HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Tool number Tool name Pocket reserv Yes ENT No NO ENT Special tool Yes ENT No NO ENT Fixed pocket Yes ENT No NO ENT Pocket locked Yes ENT No NO ENT Pocket comment PLC status Value Tool type for pocket table Lock the pocket above Lock the pocket below Lock the pocket at left Lock the pocket at right 5 2 Tool Data j il 5 2 Tool Data Select beginning of table BEGIN a m oO Select end of table Select previous page in table HE v D Qo m Select next page in table Reset pocket table RESET POCKET TABLE Reset tool number column T RESET COLUMN T Go to beginning of the line BEGIN Go to end of the line o gt Simulate a tool change SIMULATED Select a tool from the tool table The TNC shows the contents of the tool table Use the arrow keys to select a tool press OK to transfer it to the pocket table SELECT Edit the current field EDIT CURRENT FIELD Sort the view SORT E The machine manufacturer defines the features properties and designations of the various display filters The machine tool manual provides further information 132 Calling tool data A TOOL CALL block in the part program is defined with the following data Select the tool call function with the TOOL CALL key TOOL 07 10 E Tool number Enter the number or name
252. ing tapping and thread milling G240 G200 G201 G202 G203 G204 G205 G206 G207 G208 G209 Centering Drilling Reaming Boring Universal drilling Back boring Universal pecking Tapping with a floating tap holder Rigid tapping Bore milling Tapping with chip breaking Cycles for drilling tapping and thread milling G262 Thread milling G263 Thread milling countersinking G264 Thread drilling milling G265 Helical thread drilling milling G267 External thread milling Cycles for milling pockets studs and slots G251 Rectangular pocket complete 0252 Circular pocket complete G253 Slot complete G254 Circular slot complete G256 Rectangular stud G257 Circular stud Cycles for creating point patterns G220 G221 Circular hole pattern Point patterns on lines SL Cycles group 2 G37 Contour geometry list of subcontour program numbers G120 Contour data applies to G121 to G124 G121 Pilot drilling 0122 Rough out G123 Floor finishing G124 Side finishing G125 Contour train machining open contour G127 Cylinder surface G128 Cylindrical surface slot Coordinate transformation G53 Datum shift in datum table G54 Datum shift in program G28 Mirror image G73 Rotation of the coordinate system G72 Scaling factor reduce or enlarge contour G80 Tilting the working plane G247 Datum setting Cycles for multipass milling G230 G231 Multipass milling of smooth surfaces Multipass milling of tilted
253. ing 0257 incremental value Depth at which the TNC carries out chip breaking There is no chip breaking if O is entered Retraction rate for chip breaking Q256 incremental value Value by which the TNC retracts the tool during chip breaking gt Dwell time at depth 0211 Time in seconds that the tool remains at the hole bottom gt Deepened starting point 0379 incremental with respect to the workpiece surface Starting position of drilling if a shorter tool has already pilot drilled to a certain depth The TNC moves at the feed rate for pre positioning from the set up clearance to the deepened starting point gt Feed rate for pre positioning Q253 Traversing velocity of the tool during positioning from the set up clearance to a deepened starting point in mm min Effective only if Q379 is entered not equal to 0 CS If you use 0379 to enter a deepened starting point the TNC merely changes the starting point of the infeed movement Retraction movements are not changed by the TNC therefore they are calculated with respect to the coordinate of the workpiece surface HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 m X D 3 lt O za e a A 8 2 Cycles for Drilling meine and Thread Milling j i 8 2 Cycles for Drilling Tapping and Thread Milling BORE MILLING Cycle 208 Advanced programming features software option 1 240 The TNC positions the tool in the spindle axis at rapid traverse FMAX to the programmed set up cl
254. ing depth Q10 incremental value Dimension by which the tool plunges in each infeed Feed rate for plunging O11 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min during penetration Feed rate for milling O12 Traversing speed for milling in mm min Coarse roughing tool number Q18 Number of the tool with which the TNC has already coarse roughed the contour If there was no coarse roughing enter 0 if you enter a value other than zero the TNC will only rough out the portion that could not be machined with the coarse roughing tool If the portion that is to be roughed cannot be approached from the side the TNC will plunge cut as in Q19 For this purpose you must enter the tool length LCUTS in the tool table TOOL T see Tool Data page 122 and define the maximum plunging ANGLE of the tool The TNC will otherwise generate an error message Reciprocation feed rate Q19 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min during reciprocating plunge cut Retraction feed rate Q208 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min when retracting after machining If you enter Q208 0 the TNC retracts the tool at the feed rate in O12 FLOOR FINISHING Cycle 23 Advanced programming features software option CS The TNC automatically calculates the starting point for finishing The starting point depends on the available space in the pocket The tool approaches the machining plane smoothly on a vertically tangential arc if there is sufficient room I
255. ing one of the last 10 files selected Call the file manager MGT LAST Display the last 10 files selected Press the LAST FILES soft key Use the arrow keys to move the highlight to the file you wish to select Moves the highlight up and down within a window Select a file Press the OK soft key or ENT or Deleting a file Move the highlight to the file you want to delete DELETE To select the erasing function press the DELETE soft ey To confirm press the OK soft key or To cancel deletion press the CANCEL soft key Deleting a directory Delete all files and subdirectories stored in the directory that you want to delete Move the highlight to the directory you want to delete DELETE To select the erasing function press the DELETE ALL soft key The TNC asks whether you really want to erase the subdirectories and files To confirm press the OK soft key or To cancel deletion press the CANCEL soft key 88 Manual operation Program m i n g PLC N nc_ N N ace TNC nc_prog screens H 7 config GQ nc_prog e File name Bytes Status Date Time Auto_Tast Man_Tast t 04 06 2008 11 48 08 screens 007 H 2141 04 06 2008 11 32 38 s SHO 07_de H 2116 04 06 2008 11 06 10 oe as Dy te Last 8 11 44 16 lt F TNC nc_prog screens EX11 H pS 11 26 58 T TNC nc_prog screens ZEROSHIFT D 8 16 39 56 pr TNC nc_progNscreens 14 H 8 16 39 56 TNC nc_
256. ing the starting position and when moving to the next pass If you are moving the tool transversely to the material Q389 1 the TNC moves the tool at the feed rate for milling Q207 gt Set up clearance Q200 incremental value Distance between tool tip and the starting position in the tool axis If you are milling with machining strategy O389 2 the TNC moves the tool at the set up clearance over the current plunging depth to the starting point of the next pass Clearance to side Q357 incremental value Safety clearance to the side of the workpiece when the tool approaches the first plunging depth and distance at which the stepover occurs If the machining strategy O389 0 or O389 2 Is used 2nd set up clearance Q204 incremental value Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece clamping devices can occur HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 34 m X D 3 p D Z O za e a A 8 6 a for Multipass Milling 8 6 Mes for Multipass Milling Definition of workpiece blank Tool call Retract the tool Cycle definition MULTIPASS MILLING Ww 42 8 6 u for Multipass Milling HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Pre position near the starting point Cycle call Retract in the tool axis end program i i fe Transformation Cycles 5 O O Q ae 00 8 7 Coordinate Transformation Cycles Overview Once a contour has been pro
257. ion 313 Program defaults for cylindrical surface machining cycles software option 1 315 CYLINDER SURFACE Cycle 27 software option 1 316 CYLINDER SURFACE slot milling Cycle 28 software option 1 318 CYLINDER SURFACE ridge milling Cycle 29 software option 1 320 8 6 Cycles for Multipass Milling 331 Overview 331 MULTIPASS MILLING Cycle 230 Advanced programming features software option 332 RULED SURFACE Cycle 231 Advanced programming features software option 334 FACE MILLING Cycle 232 Advanced programming features software option 3937 8 7 Coordinate Transformation Cycles 344 Overview 344 Effect of coordinate transformations 344 DATUM SHIFT Cycle 7 345 DATUM SHIFT with datum tables Cycle 7 346 DATUM SETTING Cycle 247 349 MIRROR IMAGE Cycle 8 350 ROTATION Cycle 10 652 SCALING FACTOR Cycle 11 353 AXIS SPECIFIC SCALING Cycle 26 354 WORKING PLANE Cycle 19 software option 1 355 8 8 Special Cycles 363 DWELL TIME Cycle 9 363 PROGRAM CALL Cycle 12 364 ORIENTED SPINDLE STOP Cycle 13 365 TOLERANCE Cycle 32 366 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 9 1 Labeling Subprograms and Program Section Repeats 370 Labels 370 9 2 Subprograms 371 Actions 371 Programming notes 371 Programming a subprogram 371 Calling a subprogram 371 9 3 Prog
258. ion If you program DEPTH 0 the cycle will not be executed The cutter diameter must not be larger than the slot width and not smaller than a third of the slot width The cutter diameter must be smaller than half the slot length The TNC otherwise cannot execute this cycle HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 8 3 Cycles for aes Studs and Slots i il Use the machine parameter displayDepthErr to define tt whether if a positive depth is entered the TNC should output an error message on or not off Danger of collision Keep in mind that the TNC reverses the calculation for pre positioning when a positive depth is entered This means that the tool moves at rapid traverse in the tool axis at safety clearance below the workpiece surface 211 Set up clearance Q200 incremental value Distance i between tool tip and workpiece surface Depth Q201 incremental value Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of slot N ad Y N a Y TN ad wt O Feed rate for milling Q207 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min while milling Plunging depth Q202 incremental value Total extent by which the tool is fed in the spindle axis during a reciprocating movement Machining operation 0 1 2 Q215 Define the machining operation 0 Roughing and finishing 1 Only roughing 2 Only finishing Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute value Coordinate of the workpiece surface
259. ion to overwrite the file anyway To overwrite two or more files mark them in the existing files pop up window and press the OK soft key To leave the files as they are press the CANCEL soft key HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 a Call the file tagging functions ae Move the highlight to the files to be copied and mark FILE them You can tag several files in this way if desired cory Copy the tagged Tiles into the target directory pecka th thei Manager ing wi 4 3 Work 4 3 Working with the A Manager The TNC in a network E To connect the Ethernet card to your network see Ethernet Interface page 490 The TNC logs error messages during network operation see Ethernet Interface on page 490 If the TNC is connected to a network it also displays the connected network drives in the directory window left half of the screen All the functions described above selecting a drive copying files etc also apply to network drives provided that you have been granted the corresponding rights Connecting and disconnecting a network drive To select the program management Press the PGM MGT MGT key If necessary press the WINDOW soft key to set up the screen as it is shown at the upper right To manage the network drives Press the NETWORK soft key second soft key row In the right hand window the TNC shows the network drives available for access With the soft keys described below you can define the connection for e
260. ircle from 3 points 393 FN24 CIRCLE DATA Calculating a circle from 4 points 393 Full circle 163 Fundamentals 74 G Graphic simulation 462 Graphics Display modes 457 During programming 107 Detail enlargement 108 Magnification of details 460 H Hard disk 79 Helical interpolation 174 Helical thread drilling milling 261 Helix 174 Help with error messages 113 Hole Pattern Circular 294 Linear 296 I Indexed tools 128 Information on formats 514 Inside thread milling 251 Interrupt machining 468 L Look ahead 206 M M functions See Miscellaneous functions Machine axes moving the In increments 50 With the electronic handwheel 51 With the machine axis direction buttons 49 Machine axes traversing 49 Machine parameters For 3 D touch probes 500 Machine referenced coordinates M91 M92 199 Machining time measuring the 462 Mid program startup 471 After power failure 471 Mirror image 350 Miscellaneous Functions 518 M Miscellaneous functions Entering 196 For contouring behavior 202 For program run control 198 For rotary axes 212 For spindle and coolant 198 MOD function Exiting 478 Overview 479 Select 478 N NC and PLC synchronization 416 NC Error Messages 113 Nesting 374 Network connection 94 O Oblong hole milling 284
261. irection the data is first prepared in the Q parameters and then transferred to the result set Specify with SQL BIND which table columns are mapped to which Q parameters The Q parameters are bound assigned to the columns Columns that are not bound to O parameters are not included in the read write processes If anew table row is generated with SQL INSERT the columns not bound to Q parameters are filled with default values HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 SOL Q5 SELECT 7 Tabelle ABG Dateiver waltung SOL FEICIO HANDLE Q9 Q5 Handle fur selektierte Daten SOL Server 421 Tables with SQL Commands sino 10 9 Acce 10 9 accell Tables with SQL Commands Programming SQL commands Program SOL commands in the Programming mode Call the SOL functions by pressing the SQL soft key SaL Select an SOL command via soft key see overview or press the SQL EXECUTE soft key and program the SOL command Overview of the soft keys SOL EXECUTE R Program a Select command EXECUTE SOL BIND z Bind a Q parameter to a table column BIND SOL FETCH Read table rows from the result set and save them in FETCH OQ parameters SQL UPDATE Save data from the Q parameters in an existing table UPDATE row in the result set SQL INSERT n Save data from the Q parameters in a new table row in INSERT the result set SQL COMMIT A Transfer table rows from the result set into the table COM
262. irectly Rules for formulas Mathematical formulas are programmed according to the following rules Higher level operations are performed first Ist calculation 5 3 15 2nd calculation 2 10 20 3rd calculation 15 20 35 or Ist calculation 10 squared 100 2nd calculation 3 to the power of 3 27 3rd calculation 100 27 73 Distributive law for calculating with parentheses a b c a bt a c Programming example Calculate an angle with the arc tangent from the opposite side Q12 and adjacent side Q13 then store in Q25 Q To select the formula entering function press the Q key and FORMULA soft key 25 Enter the parameter number 6 Shift the soft key row and select the arc tangent function a EE Shift the soft key row and open the parentheses Enter Q parameter number 12 12 Select division Enter Q parameter number 13 13 EF B Close parentheses and conclude formula entry Example NC block HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 10 Entering Formulas Directly j i 10 11 String Parameters 10 11 String Parameters String processing functions You can use the QS parameters to create variable character strings You can output such character strings for example through the FN16 F PRINT function to create variable logs You can assign a linear sequence of characters letters numbers special characters and spaces to a string parameter You can also check and p
263. is repeated until the programmed surface has been completed At the end of the last pass the next machining depth is plunged to In order to avoid non productive motions the surface is then machined in reverse direction The process is repeated until all infeeds have been machined In the last infeed simply the finishing allowance entered is milled at the finishing feed rate At the end of the cycle the TNC retracts the tool at FMAX to the 2nd set up clearance Strategy O0389 2 3 The tool then advances to the stopping point 2 at the feed rate for milling The end point lies outside the surface The control calculates the end point from the programmed starting point the programmed length the programmed safety clearance to the side and the tool radius The TNC positions the tool in the spindle axis to the set up clearance over the current infeed depth and then moves at the ore positioning feed rate directly back to the starting point in the next line The TNC calculates the offset from the programmed width the tool radius and the maximum path overlap factor The tool then returns to the current infeed depth and moves in the direction of the next end point 2 The milling process is repeated until the programmed surface has been completed At the end of the last pass the next machining depth is plunged to In order to avoid non productive motions the surface is then machined In reverse direction The process is repeated u
264. is without machine geometry compensation Tool radius compensation is not permitted Combining coordinate transformation cycles When combining coordinate transformation cycles always make sure the working plane is swiveled around the active datum You can program a datum shift before activating Cycle 19 In this case you are shifting the machine based coordinate system If you program a datum shift after having activated Cycle 19 you are shifting the tilted coordinate system Important When resetting the cycles use the reverse sequence used for defining them 1st Activate the datum shift 2nd Activate tilting function 3rd Activate rotation Machining 1st Reset the rotation 2nd Reset the tilting function 3rd Reset the datum shift 358 Procedure for working with Cycle 19 WORKING PLANE 1 Write the program Define the tool not required if TOOL T is active and enter the full tool length Call the tool Retract the tool in the tool axis to a position where there is no danger of collision with the workpiece clamping devices during tilting If required position the rotary axis or axes with an L block to the appropriate angular value s depending on a machine parameter Activate datum shift if required Define Cycle 19 WORKING PLANE enter the angular values for the tilt axes Traverse all principal axes X Y Z to activate compensation Write the program as if the machining process were to be executed in
265. ius vy Circular arc with tangential connection E Chamfering Corner rounding Tool functions TOOL TOOL Enter and call tool length and radius Cycles subprograms and program section repeats 0 0 E 0 0 E 1 oe Define and call cycles ee T Enter and call labels for subprogramming and SET 07 10 program section repeats sna Program stop in a program TOUCH j kwa Define touch probe cycles Coordinate axes and numbers Entering and editing Select coordinate axes or enter them into the program 9 Numbers Decimal point Reverse algebraic sign T Polar coordinate input Incremental dimensions Q parameter programming Q parameter status Save actual position or values from calculator a0 80 x Skip dialog questions delete words mz o ENT Confirm entry and resume dialog Conclude block and exit entry aJo LL Clear numerical entry or TNC error message w m m Abort dialog delete program section AlE Delete individual characters V ecial functions smarT NC SPEC i i sag Show special functions No function o Up down one dialog box or button HEIDENHAIN n A T 0 S IST 10 19 a 130 S OVR HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 TNC Model Software and Features This manual describes functions and features provided by TNCs as of the following NC software numbers TNC 620 340 560 01 TNC 620 E 340 561 01 TNC 620 programming station 340 564 01 The suffix E in
266. k Program Run Full e a E a eee LEON li Sequence and Test Run modes of operation select copy PASTE O CANCEL FIELD FIELD the screen layout Program Status Pei Select the Program Q PARAM soft key Q PARAM Q Select the Q PARAMETER LIST soft key E The TNC opens a pop up window in which you can enter the desired range for display of the Ss Q parameters or string parameters With the Q PARAMETER REQUEST soft key available REQUEST only in Manual Operation Program Run Full Sequence and Program Run Single Block you can request individual Q parameters To assign a new value overwrite the displayed value and confirm with OK 396 10 8 Additional Functions Overview Press the DIVERSE FUNCTION soft key to call the additional functions The TNC then displays the following soft keys FN14 ERROR Ee Page 398 Output of error messages ERROR FN16 F PRINT ea Page 402 Formatted output of texts or Q parameter PRINT values FN18 SYS DATUM READ me Page 407 Read system data READ FN19 PLC Ea Page 415 Send values to the PLC PLc FN20 WAIT FOR FNze Page 416 Synchronize NC and PLC FOR FN29 PLC Page 418 PLC Transfer up to eight values to the PLC FN37 EXPORT aa Page 418 Export local Q parameters or QS sabi parameters into a calling program HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 ions Funct itiona 10 8 Add o il ions Funct itiona 10 8 Add FN14 ERROR Displaying error messages With the f
267. k 62 End of subprogram 2 and return jump to the subprogram from which it was called 4 Subprogram 1 is executed from block 40 up to block 45 End of subprogram 1 and return jump to the main program SUBPGMS 5 Main program SUBPGMS is executed from block 18 up to block 35 Return jump to block 1 and end of program 9 5 Nesting HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 375 il 9 5 Nesting Repeating program section repeats Example NC blocks Program execution 1 Main program REPS is executed up to block 27 2 Program section between block 20 and block 27 is repeated twice 3 Main program REPS is executed from block 28 to block 35 4 Program section between block 15 and block 35 Is repeated once including the program section repeat between 20 and block 27 5 Main program REPS is executed from block 36 to block 50 end of program 376 Beginning of program section repeat 1 Beginning of program section repeat 2 The program section between LBL 2 and this block block 20 is repeated twice The program section between LBL 1 and this block block 15 is repeated once Repeating a subprogram Example NC blocks Program execution 1 Main program SPGREP is executed up to block 11 2 Subprogram 2 is called and executed 3 Program section between block 10 and block 12 is repeated twice Subprogram 2 is repeated twice 4 Main program SPGREP is executed from block 13 to block 19 End of program HEIDENHAIN TNC
268. l connection to the preceding and subsequent contour elements Straight line or circular path with any connection to the preceding contour element Coordinates of the end points of the straight line Chamfer side length Coordinates of the circle center or pole Coordinates of the arc end point direction of rotation Coordinates of the arc end point arc radius direction of rotation Coordinates of the arc end point Rounding radius R 159 160 162 163 164 166 161 178 Straight line L The TNC moves the tool in a straight line from its current position to the straight line end point The starting point is the end point of the preceding block Coordinates of the end point of the straight line if necessary Radius compensation RL RR RO Feed rate F Miscellaneous function M Example NC blocks Actual position capture You can also generate a Straight line block L block by using the ACTUAL POSITION CAPTURE key In the Manual Operation mode move the tool to the position you wish to capture Switch the screen display to programming Select the program block after which you want to insert the L block Press the ACTUAL POSITION CAPTURE key The TNC generates an L block with the actual position coordinates HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 6 4 Path vontours Ca Coordinates k i 6 4 Path Contours cl sian Coordinates Inserting a chamfer CHF between two straight lines
269. l be carried out counterclockwise otherwise machining will be clockwise 294 gt Stepping angle Q247 incremental value Angle between two machining operations on a pitch circle If you enter an angle step of 0 the TNC will calculate the angle step from the starting and stopping angles and the number of pattern repetitions If you enter a value other than O the TNC will not take the stopping angle into account The sign for the angle step determines the working direction clockwise gt Number of repetitions Q241 Number of machining operations on a pitch circle gt Set up clearance Q200 incremental value Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface Enter a positive value gt Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute value Coordinate of the workpiece surface gt 2nd set up clearance Q204 incremental value Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece clamping devices can occur Moving to clearance height Q301 Definition of how the tool is to move between machining processes 0 Move to the set up clearance between operations 1 Move to the 2nd set up clearance between machining operations gt Type of traverse Line 0 Arc 1 0365 Definition of the path function with which the tool is to move between machining operations 0 Move between operations on a Straight line 1 Move between operations on the pitch circle HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Example NC
270. lash memory card Input resolution and display To 0 1 um for linear axes step To 0 01 um for linear axes To 0 0001 for angular axes To 0 000 01 for angular axes Input range Maximum 999 999 999 mm or 999 999 999 Interpolation Linear in 4 axes Circular in 2 axes Circular in 3 axes with tilted working plane software option 1 Helical superimposition of circular and straight paths Block processing time 6 ms 3 D straight line without radius compensation 3 D straight line without radius compensation 1 5 ms software option 2 Axis feedback control Position loop resolution Signal period of the position encoder 1024 Cycle time of position controller 3 ms Cycle time of speed controller 600 us Range of traverse Maximum 100 m 3937 inches Spindle speed Maximum 100 000 rpm analog speed command signal Error compensation Linear and nonlinear axis error backlash reversal spikes during circular movements thermal expansion Stick slip friction i il Data interfaces One each RS 232 C V 24 max 115 kilobaud E Expanded data interface with LSV 2 protocol for remote operation of the TNC through the data interface with the HEIDENHAIN software TNCremo E Ethernet interface 100BaseT approx 2 to 5 megabaud depending on file type and network load m2 x USB 1 1 Ambient temperature E Operation 0 C to 45 C E Storage 30 C to 70 C Electronic handwheels One HR 410 portable handwheel or One HR 130 panel mo
271. le Datum shift Enter the number of the datum from the datum table or a Q parameter If you enter a Q parameter the TNC activates the datum number entered in the O parameter Cancellation Call a datum shift to the coordinates X 0 Y 0 etc from the datum table Execute a datum shift to the coordinates X 0 Y 0 etc directly with a cycle definition 346 Example NC blocks Selecting a datum table in the part program With the SEL TABLE function you select the table from which the TNC takes the datums PGM CALL DATUM TABLE To select the functions for program call press the PGM CALL key Press the DATUM TABLE soft key Select the complete path name of the datum table or the file with the SELECT soft key and confirm your entry with the END key Program a SEL TABLE block before Cycle 7 Datum Shift A datum table selected with SEL TABLE remains active until you select another datum table with SEL TABLE Edit the datum table in the Programming mode of operation Select the datum table in the Programming mode of operation PGM MGT Press the PGM MGT key to call the file manager see File Management Fundamentals page 79 Display the datum tables Press the soft keys SELECT TYPE and SHOW D Select the desired table or enter a new file name Edit the file The soft key row comprises the following functions for editing Select beginning of table BEGIN Select end of table Go
272. le 19 software option 1 TT Effect The functions for tilting the working plane are interfaced to the TNC and the machine tool by the machine tool builder With some swivel heads and tilting tables the machine tool builder determines whether the entered angles are interpreted as coordinates of the rotary axes or as mathematical angles of a tilted plane Refer to your machine manual The working plane is always tilted around the active datum For fundamentals see Tilting the Working Plane Software Option 1 page 62 Please read this section completely In Cycle 19 you define the position of the working plane i e the position of the tool axis referenced to the machine coordinate system by entering tilt angles There are two ways to determine the position of the working plane Enter the position of the tilting axes directly Describe the position of the working plane using up to 3 rotations spatial angle of the fixed machine coordinate system The required spatial angle can be calculated by cutting a perpendicular line through the tilted working plane and considering it from the axis around which you wish to tilt With two spatial angles every tool position in space can be defined exactly tZ Note that the position of the tilted coordinate system and therefore also all movement in the tilted system are dependent on your description of the tilted plane HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 8 7 voor Transformatio
273. le 240 Advanced programming features software option 225 DRILLING Cycle 200 227 REAMING Cycle 201 Advanced programming features software option 229 BORING Cycle 202 Advanced programming features software option 231 UNIVERSAL DRILLING Cycle 203 Advanced programming features software option 233 BACK BORING Cycle 204 Advanced programming features software option 235 UNIVERSAL PECKING Cycle 205 Advanced programming features software option 237 BORE MILLING Cycle 208 Advanced programming features software option 240 TAPPING NEW with floating tap holder Cycle 206 242 RIGID TAPPING without a floating tap holder NEW Cycle 207 244 TAPPING WITH CHIP BREAKING Cycle 209 Advanced programming features software option 246 Fundamentals of thread milling 249 THREAD MILLING Cycle 262 Advanced programming features software option 251 THREAD MILLING COUNTERSINKING Cycle 263 Advanced programming features software option 253 THREAD DRILLING MILLING Cycle 264 Advanced programming features software option 257 HELICAL THREAD DRILLING AND MILLING Cycle 265 Advanced programming features software option 261 OUTSIDE THREAD MILLING Cycle 267 Advanced programming features software option 265 8 3 Cycles for Milling Pockets Studs and Slots 271 Overview 271 POCKET MILLING Cycle 4 272 POCKET FINISHING Cycle 212 Advanced
274. le causes of the error and suggestions for solving the problem Open the error window MORE INFO Information on the error cause and corrective action Position the highlight on the error message and press the MORE INFO soft key The TNC opens the window with information on the error cause and corrective action Leave Info Press the MORE INFO soft key again INTERNAL INFO soft key The INTERNAL INFO soft key supplies information on the error message This information is only required if servicing is needed Open the error window INTERNAL INFO 114 Detailed information about the error message Position the highlight on the error message and press the INTERNAL INFO soft key The TNC opens a window with internal information about the error To leave Details press the INTERNAL INFO soft key again Positioning A iain GE Programming FK programming Illegal positioning block 402 0009 ERROR FK programming Illegal positioning block Cause E Within an unresolved FK sequence you programmed an illegal positioning block other than FK blocks RND CHF APPR DEP gt on L blocks With motion components exclusively perpendicular to the FK plan Acti First ceanodud the FK sequence completely or delete illegal positioning blocks Geometry functions that are defined over the gray contouring Keys and have coordinates in the Working plane are illegal exception RND CH APPR DEP gt DIAGNOSE B MORE INTER
275. le is shown in the additional status display Reference axis for the rotation angle E X Y plane X axis E Y Z plane Y axis E Z X plane Z axis CS Before programming note the following An active radius compensation is canceled by defining Cycle 10 and must therefore be reprogrammed if necessary After defining Cycle 10 you must move both axes of the working plane to activate rotation for all axes 10 gt Rotation Enter the rotation angle in degrees Input range 360 to 360 absolute or incremental Cancellation Program the ROTATION cycle once again with a rotation angle of 0 352 Example NC blocks SCALING FACTOR Cycle 11 The TNC can increase or reduce the size of contours within a program enabling you to program shrinkage and oversize allowances Effect The SCALING FACTOR becomes effective as soon as it is defined in the program It is also effective in the Positioning with MDI mode of operation The active scaling factor is shown in the additional status display The scaling factor has an effect on E All three coordinate axes at the same time Dimensions tn cycles Prerequisite It is advisable to set the datum to an edge or a corner of the contour before enlarging or reducing the contour 11 Scaling factor Enter the scaling factor SCL The sa TNC multiplies the coordinates and radii by the SCL factor as described under Effect above Enlargement SCL greater
276. lemishes at inside corners this applies for the outermost pass in the Rough out and Side Finishing cycles The contour is approached on a tangential arc for side finishing For floor finishing the tool again approaches the workpiece on a tangential arc for spindle axis Z for example the arc may be in the Z X plane The contour is machined throughout in either climb or up cut milling The machining data such as milling depth finishing allowance and set up clearance are entered as CONTOUR DATA in Cycle 20 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 8 5 SL Cycles i il A Overview of SL cycles gt Cycle Softkey Page O 14 CONTOUR GEOMETRY essential 14 Page 303 LBL 1 N dp M LO 20 CONTOUR DATA essential ee Page 307 Lee 21 PILOT DRILLING optional 21 Page 308 Ez 22 ROUGH OUT essential 22 Page 309 23 FLOOR FINISHING optional 23 Page 311 EP e Ho 24 SIDE FINISHING optional 24 Page 312 CE Enhanced cycles 25 CONTOUR TRAIN Page 313 27 CYLINDER SURFACE Page 316 ALY 28 CYLINDER SURFACE slot milling 7 Page 318 ALY 29 CYLINDER SURFACE ridge milling Page 320 302 CONTOUR GEOMETRY Cycle 14 All subprograms that are superimposed to define the contour are listed in Cycle 14 CONTOUR GEOMETRY CS Before programming note the following Cycle 14 is DEF active which means that it becomes effective as soon as it is defined in the part program You can list up to 12 subprograms Subcontours
277. les page 89 and mark the corresponding files With the back soft key exit the TAG function again Press the COPY soft key Confirm with the OK soft key or with the ENT key For long programs a status window appears on the TNC informing you of the copying progress uINoOU To end data transfer move the highlight into the left window and then press the WINDOW soft key The standard file manager window is displayed again To select another directory in the split screen display press the SHOW TREE soft key If you press the SHOW FILES soft key the TNC shows the content of the selected directory n 92 Copying files into another directory Select a screen layout with two equally sized windows To display directories in both windows press the SHOW TREE soft key In the right window Move the highlight to the directory to copy the files to and display the files in this directory with the SHOW FILES soft key In the left window Select the directory with the files to copy and press the SHOW FILES soft key to display them Additional marking functions see Marking files page 89 If you have tagged files in both the left and right windows the TNC copies from the directory in which the highlight is located Overwriting files If you copy files into a directory in which other files are stored under the same name the TNC will reply with a protected file error message Use the TAG funct
278. line The icons have the following meanings Branch exists but is closed EK Branch is open Empty object cannot be opened _ Initialized machine parameter t Uninitialized optional machine parameter fm jj Can be read but not edited x Cannot be read or edited HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 13 1 Machine Specific User Parameters S il 13 1 Machine Specific User Parameters Displaying help texts The HELP key enables you to calla help text for each parameter object or attribute If the help text does not fit on one page 1 2 is then displayed at the upper right for example press the HELP PAGE soft key to scroll to the second page To exit the help text press the HELP key again Additional information such as the unit of measure the initial value or a selection list is also displayed If the selected machine parameter matches a parameter in the TNC the corresponding MP number is shown DisplaySettings Settings for screen display Sequence of the displayed axes O to 5 Depends on the available axes Type of position display in the position window NOML ACTL REF ACTL REF NOML LAG DIST Type of position display in the status display NOML ACTL REF ACTL REF NOML LAG DIST Definition of decimal separator for position display Feed rate display in Manual operating mode At axis key Display feed rate only if axis direction key is pressed Always minimum Always display feed rate Display of spindle posi
279. ling through the program structure window block by block the TNC at the same time automatically moves the corresponding NC blocks in the program window This way you can quickly skip large program sections HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Manual operation O67 H Programming L Z 100 R ON OuUBRWNP CYCL DEF 2 Q200 2 Q206 150 oO N Ss w t etetet Oooo 9 PO BEGIN PGM 007 MM 0 Z 35 FMAX M3 E DEF DRILLIN G 7SET UP CLEARANCE Q201 48 DEPTH 7FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG 7PLUNGING DEPTH DWELL TIME AT TOP SURFACE COORDINATE 72ND SET UP DWELL TIME SITIONING CLEARANCE AT DEPTH 10 L X 20 Y 20 RO FMAX M99 11 L X 180 Y 20 RO FMAX M99 12 L X 180 Y 68 R FMAX M99 13 L X 20 Y 68 R FMAX M99 14 L Z 100 R 15 STOP 16 TOOL CALL 17 CONTU 18 L Z 100 R 19 L X 30 Y FMAX 10 Z 52400 R FMAX M3 30 RO FMAX x 22 APPR LCT X 8 Y 8 R3 RL F500 23 L Y 80 BEGIN PGM 007 MM IERE GRAY a a a POSITIONING CONTUR PROBE PROBE ROTATION PRES END PGM 007 MM FI ioe TI 4 6 Structura Programs l m 4 ae e DIAGNOSE 109 4 7 Adding Comments Function N D z O You can add comments to a part program to explain program steps or Positioning Programming make general notes Comment BB m oome 3 eee E If the TNC cannot show the entire comment on the a roo OAL az Bisse is ee Q201 15 gt
280. ll as to the first contour element Once these lines are known the radius then suffices to completely define the tool path Use any path function to approach the starting point Ps Initiate the dialog with the APPR DEP key and APPR LCT soft key Coordinates of the first contour point Pp Radius R of the circular arc Enter R as a positive value Radius compensation RR RL for machining 6 3 Contour Appro Example NC blocks Approach Ps without radius compensation Pa with radius comp RR radius R 10 End point of the first contour element Next contour element HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 155 il ch and Departure 6 3 Contour Appro Departing on a straight line with tangential connection DEP LT The tool moves on a straight line from the last contour point Pg to the end point Py The line lies on the extension of the last contour element Py is separated from Pe by the distance LEN gt Program the last contour element with the end point Pg and radius compensation Initiate the dialog with the APPR DEP key and DEP LT soft key LEN Enter the distance from the last contour element ee Pg to the end point Py Example NC blocks Last contour element Pe with radius compensation Depart contour by LEN 12 5 mm Retract in Z return to block 1 end program Departing on a straight line perpendicular to the last contour point DEP LN The tool moves on a straight line from the last contour point Pe to the
281. lled the File Manager Now or press the SELECT soft key or the ENT key ENT Creating a new directory Move the highlight in the left window to the directory in which you want to create a subdirectory Enter the new file name and confirm with ENT NEW ENT Press the OK soft key to confirm or OK abort with the CANCEL soft key CANCEL EE IIa 86 Copying a single file Move the highlight to the file you wish to copy cory Press the COPY soft key to select the copy function ER The TNC opens a pop up window Enter the name of the destination file and confirm your j entry with the ENT key or OK soft key The TNC copies the file to the active directory or to the corresponding destination directory The original file is retained Copying a directory Move the highlight in the left window onto the directory you want to copy Then press the COPY DIR soft key instead of the COPY soft key Subdirectories can be copied by the TNC at the same time Making a setting in a selection box In various dialogs the TNC opens a pop up window in which you can make settings in selection boxes Move the cursor into the desired selection box and press the GOTO key Use the arrow keys to position the cursor to the required setting With the OK soft key you confirm the value and with the CANCEL soft key you discard the selection HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 th mer Manager ing wi 4 3 Work 4 3 Working with the A Manager Choos
282. locks the tool status L Input range 0 to 0 9999 mm Permissible deviation from tool radius R for breakage detection If the entered value is exceeded the TNC locks the tool status L Input range O to 0 9999 mm Number of teeth Wear tolerance length Wear tolerance radius Cutting direction M3 Tool offset radius Tool offset length Breakage tolerance length Breakage tolerance radius Editing tool tables The tool table that is active during execution of the part program is designated TOOL T and must be saved in the table directory The tool table TOOL T can be edited only in a machine mode of operation Other tool tables that are to be archived or used for test runs are given different file names with the extension T By default for the Test Run and Programming modes the TNC uses the simtool t tool table which is also stored in the table directory In the Test Run mode press the TOOL TABLE soft key to edit It To open the tool table TOOL T Select any machine operating mode ue Press the TOOL TABLE soft key to select the tool Y table EDIT Set the EDIT soft key to ON OFF on Display only specific tool types filter setting Press the TABLE FILTER soft key fourth soft key row Select the tool type by pressing a soft key The TNC only shows tools of the type selected Cancel filter Press the tool type selected before again or select another tool type The ma
283. lta values 123 Entering into tables 124 Tool length 122 Tool measurement 126 Tool name 122 Tool number 122 Tool radius 123 Tool table Editing functions 128 Editing exiting 127 Inout possibilities 124 Touch probe monitoring 210 Trigonometric functions 391 Trigonometry 391 U Unit of measure selection 97 Universal drilling 233 237 USB devices connecting removing 95 User parameters General For 3 D touch probes 500 Machine specitic 498 j il V Version numbers 484 Visual display unit 31 W Working plane tilting the 305 Manually 62 Workpiece blank defining a 97 Workpiece positions Absolute 77 Incremental 77 Workpiece presetting 54 Workspace monitoring 463 466 520 Table of Cycles 4 14 19 20 21 22 23 24 26 32 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 Pocket milling Circular pocket Datum shift Mirror image Dwell time Rotation Scaling factor Program call Oriented spindle stop Contour definition Working plane Contour data SL Il Pilot drilling SL Il Rough out SL Il Floor finishing SL Il Side finishing SL II Axis specitic scaling Tolerance Drilling Reaming Boring Universal drilling Back boring Universal pecking Tapping with a floating tap holder new Rigid tapping new Bore milling HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Page 272 Page 278 Page 345 Page 350 Page 363 Page 352 Pa
284. lways identified by a folder symbol to the left and the directory name to the right A subdirectory is displayed to the right of and below its parent directory A box with the symbol in front of the folder symbol indicates that there are further subdirectories which can be shown with the key or ENT The wide window on the right shows you all files that are stored in the selected directory Each file is shown with additional information illustrated in the table below FILE NAME Name with an extension separated by a dot file type BYTE File size in bytes STATUS File properties E Program is selected in the Programming mode of operation 5 Program is selected in the Test Run mode of operation M Program is selected in a Program Run mode of operation File is protected against editing and erasure DATE Date on which file was last changed TIME Time at which file was last changed 84 Manual operation Programming ETEA SL Zyklen H HEBEL H Bo PLC N z ESENCA TNC nc_prog screens H A config wA ne_prog Tt File name Bytes Status Date Time Auto_Tast Man_Tast 04 06 2008 11 48 08 screens 7 2141 04 06 2008 11 32 38 s SHOW 07_de H 2116 04 06 2008 11 06 10 test H 153 04 06 2008 11 44 16 table 1110 H 951 25 02 2008 16 39 56 KE 113 h 1228 M 03 06 2008 07 52 44 14 H 418 04 06 2008 11 26 58 Z h 106 25 02 2008 16 39 56 1 gt 3 H 102 25 02 2008 16 39 56 E 4 H 102 25 02 2008 16 40 08 456 h
285. m oO m 7 H Z Go to end of program m o k Change the position of the current block on the screen Press this soft key to display a additional program blocks that are programmed before the current block Change the position of the current block on the screen Press this soft key to display additional program blocks that are programmed after the current block Move from one block to the next Select individual words in a block D B To select a certain block press the GOTO key enter the desired block number and confirm with the ENT key ao amp HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Programs O J as Q lt T a j il 4 4 Creating and aa Programs Set the selected word to zero CE Erase an Incorrect number Clear a non blinking error message 188 amp uS GL Delete the selected word ms a HE Delete the selected block g m m O Erase cycles and program sections g m m Delete individual characters Insert the block that was last edited or deleted INSERT NC BLOCK ji B a Inserting blocks at any desired location Select the block after which you want to insert a new block and initiate the dialog Editing and inserting words Select a word in a block and overwrite It with the new one The plain language dialog is available while the word is highlighted To accept the change press the END key If you want to insert a wor
286. m Start 11 7 Optional Block Skip Function In a test run or program run the TNC can skip over blocks that begin with a slash To run or test the program without the blocks preceded by a slash set the soft key to ON To run or test the program with the blocks preceded by aslash set the soft key to OFF CS This function does not work for TOOL DEF blocks After a power interruption the control returns to the most recently selected setting 11 7 Optional Block Skip Inserting the character In the Programming mode you select the block in which the character is to be Inserted TEJ Select the HIDE BLOCK soft key BLOCK Erasing the character In the Programming mode you select the block in which the character is to be deleted woe select the SHOW BLOCK soft key BLOCK 474 11 8 Optional Program Run Interruption Function The TNC optionally interrupts the program run or test run at blocks containing M01 If you use M01 in the Program Run mode the TNC does not switch off the spindle or coolant Do not interrupt Program Run or Test Run at blocks containing M01 Set soft key to OFF Interrupt Program Run or Test Run at blocks containing M01 Set soft key to ON HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Optional Program Run Interruption q k il MOD Functions 12 1 Selecting MOD Functions 12 1 Selecting MOD Functions The MOD functions provide additional input possibilities an
287. m name See File management File name Program Run Executing 468 Interrupting 468 Mid program startup 471 Optional block skip 474 Overview 467 Resuming after an interruption 470 P Program sections copying 104 Programming graphics 180 Programming tool movements 99 Program section repeat 372 Projection in three planes 458 Q Q parameter programming 386 434 Additional functions 397 Basic arithmetic assign add subtract multiply divide square root 389 Circle calculations 393 If then decisions 394 Programming notes 387 435 436 437 438 439 441 Trigonometric functions 391 Q parameters Checking 396 Formatted output 402 Preassigned 442 Transferring values to the Pi lt a 415 413 R Radius compensation 135 Input 136 Outside corners inside corners 137 Rapid traverse 120 Reaming 229 Rectangular pocket Rectangular pockets Finishing 274 Roughing 272 Rectangular stud finishing 276 Reference points crossing over 46 Reference system 75 Replacing texts 106 Retraction from the contour 209 Returning to the contour 472 Rotary axis Reducing display M94 214 Shorter path traverse M126 213 Rotation 352 Rough out See SL Cycles Rough out Ruled surface 334 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 S Scaling factor 353 Screen layout 32 Search function 105 Secondary axes
288. m with CYCL CALL separate block or M99 blockwise or M89 executed after every positioning block Example Program call A callable program 50 Is to be called into a program via a cycle call 364 CYCL DEF 12 0 PGM CALL CYCL DEF 12 1 LOT31 9 M99 OOTO OOT OTO O OOM CMO TOTO TONO eee eee ee eo eo eo we ww 8 Example NC blocks O MONOTONO RONO Wi OFF ORS Olt OSORIO REV HOT OREC 0 BEGIN PGM LOT31 MM END PGM oot ee eo ee ee ee eee el ORIENTED SPINDLE STOP Cycle 13 F Machine and control must be specially prepared by the 4 machine tool builder for use of this cycle E Cycle 13 is used internally for machining cycles 202 204 and 209 Please note that if required you must program Cycle 13 again in your NC program after one of the machining cycles mentioned above The TNC can control the machine tool spindle and rotate it to a given angular position Oriented spindle stops are required for Tool changing systems with a defined tool change position Orientation of the transmitter receiver window of HEIDENHAIN 3 D touch probes with infrared transmission Effect The angle of orientation defined in the cycle is positioned to by entering M19 or M20 depending on the machine If you program M19 or M20 without having defined Cycle 13 the TNC positions the machine tool spindle to an angle that has been set by the machine manufacturer see your machine manual 13 a Angle of orie
289. me can be used for such purposes as chip breaking Effect The cycle becomes effective as soon as It is defined in the program Modal conditions such as spindle rotation are not affected Dwell time in seconds Enter the dwell time in seconds Input range 0 to 3600 s 1 hour in steps of 0 001 seconds HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 8 8 Special Cycles A 77 HEIDENHAIN vo E A a4 SS Example NC blocks j il 8 8 Special Cycles PROGRAM CALL Cycle 12 Routines that you have programmed such as special drilling cycles or geometrical modules can be written as main programs and then called like fixed cycles f 12 PGM CALL Before programming note the following The program you are calling must be stored on the hard disk of your TNC If the program you are defining to be a cycle is located in the same directory as the program you are calling it from you need only to enter the program name If the program you are defining to be a cycle is not located in the same directory as the program you are calling it from you must enter the complete path for example TNCAKLAR35 FK1 50 H If you want to define an ISO program to be a cycle enter the file type behind the program name Program name Enter the name of the program you want to call and if necessary the directory it is located In or activate the file select dialog with the SELECT soft key and select the program to be called Call the progra
290. minus the set up clearance and then at the feed rate for countersinking to the countersinking depth If a safety clearance to the side has been entered the TNC immediately positions the tool at the feed rate for pre positioning to the countersinking depth Then depending on the available space the TNC makes a tangential approach to the core diameter either tangentially from the center or with a pre positioning move to the side and follows a circular path Countersinking at front 5 The tool moves at the feed rate for pre positioning to the sinking depth at front 6 The TNC positions the tool without compensation from the center on a semicircle to the offset at front and then follows a circular path at the feed rate for countersinking 7 The tool then moves in a semicircle to the hole center Thread milling 8 The TNC moves the tool at the programmed feed rate for pre positioning to the starting plane for the thread The starting plane is determined from the thread pitch and the type of milling climb or up cut 9 Then the tool moves tangentially on a helical path to the thread diameter and mills the thread with a 360 helical motion 10 After this the tool departs the contour tangentially and returns to the starting point in the working plane HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 8 2 Cycles for Drilling p and Thread Milling j il 8 2 Cycles for Drilling Ming and Thread Milling 11 At the end of the cycle the TNC retracts the t
291. n 17 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 XI XI X XIX XXI X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X j il 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 430 431 450 451 480 481 482 483 534 Measure angle Measure hole Measure circle outside Measure rectangle inside Measure rectangle outside Measure inside width Measure ridge outside Measure coordinate Measure bolt hole circle Measure plane Save kinematics Measure kinematics Calibrate TT Measure Inspect the tool length Measure Inspect the tool length Measure Inspect the tool length and the tool radius Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 X X KL XI X X XI X X X X XI X X XJ X Overview of DIN ISO Functions of the TNC 620 MOO Program STOP Spindle STOP Coolant OFF M136 Feed rate F in millimeters per spindle revolution M01 Optional program STOP M137 Cancel M136 M02 STOP program run Spindle STOP Coolant OFF CLEAR status display depending on machine M138 Select tilting axes ____ParameterVGotoDlockt S M Delete basic rotation 7 i gt eee ee M144 Compensate the machine s kinematic configuration ce le a for ACTUAL NOMINA
292. n Cycles fe Transformation Cycles E i u 8 7 Coord If you program the position of the working plane via spatial angles the TNC will calculate the required angle positions of the tilted axes automatically and will store these in the parameters Q120 A axis to Q122 C axis If two solutions are possible the TNC will choose the shorter path from the zero position of the rotary axes The axes are always rotated in the same sequence for calculating the tilt of the plane The TNC first rotates the A axis then the B axis and finally the C axis Cycle 19 becomes effective as soon as It is defined in the program As soon as you move an axis in the tilted system the compensation for this specific axis is activated You must move all axes to activate compensation for all axes If you set the function Tilting program run to Active in the Manual Operation mode see Tilting the Working Plane Software Option 1 page 62 the angular value entered in this menu is overwritten by Cycle 19 WORKING PLANE Tilt axis and tilt angle Enter the axes of rotation is together with the associated tilt angles The rotary axes A B and C are programmed using soft keys CS Because nonprogrammed rotary axis values are interpreted as unchanged you should always define all three spatial angles even if one or more angles are at zero If the TNC automatically positions the rotary axes you can enter the following parameters Feed rate
293. n be edited in an NC program and to ensure that other changes are not made to copies of the same table rows at the same time This results in the following transaction sequence 1 AQ parameter is specified for each column to be edited The Q parameter is assigned to a column it is bound SQL BIND Tabelle Result w123 2 Address table file select rows and transfer them to the result set SOL Select a SOL Fetch ge ABC In addition you define which columns are transferred to the result set SQL SELECT SOL Commit SOL Update oe You can lock the selected rows Other processes can then read N these rows but cannot change the table entries You should 2h Hellsac pha always lock the selected rows when you are going to make changes SQL SELECT FOR UPDATE rahe SQL Server 3 Read rows from the result set change rows or insert new rows Transfer one row of the result set into the Q parameters of your NC program SQL FETCH Prepare changes in the Q parameters and transfer one row from the result set SQL UPDATE Prepare new table row in the Q parameters and transfer into the result set as a new row SQL INSERT Conclude transaction f changes insertions were made the data from the result set is placed in the table file The data is now saved in the file Any locks are canceled and the result set is released SQL COMMIT f table entries were not changed or inser
294. n is programmed together with the first contour point Pa in the APPR block The DEP blocks automatically discard the tool radius compensation Contour approach without radius compensation If you program the APPR block with RO the TNC will calculate the tool path for a tool radius of 0 mm and a radius compensation RR The radius compensation is necessary to set the direction of contour approach and departure in the APPR DEP LN and APPR DEP CT functions In addition you must program both coordinates in the working plane in the first traverse block after APPR 152 Approaching on a straight line with tangential connection APPR LT The tool moves on a straight line from the starting point Ps to an auxiliary point Py It then moves to the first contour point Pa on a straight line that connects tangentially to the contour The auxiliary point Py is separated trom the first contour point Pa by the distance m gt Use any path function to approach the starting point Ps gt Initiate the dialog with the APPR DEP key and APPR LT soft key APPR LT gt Coordinates of the first contour point Pa i gt LEN Distance from the auxiliary point Py to the first contour point Pa gt Radius compensation RR RL for machining Example NC blocks Approaching on a straight line perpendicular to the first contour point APPR LN The tool moves on a straight line from the starting point Ps to an auxiliary point Py It then moves to the first
295. n moves at FMAX to the set up clearance above the first plunging depth The tool then advances with another infeed at the programmed teed rate F The TNC repeats this process 2 to 4 until the programmed depth is reached The tool is retracted from the hole bottom to the set up clearance or if programmed to the 2nd set up clearance at rapid traverse FMAX HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 8 2 Cycles for Drilling Tapping and Thread Milling i i 8 2 Cycles for Drilling WA oinc and Thread Milling 228 gt Set up clearance Q200 incremental value Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface Enter a positive value gt Depth Q201 incremental value Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of hole tip of drill taper gt Feed rate for plunging Q206 Traversing speed of the tool during drilling in mm min gt Plunging depth Q202 incremental value Infeed per cut The depth does not have to be a multiple of the plunging depth The TNC will go to depth in one movement If E the plunging depth is equal to the depth the plunging depth is greater than the depth gt Dwell time at top Q210 Time in seconds that the tool remains at set up clearance after having been retracted from the hole for chip release gt Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute value Coordinate of the workpiece surface 2nd set up clearance Q204 incremental value Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no
296. n was not correct The TNC clears this note upon the next valid input Saving service files If necessary you can save the Current status of the TNC and make it available to a service technician for evaluation A group of service files is saved error and keystroke log files as well as other files that contain information about the current status of the machine and the machining If you repeat the Save service data function the previously saved group of service data Tiles is overwritten Saving service files Open the error window Press the LOG FILES soft key LOG FILES SAVE To save service files press the SAVE SERVICE FILES FILES soft key HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 T S D T V L 5 1 Entering HB Related Data 5 1 Entering Tool Related Data Feed rate F The feed rate F is the speed in millimeters per minute or inches per minute at which the tool center point moves The maximum feed rates can be different for the individual axes and are set in machine parameters Input You can enter the feed rate in the TOOL CALL block and in every positioning block see Creating the program blocks with the path function keys on page 149 Rapid traverse If you wish to program rapid traverse enter FMAX To enter FMAX press the ENT key or the FMAX soft key when the dialog question FEED RATE F appears on the TNC screen CS To move your machine at rapid traverse you can
297. ncel M128 The TNC also cancels M128 if you select a new program in a program run operating mode Example NC blocks Feed rate of 1000 mm min for compensation movements 216 i E Working with Cycles 8 1 Working with Cycles Frequently recurring machining cycles that comprise several working steps are stored in the TNC memory as standard cycles Coordinate transformations and other special cycles are also provided as standard cycles for an overview see Cycles Overview page 220 Fixed cycles with numbers 200 and above use Q parameters as transfer parameters Parameters with specific functions that are required in several cycles always have the same number For example Q200 is always assigned the set up clearance Q202 the plunging depth etc Fixed cycles sometimes execute extensive operations w For safety reasons you should run a graphical program test before machining see Test run on page 462 Machine specific cycles Advanced programming features software option In addition to the HEIDENHAIN cycles many machine tool builders offer their own cycles in the TNC These cycles are available in a separate cycle number range Cycles 300 to 399 Machine specific cycles that are to be defined through the CYCLE DEF key Cycles 500 to 599 Machine specific cycles that are to be defined through the TOUCH PROBE key w Refer to your machine manual for a description of the specific
298. nd 29 Feed rate in mm min on rotary axes M116 Tilting the machining plane Cycle 19 and 3 D ROT soft key in the manual operating mode Circle in 3 axes with tilted working plane Block processing time 1 5 ms instead of 6 ms 5 axis interpolation 3 D machining I M128 Maintaining the position of the tool tip when positioning with tilted axes TCPM I M144 Compensating the machine s kinematics configuration for ACTUAL NOMINAL positions at end of block Additional finishing roughing and tolerance for rotary axes parameters in Cycle 32 G62 LN blocks 3 D compensation Touch probe cycles Compensation of tool misalignment in manual mode Compensation of tool misalignment in automatic mode Datum setting In manual mode Datum setting In automatic mode Automatic workpiece measurement Automatic tool measurement FK free contour programming E Programming in HEIDENHAIN conversational format with graphic support for workpiece drawings not dimensioned for NC Machining cycles E Peck drilling reaming boring counterboring centering Cycles 201 to 205 208 240 E Milling of internal and external threads Cycles 262 to 265 267 E Finishing of rectangular and circular pockets and studs Cycles 212 to 215 Clearing level and oblique surfaces Cycles 230 to 232 E Straight slots and circular slots Cycles 210 211 E Linear and circular point patterns Cycles 220 221 E Contour train contour pocket al
299. nd Thread Milling 256 gt Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute value Coordinate of the workpiece surface 2nd set up clearance Q204 incremental value Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece clamping devices can occur Feed rate for countersinking Q254 Traversing speed of the tool during countersinking in mm min gt Feed rate for milling Q207 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min while milling m x D 3 p D Z O T e zA A THREAD DRILLING MILLING Cycle 264 Advanced programming features software option 1 The TNC positions the tool in the spindle axis at rapid traverse FMAX to the programmed set up clearance above the workpiece surface Drilling 2 The tool drills to the first plunging depth at the programmed feed rate for plunging 3 If you have programmed chip breaking the tool then retracts by the entered retraction value If you are working without chip breaking the tool is moved at rapid traverse to the set up clearance and then at FMAX to the entered starting position above the first plunging depth 4 The tool then advances with another infeed at the programmed feed rate 5 The TNC repeats this process 2 to 4 until the programmed total hole depth is reached Countersinking at front 6 The tool moves at the feed rate for pre positioning to the sinking depth at front 7 The TNC positions the tool
300. ng speed of the tool during drilling in mm min Plunging depth Q202 incremental value Infeed per cut The depth does not have to be a multiple of the plunging depth The TNC will go to depth in one movement If the plunging depth is equal to the depth the plunging depth is greater than the depth Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute value Coordinate of the workpiece surface 2nd set up clearance Q204 incremental value Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece clamping devices can OCCUTr Decrement Q212 incremental value Value by which the TNC decreases the plunging depth Q202 Minimum plunging depth Q205 incremental value If you have entered a decrement the TNC limits the plunging depth to the value entered with Q205 Upper advanced stop distance Q258 incremental value Set up clearance for rapid traverse positioning when the TNC moves the tool again to the current plunging depth after retraction from the hole value for the first plunging depth Lower advanced stop distance Q259 incremental value Set up clearance for rapid traverse positioning when the TNC moves the tool again to the current plunging depth after retraction from the hole value for the last plunging depth CS If you enter Q258 not equal to Q259 the TNC will change the advance stop distances between the first and last plunging depths at the same rate 238 gt Infeed depth for chip break
301. ngential connection Retract in the tool axis end program O J O b as Oo 6 6 Path Contours FK Free Contour Programmi j i 7 1 Entering a Pinctions M and STOP 7 1 Entering Miscellaneous Functions M and STOP Fundamentals With the TNC s miscellaneous functions also called M functions you can affect Program run e g a program interruption Machine functions such as switching spindle rotation and coolant supply on and off The path behavior of the tool The machine tool builder may add some M functions that os are not described in this User s Manual Also the machine tool builder can change the meaning and effect of the M functions described here Refer to your machine manual You can enter up to two M functions at the end of a positioning block or in a separate block The TNC displays the following dialog question Miscellaneous function M You usually enter only the number of the M function in the programming dialog Some M functions can be programmed with additional parameters In this case the dialog is continued for the parameter Input In the Manual Operation and Electronic Handwheel modes of operation the M functions are entered with the M soft key Please note that some M functions become effective at uy the start of a positioning block and others at the end regardless of their position in the NC block M functions come into effect in the block
302. ngle CCA and arc radius R The starting and end points on the contour can be connected with four arcs of the same radius Smaller arc CCA lt 180 Enter the radius with a positive sign R gt 0 Larger arc CCA gt 180 Enter the radius with a negative sign R lt 0 The direction of rotation determines whether the arc Is curving outward convex or curving Inward concave Convex Direction of rotation DR with radius compensation RL Concave Direction of rotation DR with radius compensation RL Example NC blocks 6 4 Path vontours caesian Coordinates O r O r O r CS The distance from the starting and end points of the arc diameter cannot be greater than the diameter of the arc The maximum radius is 99 9999 m You can also enter rotary axes A B and C HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 i i 6 4 Path Contours cl sian Coordinates Circular path CT with tangential connection The tool moves on an arc that starts tangentially to the previously programmed contour element A transition between two contour elements is called tangential when there is no kink or corner at the intersection between the two contours the transition is smooth The contour element to which the tangential arc connects must be programmed immediately before the CT block This requires at least two positioning blocks cry Coordinates of the arc end point and if necessary Feed rate F Miscellaneous function M Example NC bl
303. ning the word you wish to find Select the Search function The TNC superimposes the search window and displays the available search functions in the soft key row Enter the text to be searched for Please note that the search is case sensitive Then confirm with the ENT key Enter the text to be inserted Please note that the entry is case sensitive Start the search process The TNC moves to the next occurrence of the text you are searching for To replace the text and then move to the next occurrence of the text press the REPLACE soft key To replace all text occurrences press the REPLACE ALL soft key To skip the text and move to Its next occurrence press the FIND soft key REPLACE 4 4 Creating and aa Programs 10 g End the search function 7 H zZ 106 4 5 Interactive Programming Graphics Generating Not generating graphics during programming While you are writing the part program you can have the TNC generate a 2 D pencil trace graphic of the programmed contour To switch the screen layout to displaying program blocks to the left and graphics to the right press the SPLIT SCREEN key and PROGRAM GRAPHICS soft key auTO Set the AUTO DRAW soft key to ON While you are a entering the program lines the TNC generates each path contour you program in the graphics window in the right screen half If you do not wish to have the TNC generate graphics during programming set the AUTO DRAW sof
304. ning with MDI Select the axis of the rotary table enter the rotation angle you wrote down previously and set the feed rate For example L C 2 561 F50 E Conclude entry O Press the machine START button The rotation of the table corrects the misalignment 70 Protecting and erasing programs in MDI The MDI file is generally intended for short programs that are only needed temporarily Nevertheless you can store a program if necessary by proceeding as described below Select the Programming and Editing mode of operation Press the PGM MGT key program management to call the file manager Move the highlight to the MDI file cory To select the file copying function press the COPY pacha soft key BOREHOLE Enter the name under which you want to save the current contents of the MDI file Copy the file Press the END soft key to close the Tile manager END For more information see Copying a single file page 87 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 3 1 Programming and Executing Simple Machining ons S Programming Fundamentals of NC File Management Programming Aids a er c 4 1 Fundamentals Position encoders and reference marks The machine axes are equipped with position encoders that register the positions of the machine table or tool Linear axes are usually equipped with linear encoders rotary tables and tilting axes with angle encode
305. ning with Manual Data Input MDI OnNOuUDWNPe In the Manual mode and Electronic Handwheel mode the status 1 4 Status Displays 3 a BCL BEF B16 CIRGHLAR POCKET Tilt angie display appears in the large window 91 S OVR 11 50 K Basic rotation 0 14477 150 F OUR See eer a ea ee 31 85 imay 25 64228zZ t134 992 C 0 000 S E321 r90 os CTL w e o F mm min Our 150 M Tr 4265 STATUS STATUS TOOL Sna STATUS OF STATUS OF PGM Pos STATUS EIT M FUNCT PARAM HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 37 1 4 Status Dispi ANE Information in the status display ACTL X Y Z GM Over 0 27 F B Actual or nominal coordinates of the current position Machine axes the TNC displays auxiliary axes in lower case letters The sequence and quantity of displayed axes is determined by the machine tool builder Refer to your machine manual for more information Tool number T The displayed feed rate in inches corresponds to one tenth of the effective value Spindle speed S feed rate F and active M functions Axis locked Override setting in percent Axis can be moved with the handwheel Axes are moving under a basic rotation Axes are moving in a tilted working plane The function M128 TCPM is active No active program Program run started Stops the program run Program run is being aborted Additional status displays
306. nly on rotary tables M116 cannot be used with swivel heads If your machine is equipped with a table head combination the TNC ignores the swivel head rotary axes The TNC interprets the programmed feed rate In a rotary axis in mm min With this miscellaneous function the TNC calculates the feed rate for each block at the start of the block With a rotary axis the feed rate is not changed during execution of the block even if the tool moves toward the center of the rotary axis Effect M116 is effective in the working plane You use M117 to cancel M116 M116 is also canceled at the end of the program M116 becomes effective at the start of block 212 Shorter path traverse of rotary axes M126 Standard behavior The standard behavior of the TNC while positioning rotary axes whose display has been reduced to values less than 360 is decided by the machine tool builder They decide whether the TNC should consider the difference between nominal and actual position or whether the TNC should always even without M126 choose the shortest path to the programmed position Examples 350 10 340 10 340 330 Behavior with M126 With M126 the TNC will move the axis on the shorter path of traverse for rotary axes whose display is reduced to values less than 360 Examples 350 10 20 10 340 30 Effect M126 becomes effective at the start of block To cancel M126 enter M127 At the end of program
307. ntation Enter the angle according to i the reference axis of the working plane Input range 0 to 360 Input resolution 0 1 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 8 8 Special Cycles Example NC blocks j il 8 8 Special Cycles TOLERANCE Cycle 32 Machine and control must be specially prepared by the C machine tool builder for use of this cycle With the entries in Cycle 32 you can influence the result of HSC machining with respect to accuracy surface definition and speed inasmuch as the TNC has been adapted to the machine s characteristics The TNC automatically smoothens the contour between two path elements whether compensated or not The tool has constant contact with the workpiece surface and therefore reduces wear on the machine tool The tolerance defined in the cycle also affects the traverse paths on circular arcs If necessary the TNC automatically reduces the programmed feed rate so that the program can be machined at the fastest possible speed without short pauses for computing time Even if the TNC does not move with reduced speed it will always comply with the tolerance that you have defined The larger you define the tolerance the faster the TNC can move the axes Smoothing the contour results in a certain amount of deviation from the contour The size of this contour error tolerance value is set ina machine parameter by the machine manufacturer With CYCLE 32 you can change the pre set t
308. ntil all infeeds have been machined In the last infeed simply the finishing allowance entered is milled at the finishing feed rate At the end of the cycle the TNC retracts the tool at FMAX to the 2nd set up clearance Before programming note the following Enter the 2nd set up clearance in Q204 so that no collision between tool and clamping devices can occur 338 232 Machining strategy 0 1 2 Q389 Specify how the TNC is to machine the surface 0 Meander machining stepover at positioning feed rate outside the surface to be machined 1 Meander machining stepover at feed rate for milling within the surface to be machined 2 Line by line machining retraction and stepover at the positioning feed rate Starting point in 1st axis 0225 absolute value Starting point coordinate of the surface to be machined in the reference axis of the working plane Starting point in 2nd axis Q226 absolute value Starting point coordinate of the surface to be multipass milled in the minor axis of the working plane Starting point in 3rd axis Q227 absolute value Coordinate of the workpiece surface used to calculate the infeeds End point in 3rd axis Q386 absolute value Coordinate in the spindle axis to which the surface is to be face milled First side length 0218 incremental value Length of the surface to be machined in the reference axis of the working plane Use the algebraic sign to specify the direction of the first
309. ntour and results from your input in the DEP block If the DEP block also contains a Z axis coordinate the TNC will first move the tool to Py in the working plane and then move it to the entered height in the tool axis APPR Approach oach and Departure 6 3 Contour App DEP Departure L Line C Circle T Tangential smooth connection N Normal perpendicular E The TNC does not check whether the programmed contour will be damaged when moving from the present position to the auxiliary point Py Use the test graphics to simulate approach and departure before executing the part program With the APPR LT APPR LN and APPR CT functions the TNC moves the tool from the present position to the auxiliary point P4 at the feed rate that was last programmed With the APPR LCT function the TNC moves to the auxiliary point Py at the feed rate programmed with the APPR block If no feed rate is programmed before the approach block the TNC generates an error message HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 151 il ch and Departure 6 3 Contour Approz Polar coordinates You can also program the contour points for the following approach departure functions over polar coordinates APPR LT becomes APPR PLT APPR LN becomes APPR PLN APPR CT becomes APPR PCT APPR LCT becomes APPR PLCT DEP LCT becomes DEP PLCT Select by soft key an approach or departure function then press the orange P key Radius compensation The tool radius compensatio
310. o 3 decimal places To select the inch system e g X 0 6216 inches set the Change mm inches function to inches The value is displayed to 4 decimal places If you would like to activate the inch display the TNC shows the feed rate in inch min In an inch program you must enter the feed rate larger by a factor of 10 482 12 5 Displaying Operating Times Function CS The machine tool builder can provide further operating time displays PLC 1 to PLC 8 The machine tool manual provides further information The MACHINE TIME soft key enables you to see various types of operating times Control ON Operating time of the control since being put into service Machine ON Operating time of the machine tool since being put into service Program Run Duration of controlled operation since being put into service HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Manual operation ee EA 8 H T MOD Operating times a S Control on 337 49 59 Machine on 58 14 05 6 4 2 othe Program run 4 24 11 16 Time warten vor 0 29 15 9 9 T 44 000 90 Code number 91 S OVR 11 46 i 150 F OVR POSITIONZ MACHINE che CANCEL INPUT PGM TIME E 12 5 Displaying Operating Times i il 12 6 Entering Code Numbers 12 6 Entering Code Numbers Function The TNC requires a code number for the following functions Select user parameters 123 Enable access to Ethernet configuration NEIT123 Enable special functions for 555343 Q pa
311. ocket for calculating the pre position Enter the workpiece blank diameter to be less than the diameter of the finished part Finished part diameter Q223 Diameter of the finished pocket Enter the diameter of the finished part to be greater than the workpiece blank diameter and greater than the tool diameter HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Example NC blocks 8 3 Cycles for eet Studs and Slots i i CIRCULAR STUD FINISHING Cycle 215 Advanced programming features software option 1 The TNC automatically moves the tool in the spindle axis to the set up clearance or if programmed to the 2nd set up clearance and subsequently to the center of the stud 2 From the stud center the tool moves in the working plane to the starting point for machining The starting point lies to the right of the stud at a distance of approx twice the tool radius 3 If the tool is at the 2nd set up clearance it moves at rapid traverse FMAX to the set up clearance and from there advances to the first plunging depth at the feed rate for plunging 4 The tool then moves tangentially to the contour of the finished part and using climb milling machines one revolution 5 The tool then departs the contour on a tangential path and returns to the starting point in the working plane This process 3 to 5 is repeated until the programmed depth is reached At the end of the cycle the TNC retracts the tool at FMAX to the set up clearance or if programmed
312. ocks CS A tangential arc is a two dimensional operation the coordinates in the CT block and in the contour element preceding it must be in the same plane as the arc 166 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Define blank form for graphic workpiece simulation Call tool in the spindle axis and with the spindle speed S Retract tool in the spindle axis at rapid traverse FMAX Pre position the tool Move to working depth at feed rate F 1000 mm min Approach the contour at point 1 on a straight line with tangential connection Move to point 2 Point 3 first straight line for corner 3 Program chamfer with length 10 mm Point 4 2nd straight line for corner 3 1st straight line for corner 4 Program chamfer with length 20 mm Move to last contour point 1 second straight line for corner 4 Depart the contour on a straight line with tangential connection Retract in the tool axis end program 167 6 4 Path vontours Caa Coordinates 6 4 Path Contours cl sian Coordinates 68 Define blank form for graphic workpiece simulation Call tool in the spindle axis and with the spindle speed S Retract tool in the spindle axis at rapid traverse FMAX Pre position the tool Move to working depth at feed rate F 1000 mm min Approach the contour at point 1 on a circular arc with tangential connection Point 2 first straight line for corner 2 Insert radius with R 10 mm feed rate 150 mm min Move to point 3 Starting point
313. of the workpiece In mm min Climb or up cut 0351 Type of milling operation with Mos 1 climb milling 1 up cut milling Plunging depth Q202 incremental value Infeed per cut The depth does not have to be a multiple of the plunging depth The TNC will go to depth in one movement if the plunging depth is equal to the depth the plunging depth is greater than the depth Upper advanced stop distance 0258 incremental value Set up clearance for rapid traverse positioning when the TNC moves the tool again to the current plunging depth after retraction from the hole Infeed depth for chip breaking 0257 incremental value Depth at which TNC carries out chip breaking There is no chip breaking if O is entered Retraction rate for chip breaking Q256 incremental value Value by which the TNC retracts the tool during chip breaking Depth at front 0358 incremental value Distance between tool tip and the top surface of the workpiece for countersinking at the front of the tool Countersinking offset at front 0359 incremental value Distance by which the TNC moves the tool center away from the hole center HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 259 8 2 Cycles for Drilling p and Thread Milling 8 2 Cycles for Drilling ing and Thread Milling 260 gt Set up clearance Q200 incremental value Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface gt Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute value Coordinate of the workpiec
314. of the tool The tool must already be defined in a TOOL DEF block or in the tool table The TNC automatically places the tool name in quotation marks The tool name always refers to the entry in the active tool table TOOL T If you wish to call a tool with other compensation values also enter the index you defined in the tool table after the decimal point To select a tool from the tool table press the SELECT soft key The TNC shows the contents of the tool table Use the arrow keys to select a tool and press OK to transfer it to the pocket table Working spindle axis X Y Z Enter the tool axis Spindle speed S Enter the spindle speed directly in rom Alternatively you can define the cutting speed Vc in m min Press the VC soft key Feed rate F F mm min or 0 1 inch min is effective until you program a new feed rate in a positioning or TOOL CALL block Tool length oversize DL Enter the delta value for the tool length Tool radius oversize DR Enter the delta value for the tool radius Tool radius oversize DR2 Enter the delta value for the tool radius 2 Example Tool call Call tool number 5 in the tool axis Z with a spindle speed of 2500 rom and a feed rate of 350 mm min The tool length is to be programmed with an oversize of 0 2 mm the tool radius 2 with an oversize of 0 05 mm and the tool radius with an undersize of 1 mm The character D preceding L and R designates delta values Tool preselection with tool table
315. ogrammed The indexed row remains All other rows are deleted from the result set The transaction is not concluded A lock set with SELECT FOR UPDATE remains for the indexed row For all other rows It Is reset Parameter no for result O parameter in which the ae SOL server reports the result 0 No error occurred 1 Error occurred incorrect handle Data bank SQL access ID O parameter with the handle for identifying the result set also see SQL SELECT Data bank Index for SQL result Row that is to remain in the result set Either enter the row number directly or program the Q parameter containing the index HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 42 m m x x D D 3 3 p 2 D D Tables with SQL Commands hi 10 9 Acce 10 Entering Formulas Directly 10 10 Entering Formulas Directly Entering formulas You can enter mathematical formulas that include several operations directly into the part program by soft key Press the FORMULA soft key to call the formula functions The TNC displays the following soft keys in several soft key rows Addition Example Q10 Q1 Q5 Subtraction Example 025 Q7 Q108 Multiplication Example Q12 5 Q5 Division Example Q25 Q1 Q2 Opening parenthesis Example Q12 Q1 Q2 Q3 Closing parenthesis Example Q12 Q1 Q2 Q3 Square of a value Example Q15 SQ 5 uw 9 Square root Example Q22 SQRT 25 SQRT Sine of an angle
316. ogrammed feed rate F 3 Ifyou have programmed chip breaking the tool then retracts by the entered retraction value If you are working without chip breaking the tool retracts at the retraction feed rate to the set up clearance remains there if programmed for the entered dwell time and advances again at FMAX to the set up clearance above the first PLUNGING DEPTH 4 The tool then advances with another infeed at the programmed feed rate If programmed the plunging depth is decreased after each infeed by the decrement 5 The TNC repeats this process 2 to 4 until the programmed total hole depth is reached 6 The tool remains at the hole bottom if programmed for the entered dwell time to cut free and then retracts to the set up clearance at the retraction feed rate If programmed the tool moves to the 2nd set up clearance at FMAX CS Before programming note the following Program a positioning block for the starting point hole center in the working plane with radius compensation RO The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH determines the working direction If you program DEPTH 0 the cycle will not be executed Use the machine parameter displayDepthErr to define uy whether if a positive depth is entered the TNC should output an error message on or not off Danger of collision Keep in mind that the TNC reverses the calculation for pre positioning when a positive depth is entered This means that t
317. ol retraction at the end of the cycle Plunging depth O10 incremental value Dimension by which the tool plunges in each infeed Feed rate for plunging Q11 Traversing speed of the tool in the spindle axis Feed rate for milling O12 Traversing speed of the tool in the working plane Climb or up cut Up cut 1 Q15 Climb milling Input value 1 Up cut milling Inout value 1 To enable climb milling and up cut milling alternately in several infeeds Input value O Program defaults for cylindrical surface machining cycles software option 1 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 8 5 SL Cycles o i CYLINDER SURFACE Cycle 27 software option 1 machine tool builder for use of this cycle V S 7 Machine and control must be specially prepared by the L l V LO lt Before programming note the following 00 Program defaults for cylindrical surface machining cycles see page 315 This cycle enables you to program a contour in two dimensions and then roll it onto a cylindrical surface for 3 D machining Use Cycle 28 if you want to mill guideways on the cylinder The contour is described in a subprogram identified in Cycle 14 CONTOUR GEOMETRY PE In the subprogram you always describe the contour with the coordinates X and Y regardless of which rotary axes exist on your machine This means that the contour description is independent of your machine configuration The path functions
318. older 207 Rigid tapping new 208 Bore milling 209 Tapping with chip breaking 210 Slot with reciprocating plunge 211 Circular slot 212 Rectangular pocket finishing 213 Rectangular stud finishing 214 Circular pocket finishing 215 Circular stud finishing 220 Circular pattern 528 Option 08 Option 08 Option 08 X Option 09 X Option 19 Option 19 Option 19 Option 19 Option 19 X X Option 19 Option 19 Option 19 Option 19 Option 19 Option 19 Option 19 Option 19 Option 19 X Option 08 for MC420 X Option 08 for MC420 X Option 08 for MC420 X X X Option 09 for MC420 X Option 08 for MC420 X X X XI XI X X XI X X X X XI X X XJ X 230 Zo 232 240 247 201 252 253 254 262 263 264 265 267 Linear pattern Multipass milling Ruled surface Face milling Centering Datum setting Rectangular pocket complete Circular pocket complete Slot complete Circular slot complete Thread milling Thread milling countersinking Thread drilling milling Helical thread drilling milling Outside thread milling HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Option 19 Option 19 Option 19 Option 19 Option 19 Option 19 Option 19 Option 19 Option 19 Option 19 Option 19 XI XJ X X X X X X X X X X X X X f il Comparison Miscellaneous functions M00 M01 M02 M03 M05 M06 M08 M09 M13 M14 M30 M89 M90 M9
319. olerance value and select different filter settings provided that your machine manufacturer implements these features E With very small tolerance values the machine cannot cut the contour without jerking These jerking movements are not caused by poor processing power in the TNC but by the fact that in order to machine the contour element transitions very exactly the TNC might have to drastically reduce the speed 366 Influences of the geometry definition in the CAM system The most important factor of influence in offline NC program creation is the chord error S defined in the CAM system The maximum point CAM PP TNC spacing of NC programs generated in a postprocessor PP is defined through the chord error If the chord error is less than or equal to the tolerance value T defined in Cycle 32 then the TNC can smooth the contour points unless any special machine settings limit the programmed feed rate You will achieve optimal smoothing if in Cycle 32 you choose a tolerance value between 110 and 200 of the CAM chord error Programming 8 8 Special Cycles HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 367 il Tolerance value T Permissible contour deviation in Example NC blocks mm or inches with inch programming HSC MODE Finishing 0 Roughing 1 Activate filter f Input value O Milling with increased contour accuracy he TNC uses the filter settings that your machine tool builder has defined for finishing operations Input
320. olute value Absolute coordinate of the workpiece surface gt Set up clearance O6 incremental value Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface Clearance height O7 absolute value Absolute height at which the tool cannot collide with the workpiece for intermediate positioning and retraction at the end of the cycle Inside corner radius O8 Inside corner rounding radius entered value is referenced to the tool midpoint path gt Direction of rotation Clockwise 1 Q9 Machining direction for pockets Q9 1 up cut milling for pocket and island Q9 1 climb milling for pocket and island HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Example NC blocks 30 8 5 SL Cycles 8 5 SL Cycles PILOT DRILLING Cycle 21 Advanced programming features software option CS When calculating the infeed points the TNC does not account for the delta value DR programmed in a TOOL CALL block In narrow areas the TNC may not be able to carry out pilot drilling with a tool that is larger than the rough out tool Cycle execution 1 2 The tool drills from the current position to the first plunging depth at the programmed feed rate F When it reaches the first plunging depth the tool retracts at rapid traverse FMAX to the starting position and advances again to the first plunging depth minus the advanced stop distance t The advanced stop distance is automatically calculated by the control At a total hole dep
321. on Contact your network administrator IP ADDRESS Network address of the control In each of the four adjacent input fields you can enter 3 digits of the IP address With the ENT key you can jump into the next field Your control s network specialist can give you a network address SUBNET MASK Serves to distinguish the net and host ID of the network Your network specialist assigns the subnet mask of the control BROADCAST The broadcast address of the control is needed only if it is different from the standard setting The standard setting is formed from the net and host ID in which all bits are set to 1 ROUTER Network address of default router This entry is required only if your network consists of several subnetworks interconnected by routers CS The entered network configuration does not become effective until the control is rebooted After the network configuration is concluded with the OK button or soft key the control asks for confirmation and reboots 492 Configuring network access to other devices mount S T l ae Programming CS Make sure that the person configuring your TNC is a 14 H i network specialist ene Mount Auto Mount point Mount device 7 config 1 PC N Nde 1pc5323 transfer Sd The parameters username workgroup and password do not futo_Tas ce screens Mount device N Nde 1pc5323 transfer need to be entered in all Windows operating systems snou Eee ae o
322. on RO The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter thread depth determines the working direction If you program the thread DEPTH O the cycle will not be executed The thread diameter is approached in a semi circle from the center A pre positioning movement to the side is carried out if the pitch of the tool diameter is four times smaller than the thread diameter Note that the TNC makes a compensation movement in the tool axis before the approach movement The length of the compensating motion depends on the thread pitch Ensure sufficient space in the hole ath Use the machine parameter displayDepthErr to define whether if a positive depth is entered the TNC should output an error message on or not off Danger of collision Keep in mind that the TNC reverses the calculation for pre positioning when a positive depth is entered his means that the tool moves at rapid traverse in the tool axis at safety clearance below the workpiece surface HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 8 2 Cycles for Drilling Tapping and Thread Milling Megy b il 8 2 Cycles for Drilling I inc and Thread Milling m x D 3 pi D O S e TA A 252 Nominal diameter 0335 Nominal thread diameter gt Thread pitch Q239 Pitch of the thread The algebraic sign differentiates between right hand and left hand threads right hand thread left hand thread gt Thread depth 0201 incremental value Distance between wo
323. ool at rapid traverse to the set up clearance or if programmed to the 2nd set up clearance 254 263 Nominal diameter 0335 Nominal thread diameter Thread pitch Q239 Pitch of the thread The algebraic sign differentiates between right hand and left hand threads right hand thread left hand thread Thread depth Q201 incremental value Distance between workpiece surface and root of thread Countersinking depth 0356 incremental value Distance between tool point and the top surface of the workpiece Feed rate for pre positioning Q253 Traversing speed of the tool when moving In and out of the workpiece In mm min Climb or up cut 0351 Type of milling operation with MO3 1 climb milling 1 up cut milling Set up clearance Q200 incremental value Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface Set up clearance to the side 0357 incremental value Distance between tool tooth and the wall Depth at front 0358 incremental value Distance between tool tip and the top surface of the workpiece for countersinking at the front of the tool Countersinking offset at front Q359 incremental value Distance by which the TNC moves the tool center away from the hole center HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 O o Ol O O N u lt m ETTIM AAAANARN O N gl w O TAE Re Ea N Ww S ci i 8 2 Cycles for Drilling p and Thread Milling 8 2 Cycles for Drilling ing a
324. ool is positioned to the programmed set up clearance above the workpiece surface The tool moves at the milling feed rate to the workpiece surface From there the cutter advances plunge cutting obliquely into the material to the other end of the slot The tool then moves at a downward angle back to the starting point again with oblique plunge cutting This process steps 2 to 3 is repeated until the programmed milling depth is reached For the purpose of face milling the TNC moves the tool at the milling depth to the other end of the slot Finishing 5 The TNC advances the tool from the slot center tangentially to the contour of the finished part The tool subsequently climb mills the contour with M3 and if so entered in more than one infeed The starting point for the finishing process is the center of the right circle When the tool reaches the end of the contour it departs the contour tangentially At the end of the cycle the tool is retracted at rapid traverse FMAX to the set up clearance and if programmed to the 2nd set up clearance E Before programming note the following The TNC automatically pre positions the tool in the tool axis and working plane During roughing the tool plunges into the material with a helical sideward reciprocating motion from one end of the slot to the other Pilot drilling is therefore unnecessary The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH determines the working direct
325. orking plane see WORKING PLANE Cycle 19 software option 1 page 355 or Q parameters see Principle and Overview page 380 Direction of rotation DR for circular movements If a circular path has no tangential transition to another contour element enter the direction of rotation DR Clockwise direction of rotation DR Counterclockwise direction of rotation DR Radius compensation The radius compensation must be in the block in which you move to the first contour element You cannot begin radius compensation in a circle block It must be activated beforehand in a straight line block see Path Contours Cartesian Coordinates page 158 or approach block APPR block see Contour Approach and Departure page 150 Pre positioning Before running a part program always pre position the tool to prevent the possibility of damaging it or the workpiece 148 Creating the program blocks with the path function keys e The gray path function keys initiate the plain language dialog The TNC 2 asks you successively for all the necessary information and inserts the Miscellaneous function M Bae program block into the part program 1 BLK FORN 0 1 Z X veo 2 20 5 Example programming a straight line ao oo o o o Initiate the programming dialog e g for a straight T E o prog g g g g 0 476 lt _ lt Ine BL Y5 20 END PGM 14 MM A 7 x 10 Enter the coord
326. os minor axis direction Danger of collision Check the position of the tool tip when you program a spindle orientation to the angle that you enter in Q336 for example in the Positioning with Manual Data Input mode of operation Set the angle so that the tool tip is parallel to a coordinate axis Select a disengaging direction in which the tool moves away from the edge of the hole gt Angle for spindle orientation Q336 absolute value Angle at which the TNC positions the tool before it is plunged into or retracted from the bore hole m X D 3 lt 3 D O e e o A UNIVERSAL PECKING Cycle 205 Advanced programming features software option 1 The TNC positions the tool in the spindle axis at rapid traverse FMAX to the programmed set up clearance above the workpiece surface 2 If you enter a deepened starting point the TNC moves at the defined positioning feed rate to the set up clearance above the deepened starting point 3 The tool drills to the first plunging depth at the programmed feed rate F 4 If you have programmed chip breaking the tool then retracts by the entered retraction value If you are working without chip breaking the tool is moved at rapid traverse to the set up clearance and then at FMAX to the entered starting position above the first plunging depth 5 The tool then advances with another infeed at the programmed feed rate If programmed the plunging dep
327. ot locked 1 locked Number of replacement tool RT Maximum tool age TIME1 Maximum tool age TIME2 Current tool age CUR TIME PLC status Maximum tooth length LCUTS Maximum plunge angle ANGLE TT Number of teeth CUT ions Funct itiona 10 8 Add i il ions Funct itiona 10 8 Add Touch probe cycles 990 Execution status 992 Example Assign the value of the active scaling factor for the Z axis to Q25 414 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 34 14 16 TT Wear tolerance in length LTOL TT Wear tolerance in radius RTOL TT Direction of rotation DIRECT 0 positive 1 negative TT Offset in plane R OFFS TT Offset in length L OFFS TT Break tolerance for length LBREAK TT Break tolerance in radius RBREAK PLC value Tool type TYPE 0 milling cutter 21 touch probe Lift off Approach behavior 0 standard behavior 1 effective radius set up clearance is zero O probe monitoring off 1 probe monitoring on Block scan active 1 yes 0 no Search phase Number of the last FN14 error Real execution active 1 execution 2 simulation FN19 PLC Transferring values to the PLC The function FN 19 PLC transfers up to two numerical values or Q parameters to the PLC Increments and units 0 1 um or 0 0001 Example Transfer the numerical value 10 which means 1 um or 0 001 to the PLC HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 ions Funct Itiona 10 8 Add o il
328. ouch probe monitoring Page 210 M143 Delete basic rotation Page 210 M148 Retract the tool automatically from the contour at NC stop Page 211 M149 Cancel M148 The machine tool builder may add some M functions that are not described in this User s Manual Also the machine tool builder can change the meaning and effect of the M functions described here Refer to your machine manual 524 Comparison Functions of the TNC 620 TNC 310 and iTNC 530 Comparison User functions Program entry with HEIDENHAIN conversational programming X X Program entry according to DIN ISO X X Program entry with smarT NC X Position data Nominal positions for lines and arcs in Cartesian coordinates X X Position data Incremental or absolute dimensions X X Position data Display and input in mm or inches X X Position data Display of handwheel traverse when machining with handwheel X superimpositioning Tool compensation In the working plane and tool length X Tool compensation Radius compensated contour look ahead for up to Option 21 99 blocks Tool compensation hree dimensional tool radius compensation Option 09 X Option 09 for MC420 Tool table Save tool data centrally X X Tool table Multiple tool tables with any number of tools X X Cutting data tables Calculation of spindle speed and feed rate X Constant contouring speed Relative to the path of the tool center or relative X X to the tool s cutting edge Pa
329. ous helical path over the entire length of the thread gt 1 several helical paths with approach and departure between them the TNC offsets the tool by 0355 multiplied by the pitch Feed rate for pre positioning Q253 Traversing speed of the tool when moving in and out of the workpiece In mm min Climb or up cut 0351 Type of milling operation with MO3 1 climb milling 1 up cut milling HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Q355 gt 1 8 2 Cycles for Drilling p and Thread Milling j il 8 2 Cycles for Drilling Bin and Thread Milling 268 gt Set up clearance Q200 incremental value Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface gt Depth at front Q358 incremental value Distance between tool tip and the top surface of the workpiece for countersinking at the front of the tool gt Countersinking offset at front Q359 incremental value Distance by which the TNC moves the tool center away from the stud center gt Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute value Coordinate of the workpiece surface 2nd set up clearance Q204 incremental value Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece clamping devices can occur Feed rate for countersinking Q254 Traversing speed of the tool during countersinking in mm min gt Feed rate for milling Q207 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min while milling m x D 3 p D O T e
330. ovement of a rotary axis in such a way that the programmed feed rate also results at the cutting edge of the tool at the tool center point TCP In doing so the TNC takes into account the distance of the TCP from the center of the rotary axis HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 7 5 Miscellaneous J aii for Rotary Axes o il for Rotary Axes N z 75 Miscellaneous F M128 on tilting tables If you program a tilting table movement while M128 is active the TNC rotates the coordinate system accordingly If for example you rotate the C axis by 90 through a positioning command or datum shift and then program a movement in the X axis the TNC executes the movement in the machine axis Y The TNC also transforms the defined datum which has been shifted by the movement of the rotary table M128 with 3 D tool compensation If you carry out a 3 D tool compensation with active M128 and active radius compensation RL RR the TNC will automatically position the rotary axes for certain machine geometrical configurations peripheral milling see Dreidimensionale Werkzeug Korrektur Software Option 2 page 204 Effect M128 becomes effective at the start of block M129 at the end of block M128 is also effective in the manual operating modes and remains active even after a change of mode The feed rate for the compensation movement will be effective until you program a new feed rate or until you cancel M128 with M129 Enter M129 to ca
331. p clearance or if programmed to the 2nd set up clearance and finally to the center of the pocket end position starting position E Before programming note the following The TNC automatically pre positions the tool in the tool axis and working plane The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH determines the working direction If you program DEPTH 0 the cycle will not be executed 8 3 Cycles for a ockets Studs and Slots If you want to clear and finish the pocket with the same tool use a center cut end mill ISO 1641 and enter a low teed rate for plunging Minimum size of the pocket 3 times the tool radius whether if a positive depth is entered the TNC should att Use the machine parameter displayDepthErr to define output an error message on or not off Danger of collision Keep in mind that the TNC reverses the calculation for pre positioning when a positive depth is entered This means that the tool moves at rapid traverse in the tool axis at safety clearance below the workpiece surface 274 212 gt Set up clearance Q200 incremental value Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface gt Depth Q201 incremental value Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of pocket gt Feed rate for plunging Q206 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min when moving to depth If you are plunge cutting into the material enter a value lower than that defined in Q207 gt Plungin
332. p clearance at FMAX 4 At the set up clearance the direction of spindle rotation reverses once again 242 206 gt Set up clearance Q200 incremental value Distance between tool tip at starting position and workpiece surface Standard value approx 4 times the thread pitch gt Total hole depth Q201 thread length incremental value Distance between workpiece surface and end of thread gt Feed rate F Q206 Traversing speed of the tool during tapping gt Dwell time at bottom QO211 Enter a value between 0 and 0 5 seconds to avoid wedging of the tool during retraction gt Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute value Coordinate of the workpiece surface 2nd set up clearance Q204 incremental value Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece clamping devices can occur The feed rate is calculated as follows F S x p F Feed rate mm min S Spindle speed rpm p Thread pitch mm Retracting after a program interruption If you Interrupt program run during tapping with the machine stop button the TNC will display a soft key with which you can retract the tool HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 8 2 Cycles for Drilling p and Thread Milling i i 8 2 Cycles for Drilling Mhin and Thread Milling RIGID TAPPING without a floating tap holder NEW Cycle 207 The TNC cuts the thread without a floating tap holder in one or more passes 1 The TNC positions t
333. parameter in which the first substring is saved Confirm with the ENT key The TNC displays the concatenation symbol Confirm your entry with the ENT key Enter the number of the string parameter in which the second substring is saved Confirm with the ENT key Repeat the process until you have selected all the required substrings Conclude with the END key Example QS10 is to include the complete text of QS12 QS13 and QS14 Parameter contents QS12 Workpiece QS13 Status QS14 Scrap QS10 Workpiece Status Scrap HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 10 11 String Parameters j il 10 11 String Parameters Converting a numerical value to a string parameter With the TOCHAR function the TNC converts a numerical value to a string parameter This enables you to chain numerical values with string variables O Select Q parameter functions STRING Select the STRING FORMULA function ae Select the function for converting a numerical value to a string parameter Enter the number or the desired Q parameter to be converted and confirm with the ENT key If desired enter the number of decimal places that the TNC should convert and confirm with the ENT key Close the parenthetical expression with the ENT key and confirm your entry with the END key Example Convert parameter Q50 to string parameter QS11 use 3 decimal places 436 Copying a substring from a string parameter With the SUBSTR function you can copy a definabl
334. plane There are two functions available for tilting the working plane 3 D ROT soft key in the Manual Operation mode and Electronic Handwheel mode see Activating manual tilting page 65 Tilting under program control Cycle 19 WORKING PLANE in the part program see WORKING PLANE Cycle 19 software option 1 on page 355 The TNC functions for tilting the working plane are coordinate transformations The working plane is always perpendicular to the direction of the tool axis 62 When tilting the working plane the TNC differentiates between two machine types 1 Machine with tilting tables You must tilt the workpiece into the desired position for machining by positioning the tilting table for example with an L block The position of the transformed tool axis does not change in relation to the machine based coordinate system Thus if you rotate the table and therefore the workpiece by 90 for example the coordinate system does not rotate f you press the Z axis direction button in the Manual Operation mode the tool moves In Z direction In calculating the transtormed coordinate system the TNC considers only the mechanically influenced offsets of the particular tilting table the so called translational components Machine with swivel head You must bring the tool into the desired position for machining by positioning the swivel head for example with an L block The position of th
335. playDepthErr to define me whether if a positive depth is entered the TNC should output an error message on or not off Danger of collision Keep in mind that the TNC reverses the calculation for pre positioning when a positive depth is entered This means that the tool moves at rapid traverse in the tool axis at safety clearance below the workpiece surface 276 Ss ze gt Set up clearance Q200 incremental value Distance Example NC blocks a between tool tip and workpiece surface gt Depth Q201 incremental value Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of stud gt Feed rate for plunging Q206 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min when moving to depth If you are plunge cutting into the material enter a low value if you have already cleared the stud enter a higher feed rate gt Plunging depth Q202 incremental value Infeed per cut Enter a value greater than 0 gt Feed rate for milling Q207 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min while milling gt Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute value Coordinate of the workpiece surface ockets Studs and Slots gt 2nd set up clearance Q204 incremental value Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece clamping devices can occur Center in 1st axis Q216 absolute value Center of the stud in the reference axis of the working plane Center in 2nd axis Q217 absolute value Center of
336. played in three dimensions You can rotate the 3 D display about the vertical and horizontal axes The shape of the workpiece blank can be depicted by a frame overlay at the beginning of the graphic simulation In the Test Run mode of operation you can isolate details for magnification see Magnifying details page 460 Press the soft key for 3 D view Rotating the 3 D view Shift the soft key row until the soft key for the rotation functions appears Select the functions for rotation Rotate in 15 steps about the vertical axis S S Rotate in 15 steps about the horizontal axis om raphic Features Software Option 11 1 Graphics Advancec HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 459 il Magnifying details You can magnify details in the Test Run mode as well as a Program Run operating mode in the projection in 3 planes and the 3 D display modes The graphic simulation or the program run respectively must first have been stopped A detail magnification is always effective in all display modes n L Sie e Beles gt Changing the detail magnification The soft keys are listed in the table Interrupt the graphic simulation if necessary Shift the soft key row in the Test Run mode or in a Program Run mode respectively until the soft key for detail enlargement appears oo Select the functions for section magnification Press the corresponding soft
337. prog screens 1 H S 16 40 08 TNC nc_prog screens 113 H 3S 09 10 02 TNC NC_PROG SCREENS 456 H MS 11 45 08 TNC nc_progNscreens ae7 H S 16 40 40 TNC nc_prog screens 1110 H S 16 40 40 TNC nc_prog screens EX4 H ae Hl 8 07 54 34 8 07 55 22 OK DELETE CANCEL DIAGNOSE 15 file s 285 7 MB vacant COPY PASTE OK DELETE CANCEL FIELD FIELD Marking files Tag a single file Tag all files in the directory TAG Untag a single file ES Untag all files UNTAG Some functions such as copying or erasing files can not only be used for individual files but also for several files at once To tag several files proceed as follows Move the highlight to the first file To display the tagging functions press the TAG soft key Tag a file by pressing the TAG FILE soft key Move the highlight to the next file you wish to mark To tag more files press the TAG FILE soft key To copy the marked files with the back soft key leave the TAG function pe 0 delete the marked files press the back soft key to 2 Se exit the marking function and then press the DELETE soft key HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 th mer Manager ing wi 4 3 Work th tne AL Manager ing wi 4 3 Work Renaming a file Move the highlight to the file you wish to rename RENANE Select the renaming function Enter the new file name the file type cannot be changed To rename Press the OK soft key or the ENT key
338. proximated by many short lines defined in Q7 The more calculation steps you define for the lines the smoother the curve becomes E The machining direction can be altered by changing the entries for the starting and end angles in the plane Clockwise machining direction starting angle gt end angle Counterclockwise machining direction starting angle lt end angle The tool radius is not taken into account m 10 13 Programming Examples Center in X axis Center in Y axis Semiaxis in X Semiaxis in Y Starting angle in the plane End angle in the plane Number of calculation steps Rotational position of the ellipse Milling depth Feed rate for plunging Feed rate for milling Set up clearance for pre positioning Definition of workpiece blank Tool call Retract the tool Call machining operation A 48 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Retract in the tool axis end program Subprogram 10 Machining operation Shift datum to center of ellipse Account for rotational position in the plane Calculate angle increment Copy starting angle Set counter Calculate X coordinate for starting point Calculate Y coordinate for starting point Move to starting point in the plane Pre position in tool axis to set up clearance Move to working depth Update the angle Update the counter Calculate the current X coordinate Calculate the current Y coordinate Move to next point Unfinish
339. r 7 Direction in which the TNC moves the selected axis 8 Machine function set by the machine tool builder on RP WN The red indicator lights show the axis and feed rate you have selected It is also possible to move the machine axes with the handwheel during program run if M118 is active Software option 3 Procedure for traversing Select the Electronic Handwheel operating mode Press and hold a permissive button Select the axis x Select the feed rate z Move the active axis in the positive or negative direction oo HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 2 2 Traversing the mone 2 3 Spindle Speed S Feed Rate F and Miscellaneous runet Ai M 2 3 Spindle Speed S Feed Rate F and Miscellaneous Functions M Function In the Manual Operation and Electronic Handwheel operating modes you can enter the spindle speed S feed rate F and the miscellaneous functions M with soft keys The miscellaneous functions are described in Chapter 7 Programming Miscellaneous Functions w The machine tool builder determines which C miscellaneous functions M are available on your control and what effects they have Entering values Spindle speed S miscellaneous function M Ea To enter the spindle speed press the S soft key 1000 Enter the desired spindle speed and confirm your entry with the machine START button The spindle speed S with the entered rom is started wit
340. r Center in 1st axis Q216 absolute value Center of the slot in the reference axis of the working plane Center in 2nd axis Q217 absolute value Center of the slot in the minor axis of the working plane First side length 0218 value parallel to the reference axis of the working plane Enter the length of the slot Second side length Q219 value parallel to the minor axis of the working plane Enter the slot width If you enter a slot width that equals the tool diameter the TNC will carry out the roughing process only slot milling HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 285 8 3 Cycles for ees Studs and Slots 8 3 Cycles for a crets Studs and Slots 286 gt Angle of rotation Q224 absolute value Angle by which the entire slot is rotated The center of rotation lies in the center of the slot gt Infeed for finishing 0338 incremental value Infeed per cut Q338 0 Finishing in one infeed gt Feed rate for plunging Q206 Traversing speed of the tool while moving to depth in mm min Effective only during finishing if infeed for finishing is entered m x D 3 p D Z O 7 e 2 A CIRCULAR SLOT oblong hole with reciprocating plunge cut Cycle 211 Advanced programming features software option Roughing 1 At rapid traverse the TNC positions the tool in the spindle axis to the 2nd set up clearance and subsequently to the center of the right circle From there the t
341. r coordinates angle PA Angular position of the Straight line end point between 360 and 360 The sign of PA depends on the angle reference axis E Angle from angle reference axis to PR is counterclockwise PA gt 0 E Angle from angle reference axis to PR is clockwise PA lt O Example NC blocks 172 Circular path CP around pole CC The polar coordinate radius PR is also the radius of the arc It is defined by the distance from the starting point to the pole CC The last programmed tool position before the CP block is the starting point of the arc 2 gt Polar coordinates angle PA Angular position of the arc end point between 99 999 9999 and 99 999 9999 Direction of rotation DR Example NC blocks CS For incremental coordinates enter the same sign for DR and PA Circular path CTP with tangential connection The tool moves on a circular path starting tangentially from a preceding contour element 6 5 Path Contours Polar Coordinates Polar coordinates radius PR Distance from the arc 4 end point to the pole CC Polar coordinates angle PA Angular position of the arc end point Example NC blocks lt lt The pole CC is not the center of the contour arc HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 173 il N Pw O d o Q Q a AY O 6 5 Path Contours Helical interpolation A helix is a combination of a circular movement in a main plane and a linear movement perpendicular to
342. radius Rounding radius Center offset reference axis Center offset minor axis Spindle orientation angle in degrees center offset Rapid traverse Measuring feed rate Maximum measuring range Safety clearance Reference point from touch probe cycle 360 Value from the active datum table in the active coordinate system 500 Read data of the current tool 950 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 57 1 10 Line 1 OJ A W 1 1to9 X Y Z A B C U V W 1to9 X Y Z A B C U V W 1to9 X Y Z A B C U V W 1to9 X Y Z A B C U V W Column Oriented spindle stop possible 0 no 1 yes Last reference point of a manual touch probe cycle or last touch point from Cycle O without probe length compensation but with probe radius compensation workpiece coordinate system Last reference point of a manual touch probe cycle or last touch point from Cycle 0 without stylus length or stylus radius compensation machine coordinate system Result of measurement of the touch probe cycles 0 and 1 without stylus radius or stylus length compensation Last reference point of a manual touch probe cycle or last touch point from Cycle O without stylus length or stylus radius compensation workpiece coordinate system Oriented spindle stop Read values Tool length L Tool radius R Tool radius R2 Oversize in tool length DL Oversize in tool radius DR Oversize in tool radius DR2 Tool locked TL O n
343. rallel operation Creating programs while another program is being run X X Tilting the working plane with Cycle 19 Option 08 X Option 08 for MC420 Tilting the working plane with the PLANE function X Option 08 for MC420 Rotary table machining Programming of cylindrical contours as if in two axes Option 08 X Option 08 for MC420 Rotary table machining Feed rate in mm min Option 08 X Option 08 for MC420 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 525 il Approaching and departing the contour Via a straight line or arc FK free contour programming Programming of workpieces not correctly dimensioned for NC programming Program jumps Subprograms and program section repeats Program jumps Calling any program as subprogram Test graphics Plan view projection in 3 planes 3 D view Programming graphics 2 D line graphics Machining graphics Plan view projection in 3 planes 3 D view Datum tables for storing workpiece related datums Preset table for saving reference points presets Returning to the contour with mid program startup Returning to the contour after program interruption Autostart Actual position capture Actual positions can be transferred to the NC program Expanded file management Create multiple directories and subdirectories Context sensitive help Help function for error messages TNCguide Browser based context sensitive help system Calculator Entry of text and special characters On the TNC 620 via on screen keyboard
344. ram Section Repeats 372 Label LBL 372 Actions 372 Programming notes 372 Programming a program section repeat 3 2 Calling a program section repeat Siz 9 4 Separate Program as Subprogram 373 Actions 373 Programming notes 373 Calling any program as a subprogram 373 9 5 Nesting 374 Types of nesting 374 Nesting depth 374 Subprogram within a subprogram 374 Repeating program section repeats 376 Repeating a subprogram 377 9 6 Programming Examples 378 22 10 1 Principle and Overview 386 Programming notes 387 Calling Q parameter functions 387 10 2 Part Families Q Parameters in Place of Numerical Values 388 Example NC blocks 388 Example 388 10 3 Describing Contours through Mathematical Operations 389 Function 389 Overview 389 Programming fundamental operations 390 10 4 Trigonometric Functions 301 Definitions 391 Programming trigonometric functions 392 10 5 Calculating Circles 393 Function 393 10 6 If Then Decisions with Q Parameters 394 Function 394 Unconditional jumps 394 Programming If Then decisions 394 Abbreviations used 395 10 7 Checking and Changing O Parameters 396 Procedure 396 10 8 Additional Functions 397 Overview 397 FN14 ERROR Displaying error messages 398 FN 16 F PRINT
345. ram for the group End of main program Beginning of subprogram 1 Group of holes Hole 1 Move to 2nd hole call cycle Move to 3rd hole call cycle Move to 4th hole call cycle End of subprogram 1 i i Program sequence E Program the fixed cycles in the main program E Call the entire hole pattern subprogram 1 E Approach the groups of holes in subprogram 1 call group of holes subprogram 2 E Program the group of holes only once in subprogram 2 O Programming Examples W 82 Call tool center drill Retract the tool Cycle definition Drilling Call subprogram 1 for the entire hole pattern HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Tool change Call tool drill New depth for drilling New plunging depth for drilling Call subprogram 1 for the entire hole pattern Tool change Call tool reamer Cycle definition Reaming it Programming Examples Call subprogram 1 for the entire hole pattern End of main program Beginning of subprogram 1 Entire hole pattern Move to starting point for group 1 Call subprogram 2 for the group Move to starting point for group 2 Call subprogram 2 for the group Move to starting point for group 3 Call subprogram 2 for the group End of subprogram 1 Beginning of subprogram 2 Group of holes 1st hole with active fixed cycle Move to 2nd hole call cycle Move to 3rd hole call cycle Move to 4th hole call cycle End of subprogram 2 j il
346. rameter programming 484 12 7 Setting the Data Interfaces Serial interface on the TNC 620 The TNC 620 automatically uses the LSV2 transmission protocol for serial data transfer The LSV2 protocol is permanent and cannot be changed except for setting the baud rate machine parameter baudRateLsv2 You can also specify another type of transmission interface The settings described below are therefore effective only for the respective newly defined interface Function To set up a data interface select the file management PGM MGT and ee Programming press the MOD key Press the MOD key again and enter the code 12 7 Setting the Data Interfaces number 123 The TNC shows the user parameter SB erauserpatn o ton GfgSerialInterface in which you can enter the following settings CIR Sia E Setting the RS 232 interface er e 7 pe Open the RS232 folder The TNC then displays the following settings Setting the baud rate baudRate You can set the BAUD RATE data transfer speed from 110 to 115 200 h baud Set the protocol protocol The data communication protocol controls the dataflow of a serial transmission comparable to MP5030 of the iTNC 530 Standard data transfer STANDARD Blockwise data transfer not BLOCKWISE possible for transfer via the RS 232 interface Transmission without protocol RAW_DATA HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 485 il 12 7 Setting the Data Interfaces Set the data bits
347. rance deviation for fast contour milling Define machining plane G17 G18 G19 Working plane X Y tool axis Z Working plane Z X tool axis Y Working plane Y Z tool axis X Dimensions G90 G91 Absolute dimensions Incremental dimensions Unit of measure G70 G71 Inches set at start of program Millimeters set at start of program Other G functions G29 G38 G51 79 G98 Transfer the last nominal position value as a pole circle center STOP program run Tool preselection tool table active Cycle call Set label number Non modal function ToT OO MMMM Ms JoJo oO Dr O O 2 Z rr A Program beginning Program call Datum number with G53 Rotation about X axis Rotation about Y axis Rotation about Z axis Q parameter definitions Length wear compensation with T Radius wear compensation with T Tolerance with M112 and M124 Feed rate Dwell time with G04 Scaling factor with G72 Factor for feed rate reduction F with M103 G functions Polar coordinate angle Rotation angle with G73 Tolerance angle with M112 X coordinate of the circle center pole Y coordinate of the circle center pole Z coordinate of the circle center pole Setting a label number with G98 Jump to a label number Tool length with G99 M functions Block number Cycle parameters in machining cycles Value or Q parameter in O parameter definition OQ parameter N lt X aS St OO DDD
348. raphic support for workpiece drawings not dimensioned for NC Subroutines Program section repeats Any desired program as subroutine Fixed cycles Coordinate transformation Q parameters Programming with variables Programming aids Actual position capture Test run graphics Display modes Programming graphics Program Run graphics Display modes Machining time HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Cycles for drilling and conventional and rigid tapping Roughing of rectangular and circular pockets Cycles for pecking reaming boring and counterboring Cycles for milling internal and external threads Finishing of rectangular and circular pockets Cycles for face milling plane and oblique surfaces Cycles for milling linear and circular slots Linear and circular point patterns Contour parallel contour pocket Contour train OEM cycles special cycles developed by the machine tool builder can also be integrated Datum shift rotation mirroring Scaling factor axis Specific Tilting the working plane software option Mathematical functions sin cos root calculation Logical comparisons lt gt Calculating with parentheses tan a arc sine arc cosine arc tangent a e In log absolute value of a number the constant m negation truncation of digits before or after the decimal point Functions for calculation of circles String parameters Calculator Complete list of all current error messag
349. rcle center CC Before programming a circular path C you must first enter the circle center CC The last programmed tool position before the C block is used as the circle starting point Move the tool to the circle starting point Coordinates of the circle center Coordinates of the arc end point gt Direction of rotation DR and if necessary Feed rate F Miscellaneous function M Example NC blocks Full circle For the end point enter the same point that you used for the starting point CS The starting and end points of the arc must lie on the circle Input tolerance up to 0 016 mm selected through the circleDeviation machine parameter Smallest possible circle that the TNC can traverse 0 0016 um HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 6 4 Path vontours Ca Coordinates o i 6 4 Path Contours c Msia Coordinates Circular path CR with defined radius The tool moves on a circular path with the radius R Coordinates of the arc end point Radius R Note The algebraic sign determines the size of the arc Direction of rotation DR Note The algebraic sign determines whether the arc is concave or convex Further entries if necessary Miscellaneous function M Feed rate F Full circle For a full circle program two CR blocks in succession The end point of the first semicircle is the starting point of the second The end point of the second semicircle is the starting point of the first 164 Central a
350. rder to be able to assign various compensation data to a tool indexing tool number insert a line and extend the tool number by a point and a number from 1 to 9 e g T 5 2 You must use tool tables if you wish to use indexed tools such as stepped drills with more than one length compensation value Page 128 your machine tool has an automatic tool changer or you want to fine rough the contour with Cycle 22 see ROUGH OUT Cycle 22 Advanced programming features software option on page 309 Wr Tool table Standard tool data T Number by which the tool is called in the program e g 5 indexed 5 2 NAME Name by which the tool is called in the program Tool name L Compensation value for tool length L Tool length R Compensation value for the tool radius R Tool radius R R2 Tool radius R2 for toroid cutters graphical representation of a Tool radius R2 machining operation with spherical or toroid cutters DL Delta value for tool length L Tool length oversize DR Delta value for tool radius R Tool radius oversize DR2 Delta value for tool radius R2 Tool radius oversize R2 TL Set tool lock TL for Tool Locked Tool locked Yes ENT No NO ENT RT Number of a replacement tool if available RT for Replacement Replacement tool Tool see also TIME2 TIME1 Maximum tool life in minutes This function can vary depending Maximum tool age on the individual machine tool Your machine manual provides more information on TIME1
351. rkpiece surface and root of thread gt Threads per step 0355 Number of thread revolutions by which the tool is moved see figure at lower right 0 one 360 helical line to the thread depth 1 continuous helical path over the entire length of the thread gt 1 several helical paths with approach and departure between them the TNC offsets the tool by Q355 multiplied by the pitch gt Feed rate for pre positioning Q253 Traversing speed of the tool when moving in and out of the workpiece in mm min Climb or up cut 0351 Type of milling operation with Mos 1 climb milling 1 up cut milling gt Set up clearance Q200 incremental value Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface gt Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute value Coordinate of the workpiece surface gt 2nd set up clearance Q204 incremental value Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece clamping devices can occur gt Feed rate for milling 0207 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min while milling Q355 gt 1 THREAD MILLING COUNTERSINKING Cycle 263 Advanced programming features software option 1 The TNC positions the tool in the spindle axis at rapid traverse FMAX to the programmed set up clearance above the workpiece surface Countersinking 2 The tool moves at the feed rate for pre positioning to the countersinking depth
352. robes and Electronic anew 3 1 5 Accessories Manual Operation and Setup 2 1 Switch On swift or 2 1 Switch On Switch Off Switch on Switch on and crossing of the reference points can vary ot depending on the machine tool Refer to your machine manual Switch on the power supply for control and machine The TNC then displays the following dialog TNC is started TNC message that the power was interrupted clear the message The PLC program of the TNC is automatically compiled Switch on external dc voltage The TNC checks the functioning of the EMERGENCY STOP circuit O Cross the reference points manually in the displayed sequence For each axis press the machine START button or x Y Cross the reference points in any sequence Press and hold the machine axis direction button for each axis until the reference point has been traversed If your machine is equipped with absolute encoders you ot can leave out crossing the reference marks In such a case the TNC Is ready for operation immediately after the machine control voltage is switched on A 6 The TNC is now ready for operation in the Manual Operation mode Crossing the reference point in a tilted working plane The TNC automatically activates the tilted working plane if this function was enabled when the control was switched off Then the TNC moves the axes in the tilted coordinate system when an axis direction key is
353. rocess the assigned or imported values by using the functions described below The STRING FORMULA and FORMULA Q parameter functions contain various functions for processing the string parameters Assigning string parameters Page 435 Chain linking string parameters Page 435 Converting a numerical value to a string ae Page 436 parameter Copying a substring from a string a Page 437 parameter Converting a string parameter to a oe Page 438 numerical value Checking a string parameter a Page 439 Finding the length of a string parameter a Page 440 Comparing alphabetic priority PE Page 441 CS When you use a STRING FORMULA the result of the arithmetic operation is always a string When you use the FORMULA function the result of the arithmetic operation is always a numeric value Assigning string parameters You have to assign a string variable before you use it Use the DECLARE STRING command to do so To select the TNC special functions press the SPEC sts FCT key mare Select the DECLARE function ee Select the STRING soft key Example NC block Chain linking string parameters With the concatenation operator string parameter you can make a chain of two or more string parameters O Select Q parameter functions Select the STRING FORMULA function Enter the number of the string parameter in which the TNC is to save the concatenated string Confirm with the ENT key Enter the number of the string
354. rogramming press the FK key To initiate the dialog for free programming of circular arcs press the FC soft key The TNC displays soft keys with which you can directly enter data on the circular arc or the circle center Enter all known data in the block by using these soft keys The FK graphic displays the programmed contour element in red until sufficient data is entered If the entered data describes several solutions the graphic will display the contour element in green see Graphics during FK programming page 180 Circular arc with tangential connection If the circular arc connects tangentially to another contour element initiate the dialog with the FCT soft key o 182 To display the soft keys for free contour programming press the FK key To initiate the dialog press the FCT soft key Enter all known data in the block by using the soft keys Input possibilities End point coordinates T O me Q O om oO Cartesian coordinates X and Y 7N Polar coordinates referenced to FPOL PRON EN PA Example NC blocks Direction and length of contour elements Length of a straight line LEN 5 Gradient angle of a straight line x Chord length LEN of an arc J Gradient angle AN of an entry tangent Center angle of an arc Example NC blocks 6 6 Path Contours FK Free Contour Programmi HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 183 il Circle center CC radius and direction of
355. rom there the cutter advances in the longitudinal direction of the slot plunge cutting obliquely into the material until it reaches the center of the right circle 3 The tool then moves back to the center of the left circle again with oblique plunge cutting This process is repeated until the programmed milling depth is reached For the purpose of face milling the TNC moves the tool at the milling depth to the other end of the slot and then back to the center of the slot Finishing 5 The TNC positions the tool in the center of the left circle and then moves it tangentially on a semicircle to the left end of the slot The tool subsequently climb mills the contour with M3 and if so entered in more than one infeed 6 When the tool reaches the end of the contour it departs the contour tangentially and returns to the center of the left circle 7 Atthe end otf the cycle the tool is retracted at rapid traverse FMAX to the set up clearance and if programmed to the 2nd set up clearance 8 3 Cycles for a ockets Studs and Slots CS Before programming note the following The TNC automatically pre positions the tool in the tool axis and working plane During roughing the tool plunges into the material with a sideward reciprocating motion from one end of the slot to the other Pilot drilling is therefore unnecessary The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH determines the working direction If you program
356. round outside corners on a transitional arc If necessary the TNC reduces the feed rate at outside corners to reduce machine stress for example at very great changes of direction E Inside corners The TNC calculates the intersection of the tool center paths at inside corners under radius compensation From this point it then starts the next contour element This prevents damage to the workpiece The permissible tool radius therefore is limited by the geometry of the programmed contour HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 5 3 Topifompensation k i are Option 2 5 4 Three Dimensional Tool Compensation Sof 5 4 Three Dimensional Tool Compensation Software Option 2 Introduction The TNC can carry out a three dimensional tool compensation 3 D compensation for straight line blocks Apart from the X Y and Z coordinates of the straight line end point these blocks must also contain the components NX NY and NZ of the surface normal vector see figure and explanation further down on this page If in addition you want to carry out a tool orientation or a three dimensional radius compensation these blocks need also a normalized vector with the components TX TY and TZ This vector determines the tool orientation see figure The straight line end point the components for the surface normal vector as well as those for the tool orientation must be calculated by a CAM system Application possibilities Use of tools with dimen
357. rs When a machine axis moves the corresponding position encoder generates an electrical signal The TNC evaluates this signal and calculates the precise actual position of the machine axis If there is a power interruption the calculated position will no longer correspond to the actual position of the machine slide To recover this association incremental position encoders are provided with reference marks The scales of the position encoders contain one or more reference marks that transmit a signal to the TNC when they are crossed over From that signal the TNC can re establish the assignment of displayed positions to machine positions For linear encoders with distance coded reference marks the machine axes need to move by no more than 20 mm for angle encoders by no more than 20 With absolute encoders an absolute position value is transmitted to the control immediately upon switch on In this way the assignment of the actual position to the machine slide position is re established directly after switch on Reference system A reference system is required to define positions in a plane or in space The position data are always referenced to a predetermined point and are described through coordinates The Cartesian coordinate system a rectangular coordinate system is based on the three coordinate axes X Y and Z The axes are mutually perpendicular and intersect at one point called the datum A coordinate identifies the distanc
358. s 506 RS 232 C V 24 interface for HEIDEHAIN devices 506 Non HEIDENHAIN devices 507 Ethernet interface RJ45 socket 507 13 3 Technical Information 508 13 4 Exchanging the Buffer Battery 515 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 27 il Prograeam Einspelchern Editieren 3 TOOL CALL 1 Z 51686 4 L x40 Y 0 RR FRAX H3 L z 18 RO FSSSS ia CC K E 7 C X 7 908 Y 6 787 OR RA i L At18 538 zZ23 35936 RR aha g CC K 25 3a L C Z 160 591 Y 35 707 OA AR 11 L X 7 153 Y 59 553 RR 12 CO X 22 Y 61 693 cow Lia C At16 818 T 75 7T7TTf GR RAR 14 CO x 12 8 v 87 5 15 E 12 5 100 OR l L A 12 5 RR 17 CC X 12 5 87 5 Ta Pie LEREN Bie EEE eS ee e a 2 Jin fa ie c Bs Bs Rit jy juli fo je J e fo Iu a je fe f ain imi f gr iK li gt ID A PERRIS Introduction 1 1 The TNC Lr 1 1 The TNC 620 HEIDENHAIN TNC controls are workshop oriented contouring controls that enable you to program conventional machining operations right at the machine in an easy to use conversational programming language The TNC 620 is designed for milling and drilling machine tools as well as machining centers with up to 5 axes You can also change the angular position of the spindle under program control Keyboard and screen layout are clearly arranged in such a way that the functions are fast and easy to use Programming HEIDENHAIN conversational format
359. s If you are working with tool tables use TOOL DEF to preselect the next tool Simply enter the tool number or a corresponding O parameter or type the tool name in quotation marks HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 5 2 Tool Data k il 5 3 Toft ompensation 5 3 Tool Compensation Introduction The TNC adjusts the spindle path in the spindle axis by the compensation value for the tool length In the working plane it compensates the tool radius If you are writing the part program directly on the TNC the tool radius compensation is effective only in the working plane The TNC accounts for the compensation value in up to five axes including the rotary axes Tool length compensation Length compensation becomes effective automatically as soon as a tool is called and the spindle axis moves To cancel length compensation call a tool with the length L 0 If you cancel a positive length compensation with TOOL uy CALL 0 the distance between tool and workpiece will be reduced After TOOL CALL the path of the tool in the spindle axis as entered in the part program is adjusted by the difference between the length of the previous tool and that of the new one For tool length compensation the TNC takes the delta values from both the TOOL CALL block and the tool table into account Compensation value L DLyooL cay DETAR where L is the tool length L from the TOOL DEF block or tool table DL TOOL CALL is the oversize for length D
360. s If block N is located in a program section repeat enter the number of repetitions to be calculated in the block scan To start the block scan press the machine START button Contour approach see following section Returning to the contour With the RESTORE POSITION function the TNC returns to the workpiece contour in the following situations Return to the contour after the machine axes were moved during a program Interruption that was not performed with the INTERNAL STOP function Return to the contour after a block scan with RESTORE POS AT for example after an interruption with INTERNAL STOP To select returning to the contour press the RESTORE POSITION soft key Restore machine status if required To move the axes in the sequence that the TNC suggests on the screen press the machine START button To move the axes in any sequence press the soft keys RESTORE X RESTORE Z etc and activate each axis with the machine START key Press the LOG FILES soft key To resume machining press the machine START key 472 Program run TESSA full sequence X 89 924 Y 120 126 Z 23 1016 C 0 000 91 S 0VR 10 37 107 F OVR X 49 998 C 0 000 A k T ACTL Y 50 000 Z SZ eas F mm min our 0 517 107 MANUAL START TRAVERSE PROGRAM M3 Be Qa PARAMETER REQUEST 11 6 Automatic Program Start Function The TNC must be specially prepared by the mac
361. s on a circular arc from the last contour point Pe to an auxiliary point Py It then moves on a straight line to the end point Py The arc is tangentially connected both to the last contour element and to the line from Py to Py The radius R uniquely defines the arc Program the last contour element with the end point Pe and radius compensation Initiate the dialog with the APPR DEP key and DEP LCT soft key DEP LCT Enter the coordinates of the end point Py Radius R of the circular arc Enter R as a positive value Example NC blocks HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Last contour element Pe with radius compensation Center angle 180 arc radius 8 mm Retract in Z return to block 1 end program Last contour element Pe with radius compensation Coordinates Py arc radius 8 mm Retract in Z return to block 1 end program 157 6 3 Contour Approz 6 4 Path Contours c Msia Coordinates 6 4 Path Contours Cartesian Coordinates Overview of path functions Line L Chamfer CHF Circle Center CC cc Circle C o Circular arc CR Circular arc CT Corner Rounding RND i FK Free Cont ree Contour Programming 158 Straight line Chamfer between two Straight lines None Circular arc around a circle center CC to an arc end point Circular arc with a certain radius Circular arc with tangential connection to the preceding and subsequent contour elements Circular arc with tangentia
362. seconds from the real time clock Day from the real time clock Month as a number from the real time clock Month as a string abbreviation from the real time clock Two digit year from the real time clock Four digit year from the real time clock In the part program program FN 16 F PRINT to activate the output The TNC then outputs the file PROT1 A through the serial interface CALIBRAT CHART IMPELLER CENTER GRAVITY DATE 27 11 2001 TIME 8 56 34 NO OF MEASURED VALUES 1 X1 149 360 Y1 25 509 Z1 37 000 CS If you use FN 16 several times in the program the TNC saves all texts in the file that you have defined with the first FN 16 function The file is not output until the TNC reads the END PGM block or you press the NC stop button or you close the file with M_ CLOSE In the FN16 block program the format file and the log file with their respective extensions If you enter only the file name for the path of the log Tile the TNC saves the log file in the directory in which the NC program with the FN 16 function is located You can output up to 32 O parameters per line in the format description file HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 ions Funct itiona 10 8 Add o il ions Funct itiona 10 8 Add Displaying messages on the TNC screen You can also use the function FN 16 to display any messages from the NC program in a pop up window on the TNC screen This makes it easy to display explanatory texts
363. sed in a positioning block Behavior with M128 TCPM Tool Center Point Management The machine manufacturer must enter the machine aL geometry in kinematic tables If the position of a controlled tilted axis changes in the program the position of the tool tip to the workpiece remains the same position of the tilted axis until after retracting the tool att For tilted axes with Hirth coupling Do not change the Otherwise you might damage the contour If the M128 function Is active you cannot perform any handwheel positioning during program run with M118 After M128 you can program another feed rate at which the TNC will carry out the compensation movements in the linear axes CS Cancel M128 before positioning with M91 or M92 and before a TOOL CALL To avoid contour gouging you must use only spherical cutters with M128 The tool length must refer to the spherical center of the tool tip If M128 is active the TNC shows the symbol a in the status display M128 and M116 cannot be active at the same time they exclude each other M128 executes compensation movements that must not change the feed rate of the tool relative to the workpiece The compensation movement Is carried out very accurately with a separate feed rate which you can define in the M128 block in parallel and independently of the machining feed rate When M116 is active on the other hand the TNC must calculate the feed rate at the cutting edge during m
364. set table n Select the datum number that you want to activate or ACTIVATE Activate the preset PRESET Confirm activation of the datum The TNC sets the display and if defined the basic rotation T Leave the preset table Activating a datum from the preset table in an NC program To activate datums from the preset table during program run use Cycle 247 In Cycle 247 you define only the number of the datum that you want to activate see DATUM SETTING Cycle 247 on page 349 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 2 4 Datum Setting Without a 3 D Touch a 2 5 Tilting the Working Plane Software opii 1 2 5 Tilting the Working Plane Software Option 1 Application function E The functions for tilting the working plane are interfaced to C the TNC and the machine tool by the machine tool builder With some swivel heads and tilting tables the machine tool builder determines whether the entered angles are interpreted as coordinates of the rotary axes or as angular components of a tilted plane Refer to your machine manual The TNC supports the tilting functions on machine tools with swivel heads and or tilting tables Typical applications are for example oblique holes or contours in an oblique plane The working plane is always tilted around the active datum The program is written as usual in a main plane such as the X Y plane but is executed in a plane that is tilted relative to the main
365. sions that do not correspond with the dimensions calculated by the CAM system 3 D compensation without definition of the tool orientation Face milling compensation of the milling machine geometry in the direction of the surface normal vector 3 D compensation with and without definition of the tool orientation Cutting is usually with the end face of the tool Peripheral milling compensation of the mill radius perpendicular to the direction of movement and perpendicular to the tool direction 3 D radius compensation with definition of the tool orientation Cutting is usually with the lateral surface of the tool 138 Definition of a normalized vector A normalized vector is a mathematical quantity with a value of 1 anda direction The TNC requires up to two normalized vectors for LN blocks one to determine the direction of the surface normal vector and another optional to determine the tool orientation direction The direction of a surface normal vector is determined by the components NX NY and NZ With an end mill and a radius mill this direction is perpendicular from the workpiece surface to be machined to the tool datum Py and with a toroid cutter through Py or Py see figure The direction of the tool orientation is determined by the components TX TY and TZ N 2 a O S CS The coordinates for the X Y Z positions and the surface normal components NX NY NZ as well as TX TY TZ must b
366. so with contour parallel machining Cycles 20 to 25 OEM cycles special cycles developed by the machine tool builder can be integrated Verification graphics machining graphics E Plan view Projection in three planes E 3 D view Tool compensation M120 Radius compensated contour look ahead for up to 99 blocks 3 D machining E M118 Superimpose handwheel positioning during program run Pallet management Communication with external PC applications over COM component HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Input resolution and display step For linear axes to 0 01 um Angular axes to 0 000 01 Double speed control loops are used primarily for high speed spindles as well as linear motors and torque motors Feature Content Level upgrade functions Along with software options significant further improvements of the TNC software are managed via the Feature Content Level upgrade functions Functions subject to the FCL are not available simply by updating the software on your TNC CS All upgrade functions are available to you without surcharge when you receive a new machine Upgrade functions are Identified in the manual with FCL n where n indicates the sequential number of the feature content level You can purchase a code number in order to permanently enable the FCL functions For more information contact your machine tool builder or HEIDENHAIN Intended place of operation The TNC complies with the limits for a
367. spindle axis gt Feed rate for milling O12 Traversing speed of the tool in the working plane Cylinder radius O16 Radius of the cylinder on which the contour is to be machined gt Dimension type ANG LIN Q17 The dimensions for the rotary axis X coordinates of the subprogram are given either in degrees 0 or in mm inches 1 Slot width O20 Width of the slot to be machined gt Tolerance Q21 If you use a tool smaller than the programmed slot width Q20 process related distortion occurs on the slot wall wherever the slot follows the path of an arc or oblique line If you define the tolerance Q21 the TNC adds a subsequent milling operation to ensure that the slot dimensions are a close as possible to those of a slot that has been milled with a tool exactly as wide as the slot With Q21 you define the permitted deviation from this ideal slot The number of subsequent milling operations depends on the cylinder radius the tool used and the slot depth The smaller the tolerance is defined the more exact the slot is and the longer the remachining takes Recommendation Use a tolerance of 0 02 mm Function inactive Enter 0 default setting HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Example NC blocks 8 5 SL Cycles o i 8 5 SL Cycles CYLINDER SURFACE ridge milling Cycle 29 software option 1 Machine and control must be specially prepared by the os machine tool builder for use of this cycle CS Before programming note th
368. stems mentioned above to the TNC If problems occur nevertheless please contact HEIDENHAIN The USB devices appear as separate drives in the directory tree so you can use the file management functions described in the earlier chapters correspondingly In order to remove a USB device you must proceed as follows say Press the PGM MGT soft key to call the file manager MGT Select the left window with the arrow key Use the arrow keys to select the USB device to be removed Scroll through the soft key row y NET cA cr In order to re establish a connection with a USB device that has been removed press the following soft key Select additional functions Select the function for removing USB devices The Exit the file manager Select the function for reconnection of USB devices HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 TNC removes the USB device from the directory tree th mer Manager ing wi 4 3 Work V Sen O O pe am 4 4 Creating and Wri 4 4 Creating and Writing Programs Organization of an NC program in HEIDENHAIN conversational format A part program consists of a series of program blocks The figure at right illustrates the elements of a block The TNC numbers the blocks in ascending sequence The first block of a program is identified by BEGIN PGM the program name and the active unit of measure The subsequent blocks contain information on The workpiece blank Tool definitions
369. t Feed rate for milling O12 Traversing speed of the tool in the working plane Cylinder radius O16 Radius of the cylinder on which the contour is to be machined gt Dimension type ANG LIN Q17 The dimensions for the rotary axis X coordinates of the subprogram are given either in degrees 0 or in mm inches 1 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Example NC blocks 8 5 SL Cycles k i 8 5 SL Cycles CYLINDER SURFACE slot milling Cycle 28 software option 1 Machine and control must be specially prepared by the os machine tool builder for use of this cycle CS Before programming note the following Program defaults for cylindrical surface machining cycles see page 315 This cycle enables you to program a guide notch in two dimensions and then transfer it onto a cylindrical surface Unlike Cycle 27 with this cycle the TNC adjusts the tool so that with radius compensation active the walls of the slot are nearly parallel You can machine exactly parallel walls by using a tool that is exactly as wide as the slot The smaller the tool is with respect to the slot width the larger the distortion in circular arcs and oblique line segments To minimize this process related distortion you can define in parameter O21 a tolerance with which the TNC machines a slot as similar as possible to a slot machined with a tool of the same width as the slot Program the midpoint path of the contour together with the tool radius compensation
370. t Q parameter in which the SOL server reports the result 0 No error occurred 1 Error occurred incorrect handle value outside of value range or incorrect data format Data bank SQL access ID Q parameter with the handle for identifying the result set also see SQL SELECT 428 Example Row number is transferred in a Q parameter m x i 3 R JJ 3 oO D m e Q 3 3 D Q Q D O lt Example Row number is transferred in a Q parameter SQL COMMIT SQL COMMIT transfers all rows in the result set back to the table A lock set with SELECT FOR UPDATE is canceled The handle given in the SQL SELECT command loses its validity Parameter no for result O parameter in which the Sobin SOL server reports the result 0 No error occurred 1 Error occurred incorrect handle or equal entries in columns requiring unique entries Data bank SQL access ID Q parameter with the handle for identifying the result set also see SQL SELECT SQL ROLLBACK The execution of SQL ROLLBACK depends on whether INDEX is programmed E f INDEX is not programmed The result set is not written back to the table any changes insertions are discarded The transaction is closed and the handle given in the SQL SELECT command loses Its validity Typical application Ending a transaction solely containing read accesses f INDEX is pr
371. t in 1st axis 0228 absolute value Stopping point coordinate of the surface to be multipass milled in the reference axis of the working plane 2nd point in 2nd axis 0229 absolute value Stopping point coordinate of the surface to be multipass milled in the minor axis of the working plane 2nd point in 3rd axis Q230 absolute value Stopping point coordinate of the surface to be multipass milled in the spindle axis 3rd point in 1st axis Q231 absolute value Coordinate of point 3 in the reference axis of the working plane 3rd point in 2nd axis Q232 absolute value Coordinate of point 3 in the minor axis of the working plane 3rd point in 3rd axis Q233 absolute value Coordinate of point 3 in the spindle axis HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 0222 O26 Q234 0225 8 6 u for Multipass Milling j il 8 6 Mes for Multipass Milling 2 336 gt 4th point in 1st axis 0234 absolute value Coordinate of point 4 in the reference axis of the working plane gt 4th point in 2nd axis Q235 absolute value Coordinate of point 4 in the minor axis of the working plane gt 4th point in 3rd axis 0236 absolute value Coordinate of point 4 in the spindle axis gt Number of cuts Q240 Number of passes to be made between points 1 and 4 2 and 3 gt Feed rate for milling Q207 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min while milling The TNC performs the first step at half the programmed feed rate
372. t key for the TNC to transfer the value into the active Input box and to close the calculator 4 8 Integrated Pocket 112 4 9 Error Messages Display of errors The TNC generates error messages when it detects problems such as Messages Incorrect data input Logical errors in the program Contour elements that are impossible to machine Incorrect use of the touch probe system 4 9 Error When an error occurs it is displayed in red type in the header Long and multi line error messages are displayed in abbreviated form If an error occurs In the background mode the word Error is displayed in red type Complete information on all pending errors is shown in the error window If a rare processor check error should occur the TNC automatically opens the error window You cannot remove such an error Shut down the system and restart the TNC The error message is displayed in the header until it is cleared or replaced by a higher priority error An error message that contains a program block number was caused by an error in the indicated block or in the preceding block Open the error window Press the ERR key The TNC opens the error window ca and displays all accumulated error messages Close the error window Press the END soft key or END g Press the ERR key The TNC closes the error window HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 113 il Messages LLI o Detailed error messages The TNC displays possib
373. t key to OFF Even when AUTO DRAW ON is active graphics are not generated for program section repeats Generating a graphic for an existing program Use the arrow keys to select the block up to which you want the graphic to be generated or press GOTO and enter the desired block number To generate graphics press the RESET START soft START key Additional functions Generate a complete graphic RESET START Generate interactive graphic blockwise START RESET START Generate a complete graphic or complete it after pe Stop the programming graphics This soft key ine only appears while the TNC is generating the interactive graphics HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Manual operation Programming HEBEL H Graphics 6 L 2 5 R FMAX M3 7 APPR LCT X 10 Y 0 R5 RL 8 FPOL X 100 Y 0 9 FC DR R10 CLSD CCX 0 10 FLT 11 FCT DR R15 CCX 100 CCY 0 12 FLT 13 FCT DR R1 CCPR 40 CCPA 110 14 FLT PDX 100 PDY D15 15 FSELECT1 16 FCT DR R5 17 FLT PDX 10 PDY DIS eoem 18 FCT DR R10 CLSD CCX CCY 19 FSELECT1 As ff 20 DEP LCT X 30 Y Z 100 RS FMAX 21 END PGM HEBEL MM gt _ aa BEGIN END PAGE PAGE START RESET t ii FIND START SINGLE 4 START 4 5 Interactive Program i il Graphics Oo oe 0 Q 2 ad hom vb ad I a Block number display ON OFF E Shift the soft key row see figure at upper right a To show block
374. t patterns on circles and Cycle 221 for point patterns on lines E SL Cycle 14 CONTOUR GEOMETRY E SL Cycle 20 CONTOUR DATA E Cycle 32 TOLERANCE E Coordinate Transformation Cycles Cycle 9 DWELL TIME You can call all other cycles with the functions described as follows HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 i Working with Cycles i i Fs Working with Cycles Calling a cycle with CYCL CALL The CYCL CALL function calls the fixed cycle that was last defined The Starting point of the cycle is the position that was programmed last before the CYCL CALL block To program the cycle call press the CYCL CALL key CALL Press the CYCL CALL M soft key to enter a cycle call If necessary enter the miscellaneous function M for example M3 to switch the spindle on or end the dialog by pressing the END key Calling a cycle with M99 89 The M99 function which is active only in the block in which it is programmed calls the last defined fixed cycle once You can program M99 at the end of a positioning block The TNC moves to this position and then calls the last defined fixed cycle If the TNC is to execute the cycle automatically after every positioning block program the cycle call with M89 To cancel the effect of M89 program M99 in the positioning block in which you move to the last starting point or Define with CYCL DEF a new fixed cycle 222 8 2 Cycles for Drilling Tapping and Thread Milling Overview 240 CENTERING Wi
375. tarting point for thread milling Starting point for countersinking at front The tool moves at the programmed feed rate for pre positioning to the starting plane The starting plane is derived from the algebraic sign of the thread pitch the milling method climb or up cut milling and the number of threads per step The tool then approaches the thread diameter tangentially in a helical movement Depending on the setting of the parameter for the number of threads the tool mills the thread in one helical movement in several offset movements or in one continuous Movement 10 After this the tool departs the contour tangentially and returns to the starting point in the working plane HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 8 2 Cycles for Drilling p and Thread Milling j il 8 2 Cycles for Drilling fpina and Thread Milling 11 At the end of the cycle the TNC retracts the tool in rapid traverse to set up clearance or if programmed to the 2nd set up clearance 266 267 Nominal diameter 0335 Nominal thread diameter Thread pitch Q239 Pitch of the thread The algebraic sign differentiates between right hand and left hand threads right hand thread left hand thread Thread depth Q201 incremental value Distance between workpiece surface and root of thread Threads per step 0355 Number of thread revolutions by which the tool is moved see figure at lower right 0 one helical line to the thread depth 1 continu
376. ted only read access any locks are canceled and the result set is released SQL ROLLBACK WITHOUT INDEX A Multiple transactions can be edited at the same time E You must conclude a transaction even if it consists solely of read accesses Only this guarantees that changes insertions are not lost that locks are canceled and that result sets are released 420 Result set The selected rows are numbered in ascending order within the result set starting from 0 This numbering is referred to as the index The index is used for read and write accesses enabling a row of the result set to be specifically addressed It can often be advantageous to sort the rows in the result set Do this by specifying the table column containing the sorting criteria Also select ascending or descending order SQL SELECT ORDER BY The selected rows that were transferred to the result set are addressed with the HANDLE All following SOL commands use the handle to refer to this set of selected columns and rows When concluding a transaction the handle is released SQL COMMIT or SQL ROLLBACK It is then no longer valid You can edit more than one result set at the same time The SOL server assigns a new handle for each Select command Binding Q parameters to columns The NC program does not have direct access to the table entries in the result set The data must be transferred in Q parameters In the other d
377. ted working plane The TNC places the coordinates in the positioning blocks in the tilted coordinate system Behavior with M130 The TNC places coordinates in straight line blocks in the untilted coordinate system The TNC then positions the tilted tool to the programmed coordinates of the untilted system Subsequent positioning blocks or fixed cycles are carried uy out ina tilted coordinate system This can lead to problems in fixed cycles with absolute pre positioning The function M130 is allowed only if the tilted working plane function is active Effect M130 functions blockwise in straight line blocks without tool radius compensation HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 7 3 Miscellaneous uncet d for Coordinate Data 7 il ontouring Behavior V m 5 LL V 5 O D D 2 lt 74 Miscellaneous Functions for Contouring Behavior Machining small contour steps M97 Standard behavior The TNC inserts a transition arc at outside corners If the contour steps are very small however the tool would damage the contour In such cases the TNC interrupts program run and generates the error message Tool radius too large Behavior with M97 The TNC calculates the intersection of the contour elements as at inside corners and moves the tool over this point Program M97 in the same block as the outside corner E Instead of M97 you should use the much more powerful function M120 LA see
378. ter a value greater than 0 gt Feed rate for milling Q207 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min while milling gt Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute value Coordinate of the workpiece surface gt 2nd set up clearance Q204 incremental value Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece clamping devices can occur Center in 1st axis Q216 absolute value Center of the stud in the reference axis of the working plane Center in 2nd axis Q217 absolute value Center of the stud in the minor axis of the working plane gt Workpiece blank diameter Q222 Diameter of the premachined stud for calculating the pre position Enter the workpiece blank diameter to be greater than the diameter of the finished part gt Diameter of finished part 0223 Diameter of the finished stud Enter the diameter of the finished part to be less than the workpiece blank diameter HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Example NC blocks 8 3 Cycles for eet Studs and Slots i i SLOT oblong hole with reciprocating plunge cut Cycle 210 Advanced programming features software option Roughing 1 At rapid traverse the TNC positions the tool in the spindle axis to the 2nd set up clearance and subsequently to the center of the left circle From there the TNC positions the tool to the set up clearance above the workpiece surface 2 The tool moves at the feed rate for milling to the workpiece surface F
379. th automatic pre positioning 2nd set up clearance optional entry of the centering diameter or centering depth 200 DRILLING With automatic pre positioning 2nd set up clearance 201 REAMING With automatic pre positioning 2nd set up clearance 202 BORING With automatic pre positioning 2nd set up clearance 203 UNIVERSAL DRILLING With automatic pre positioning 2nd set up clearance chip breaking and decrementing 204 BACK BORING With automatic pre positioning 2nd set up clearance 205 UNIVERSAL PECKING With automatic pre positioning 2nd set up clearance chip breaking and advanced stop distance 208 BORE MILLING With automatic pre positioning 2nd set up clearance 206 TAPPING NEW With a floating tap holder with automatic pre positioning 2nd set up clearance 207 RIGID TAPPING NEW Without a floating tap holder with automatic pre positioning 2nd set up clearance 209 TAPPING W CHIP BREAKING Without a floating tap holder with automatic pre positioning 2nd set up clearance chip breaking HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 S fee fey Rey Ret oe p N ul a _ t Sj p 206 207 RT 209 RT t 225 227 229 231 233 235 237 240 242 244 246 8 2 Cycles for Drilling p and Thread Milling f il 8 2 Cycles for Drilling S and Thread Milling 262 THREAD MILLING 262 Cycle for milling a thread in pre drilled material 263 THREAD MILLING CNTSNKG 253 Cycle for
380. th is decreased after each infeed by the decrement 6 The TNC repeats this process 2 to 4 until the programmed total hole depth is reached 7 The tool remains at the hole bottom if programmed for the entered dwell time to cut free and then retracts to the set up clearance at the retraction feed rate If programmed the tool moves to the 2nd set up clearance at FMAX CS Before programming note the following Program a positioning block for the starting point hole center in the working plane with radius compensation RO The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH determines the working direction If you program DEPTH O the cycle will not be executed whether if a positive depth is entered the TNC should att Use the machine parameter displayDepthErr to define output an error message on or not off Danger of collision Keep in mind that the TNC reverses the calculation for pre positioning when a positive depth is entered his means that the tool moves at rapid traverse in the tool axis at safety clearance below the workpiece surface HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 8 2 Cycles for Drilling p and Thread Milling j il 8 2 Cycles for Drilling ing and Thread Milling 205 Set up clearance Q200 incremental value Distance aL between tool tip and workpiece surface Depth Q201 incremental value Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of hole tip of drill taper Feed rate for plunging Q206 Traversi
381. th up to 30 mm t 0 6 mm At a total hole depth exceeding 30 mm t hole depth 50 Maximum advanced stop distance 7 mm The tool then advances with another infeed at the programmed feed rate F The TNC repeats this process 1 to 4 until the programmed depth is reached After a dwell time at the hole bottom the tool is returned to the starting position at rapid traverse FMAX for chip breaking Application Cycle 21 is for PILOT DRILLING of the cutter infeed points It accounts for the allowance for side and the allowance for floor as well as the radius of the rough out tool The cutter infeed points also serve as starting points for roughing 21 Plunging depth Q10 incremental value Dimension EP by which the tool drills in each infeed negative sign for negative working direction Feed rate for plunging O11 Traversing speed in mm min during drilling Rough out tool number Q13 Tool number of the roughing mill 308 Example NC blocks ROUGH OUT Cycle 22 Advanced programming features software option 1 The TNC positions the tool over the cutter infeed point taking the allowance for side into account 2 Inthe first plunging depth the tool mills the contour from the inside outward at the milling feed rate Q12 3 The island contours here C D are cleared out with an approach toward the pocket contour here A B 4 Inthe next step the TNC moves the tool to the next plunging depth and repeats the
382. than 1 up to 99 999 999 Reduction SCL less than 1 down to 0 000 001 Cancellation Program the SCALING FACTOR cycle once again with a scaling factor of 1 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 35 WO 8 7 voor Transformation Cycles AXIS SPECIFIC SCALING Cycle 26 CS Before programming note the following Coordinate axes sharing coordinates for arcs must be enlarged or reduced by the same factor You can program each coordinate axis with its own axis specific scaling factor In addition you can enter the coordinates of a center for all scaling factors The size of the contour is enlarged or reduced with reference to the center and not necessarily as in Cycle 11 SCALING FACTOR with reference to the active datum Effect The SCALING FACTOR becomes effective as soon as it is defined in the program It is also effective in the Positioning with MDI mode of e Transformation Cycles operation The active scaling factor is shown in the additional status display 28 cc Axis and scaling factor Enter the coordinate axis axes as well as the factor s involved in enlarging or reducing Enter a positive value up to 99 999 999 Center coordinates Enter the center of the axis specific enlargement or reduction 5 O O Q 00 The coordinate axes are selected with soft keys Cancellation Program the SCALING FACTOR cycle once again with a scaling factor of 1 for the same axis 354 WORKING PLANE Cyc
383. the part program is executed by movement of either the tool or the machine table on which the workpiece is clamped Nevertheless you always program path contours as if the tool moves and the workpiece remains stationary er LL N So Example r Path function for a straight line X 100 Coordinate of the end point The tool retains the Y and Z coordinates and moves to the position X 100 See figure Movement in the main planes The program block contains two coordinates The TNC thus moves the tool in the programmed plane Example The tool retains the Z coordinate and moves in the XY plane to the position X 70 Y 50 see figure Three dimensional movement The program block contains three coordinates The TNC thus moves the tool in space to the programmed position Example HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 N amm ad LL os rar 0 t 6 2 Fundamenta Circles and circular arcs The TNC moves two axes simultaneously on a circular path relative to the workpiece You can define a circular movement by entering the circle center CC When you program a circle the control assigns it to one of the main planes This plane is defined automatically when you set the spindle axis during a TOOL CALL Z XY also UV XV UY Y ZX also WU ZU WX X YZ also VW YW VZ E You can program circles that do not lie parallel to a main plane by using the function for tilting the w
384. the stud in the minor axis of the working plane First side length Q218 incremental value Length of stud parallel to the reference axis of the working plane gt Second side length 0219 incremental value Length of stud parallel to the minor axis of the working plane 8 3 Cycles for Milli gt Corner radius Q220 Radius of the stud corner gt Allowance in 1st axis Q221 incremental value Allowance for pre positioning in the reference axis of the working plane referenced to the length of the stud HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 277 il 8 3 Cycles for a ockets Studs and Slots CIRCULAR POCKET Cycle 5 Cycles 1 2 3 4 5 17 18 are ina group of cycles called special cycles Here in the second soft key row select the OLD CYCLS soft key 1 The tool penetrates the workpiece at the starting position pocket center and advances to the first plunging depth 2 The tool subsequently follows a spiral path at the feed rate F see figure at right For calculating the stepover factor k see POCKET MILLING Cycle 4 page 272 3 This process is repeated until the depth is reached 4 Atthe end of the cycle the TNC retracts the tool to the starting position CS Before programming note the following This cycle requires a center cut end mill ISO 1641 or pilot drilling at the pocket center Pre position over the pocket center with radius compensation RO Program a positioning block for the starting point in the spindle
385. this plane You program the circular path in a main plane A helix is programmed only in polar coordinates Application Large diameter internal and external threads Lubrication grooves Calculating the helix To program a helix you must enter the total angle through which the tool is to move on the helix in incremental dimensions and the total height of the helix For calculating a helix that is to be cut In an upward direction you need the following data Thread revolutions n Thread revolutions thread overrun at thread beginning and end Total height A Thread pitch P times thread revolutions n Incremental total Number of revolutions times 360 angle for angle IPA beginning of thread angle for thread overrun Starting coordinate Z Pitch P times thread revolutions thread overrun at start of thread Shape of the helix The table below illustrates in which way the shape of the helix is determined by the work direction direction of rotation and radius compensation Right handed Z DR RL Left handed Z DR RR Right handed Z DR RR Left handed Z DR RL Right handed Z DR RR Left handed Z DR RL Right handed Z DR RL Left handed Z DR RR Programming a helix CS Always enter the same algebraic sign for the direction of rotation DR and the incremental total angle IPA The tool may otherwise move in a wrong path and damage the contour For the total angle IPA you can enter a value of 188 2O
386. tion in the position display During closed loop Display spindle position only if spindle is in position control loop During closed loop and M5 Display spindle position only if spindle is in position control loop and with M5 hidePresetTable True Soft key preset table is not displayed False Display soft key preset table 500 DisplaySettings Display step for the individual axes List of all available axes Display step for position display in mm or degrees 0 1 0 05 0 01 0 005 0 001 0 0005 0 0001 0 00005 Display step software option 0 00001 Display step software option Display step for position display in inches 0 001 0 0005 0 0001 0 00005 Display step software option 0 00001 Display step software option DisplaySettings Definition of the unit of measure valid for the display Metric Use metric system Inch Use inch system DisplaySettings Format of the NC programs and cycle display Program entry in HEIDENHAIN plain language or in DIN ISO HEIDENHAIN Program entry in plain language in MDI mode ISO Program entry in DIN ISO in MDI mode Display of cycles TNC_STD Display cycles with comments TNC_PARAM Display cycles without comments 13 1 Machine Specific User Parameters HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 501 il ma 13 1 Machine Specific User Parameters DisplaySettings NC and PLC conversational language settings NC conversational language ENGLISH GERMAN CZECH FRENCH ITALIAN SPANISH PORTUGUESE SWEDISH DANISH FINN
387. tions in a non tilted coordinate system with a tilted working plane M130 201 7 4 Miscellaneous Functions for Contouring Behavior 202 Machining small contour steps M97 202 Machining open contours M98 204 Feed rate for circular arcs M109 M110 M111 205 Calculating the radius compensated path in advance LOOK AHEAD M120 software option 3 206 Superimposing handwheel positioning during program run M118 software option 3 208 Retraction from the contour in the tool axis direction M140 209 Suppressing touch probe monitoring M141 210 Delete basic rotation M143 210 Automatically retract tool from the contour at an NC stop M148 211 7 5 Miscellaneous Functions for Rotary Axes 212 Feed rate in mm min on rotary axes A B C M116 software option 1 212 Shorter path traverse of rotary axes M126 213 Reducing display of a rotary axis to a value less than 360 M94 214 Maintaining the position of the tool tip when positioning with tilted axes TCPM M128 software option 2 215 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 19 il 8 1 Working with Cycles 218 Machine specific cycles Advanced programming features software option 218 Defining a cycle using soft keys 219 Defining a cycle using the GOTO function 219 Cycles Overview 220 Calling cycles 221 8 2 Cycles for Drilling Tapping and Thread Milling 223 Overview 223 CENTERING Cyc
388. to 999 3 0 Any text string in quotes 1 to 65 534 5 0 O to 1099 4 0 13 4 Exchanging the Buffer Battery A buffer battery supplies the TNC with current to prevent the data in RAM memory from being lost when the TNC is switched off If the TNC displays the error message Exchange buffer battery then you must replace the battery CS Backup your data before exchanging the buffer battery To exchange the buffer battery first switch off the TNC The buffer battery must be exchanged only by trained service personnel P AYN 0 iy WN i Battery type 1 Lithium battery type CR 2450N Renata ID 315 878 01 1 The buffer battery is on the main board of the MC 6110 Remove the five screws of the MC 6110 housing cover Remove the cover The buffer battery is at the edge of the PCB Exchange the battery The socket accepts a new battery only in the correct orientation t gt z a SS 13 4 Exchanging the Buffer Battery HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 515 il SYMBOLE 3 D compensation 138 Delta values 140 Face milling 141 Normalized vector 139 Peripheral milling 142 Tool forms 140 Tool orientation 140 3 D view 459 A Accessories 42 Actual position capture 100 Adding comments 110 Automatic program start 473 Automatic tool measurement 126 Axis specitic scaling 354 B Back boring 235 Block Deleting 102 Inserting editing 102 Blocks
389. to previous page Go to next page FEE v D Q m Insert line only possible at end of table INSERT LINE ja Delete line DELETE LINE Find FIND Go to beginning of line BEGIN e Go to end of line E LINE gt HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 8 7 voor Transformation Cycles C il Copy the present value copy FIELD COPY Insert the copied value PASTE FIELD PASTE Add the entered number of lines reference points to the end of the table N LINES Configuring the datum table If you do not wish to define a datum for an active axis press the DEL key Then the TNC clears the numerical value from the corresponding input field Manual operation Table editing xXx Cmm tnc N nc progNscreenszeroshift d Line File OCOCOCOCOOCOOCOOCOOCOOOOOOCOCOCOCOOCOOCOOOOO lt OCOCOOCOCOOCOCOOCOCOOCOOOCOOCOOOCOOOCOOOCOOOCOOOOOOCO To leave a datum table Select a different type of file in file management and choose the desired file e Transformation Cycles Ss After you have changed a value in a datum table you must uy save the change with the ENT key Otherwise the change may not be included during program run S9Sssessegeqg0ggggsesgsgsggggggggsg SBSssssegg0ggggsegegsgsgesgggggggg SBSOSVSssII9 VI IVP NSN SN9sGsN99SN90SsGsgssgssgsgsggsgs in SBSssesesseagsgqgsgggsggsgggsgggggggs0gsg SBSssssegasg0gggggesgsge0ggsggggqggggggg nap SBSsssss9gsg0qg0ggg0ggggsggsggsg
390. to repeat as well as the number of repeats REP 372 9 4 Separate Program as Subprogram Actions 1 The TNC executes the part program up to the block in which another program is called with CALL PGM 2 Then the other program is run from beginning to end 3 The TNC then resumes the first calling part program with the block after the program call Programming notes No labels are needed to call any program as a subprogram The called program must not contain the miscellaneous functions M2 or M30 If you have defined subprograms with labels in the called program you can then use M2 or M30 with the FN 9 IF 0 EQU 0 GOTO LBL 99 jump function to force a jump over this program section The called program must not contain a CALL PGM call into the calling program otherwise an infinite loop will result Calling any program as a subprogram PGM CALL PROGRAM f To select the functions for program call press the PGM CALL key Press the PROGRAM soft key Enter the complete path name of the program you want to call and confirm your entry with the END key If the program you want to call is located in the same directory as the program you are calling it from then you only need to enter the program name If the called program is not located in the same directory as the program you are calling it from you must enter the complete path e g TNC ZW35 SCHRUPP PGM1 H If you want to call a DIN ISO program ent
391. to the set up clearance or if programmed to the 2nd set up clearance and subsequently to the center of the stud 2 From the stud center the tool moves in the working plane to the starting point for machining The starting point lies to the right of the stud by a distance approx 3 5 times the tool radius 3 If the tool is at the 2nd set up clearance it moves at rapid traverse FMAX to the set up clearance and from there advances to the first plunging depth at the feed rate for plunging 4 The tool then moves tangentially to the contour of the finished part and using climb milling machines one revolution 5 The tool then departs the contour on a tangential path and returns to the starting point in the working plane 6 This process 3 to 5 is repeated until the programmed depth is reached 7 Atthe end of the cycle the TNC retracts the tool at FMAX to the set up clearance or if programmed to the 2nd set up clearance and finally to the center of the stud end position starting position CS Before programming note the following The TNC automatically pre positions the tool in the tool axis and working plane The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH determines the working direction If you program DEPTH 0 the cycle will not be executed If you want to clear and finish the stud with the same tool use a center cut end mill ISO 1641 and enter a low feed rate for plunging Use the machine parameter dis
392. tomatic workpiece measurement Cycles 420 427 430 431 0 1 Automatic tool measurement Cycles 480 483 Communication with external PC applications over COM component FK free contour programming Programming in HEIDENHAIN conversational format with graphic support for workpiece drawings not dimensioned for NC Machining cycles Peck drilling reaming boring counterboring centering Cycles 201 to 205 208 240 Milling of internal and external threads Cycles 262 to 265 267 Finishing of rectangular and circular pockets and studs Cycles 212 to 215 Clearing level and oblique surfaces Cycles 230 232 Straight slots and circular slots Cycles 210 211 Linear and circular point patterns Cycles 220 221 Contour train contour pocket with contour parallel machining Cycles 20 to 25 OEM cycles special cycles developed by the machine tool builder can be integrated _Advanced graphic features option number 20 Verification graphics Plan view machining graphics Projection in three planes 3 D view 512 Tool compensation M120 Radius compensated contour look ahead for up to 99 blocks look ahead 3 D machining M118 Superimpose handwheel positioning during program run Pallet management Input resolution and display For linear axes to 0 01 um step Angular axes to 0 00001 Double speed control loops are used primarily for high speed spindles as well as linear motors
393. tool moves to the left on the programmed contour The tool center moves along the contour at a distance equal to the radius Right or left are to be understood as based on the direction of tool movement along the workpiece contour See figures at right CS Between two program blocks with different radius compensations RR and RL you must program at least one traversing block in the working plane without radius compensation that is with R0 Radius compensation does not take effect until the end of the block in which it is first programmed Whenever radius compensation Is activated with RR RL or canceled with RO the TNC positions the tool perpendicular to the programmed starting or end position Position the tool at a sufficient distance from the first or last contour point to prevent the possibility of damaging the contour Entering radius compensation Program any desired path function enter the coordinates of the target point and confirm your entry with ENT pA To select tool movement to the left on the contour RL press the RL soft key or To select tool movement to the right on the contour press the RR soft key or To select tool movement without radius compensation or to cancel radius compensation press the ENT key ENT G To terminate the block press the END key Radius compensation Machining corners Outside corners If you program radius compensation the TNC moves the tool a
394. traverse in probing cycle 10 to 300 000 mm min Rapid traverse in probing cycle Probing feed rate for tool measurement 1 to 3 000 mm min Rapid traverse during tool measurement Calculation of the probing feed rate ConstantTolerance Calculation of the probing feed rate with constant tolerance VariableTolerance Calculation of the probing feed rate with variable tolerance ConstantFeed Constant probing feed rate Max permissible surface cutting speed at the tooth edge 1 to129 m min Permissible surface cutting speed at the circumference of the milling tool Maximum permissible soeed during tool measurement 0 to 1 000 1 min Maximum permissible speed Maximum permissible measuring error for tool measurement 0 001 to 0 999 mm First maximum permissible measurement error Maximum permissible measuring error for tool measurement 0 001 to 0 999 mm Second maximum permissible measurement error CfgT TRoundStylus Coordinates of the stylus center 0 X coordinate of the stylus center with respect to the machine datum 1 Y coordinate of the stylus center with respect to the machine datum 2 Z coordinate of the stylus center with respect to the machine datum Set up clearance above the stylus for pre positioning 0 001 to 99 999 9999 mm Set up clearance in tool axis direction Safety zone around the stylus for pre positioning 0 001 to 99 999 9999 mm Set up clearance in the plane perpendicular to the tool axis 13 1 Machine Specific User Paramet
395. umber FIND oO m Qo H 2 Move to beginning of line r H Z m Move to end of line Copy highlighted field FIELD Insert copied field PASTE FIELD Add the entered number of lines tools at the APPEND end of the table N LINES Insert a line with definable tool number TE LINE Delete current line tool DELETE LINE ee 128 Sort the tools according to the content of a SORT column Show all taps thread cutters in the tool table 17 Show all touch probes in the tool table Ee Leaving the tool table Call the file manager and select a file of a different type such as a part program HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 5 2 Tool Data j il mn 5 2 Tool Data Pocket table for tool changer 7 The machine tool builder adapts the functional range of the pocket table to the requirements of your machine The machine tool manual provides further information For automatic tool changing you need the pocket table tool_p tch The TNC can manage several pocket tables with any file names To activate a specific pocket table for program run you must select it in the file management of a Program Run mode of operation status M Editing a pocket table in a Program Run operating mode Too Press the TOOL TABLE soft key to select the tool table cet Press the POCKET TABLE soft key to select the mee pocket table EDIT Set the EDIT soft key to ON FF oN 130 Pocket table editing
396. unction FN14 ERROR you can call messages under program control The messages were programmed by the machine tool builder or by HEIDENHAIN Whenever the TNC comes to a block with FN 14 in the Program Run or Test Run mode it interrupts the program run and displays a message The program must then be restarted The error numbers are listed in the table below 0 299 FN 14 Error code 0 299 300 999 Machine dependent dialog 1000 1499 Internal error messages see table at right CS The machine tool builder can change the FN14 ERROR function Refer to your machine manual Example NC block The TNC is to display the text stored under error number 254 Error message predefined by HEIDENHAIN 1000 Spindle 1001 Tool axis is missing 1002 Tool radius too small 1003 Tool radius too large 1004 Range exceeded 1005 Start position incorrect 1006 ROTATION not permitted 1007 SCALING FACTOR not permitted 1008 MIRROR IMAGE not permitted 1009 Datum shift not permitted 1010 Feed rate is missing 1011 Input value incorrect 1012 Incorrect sign 1013 Entered angle not permitted 1014 Touch point inaccessible 1015 Too many points 1016 Contradictory input 398 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 1024 1025 1026 1027 1028 1029 1030 1031 1032 1033 1034 1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 1040 1041 1042 1043 1044 1045 1046 1047 1048 1049 1050 1051 CYCL incomplete Plane wrongly defined Wrong axis programmed
397. und in more than one place the TNC returns the first place at which it finds the substring Example Search through QS10 for the text saved in parameter QS13 Begin the search at the third place HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 10 11 String Parameters il 10 11 String Parameters Finding the length of a string parameter The STRLEN function returns the length of the text saved in a selectable string parameter Select Q parameter functions Select the FORMULA function Enter the number of the Q parameter in which the TNC is to save the ascertained string length Confirm with the ENT key Shift the soft key row FORMULA Select the function for finding the text length of a string parameter STRLEN Enter the number of the OS parameter whose length the TNC is to ascertain and confirm with the ENT key Close the parenthetical expression with the ENT key and confirm your entry with the END key Example Find the length of QS15 440 Comparing alphabetic priority With the STRCOMP function you can compare string parameters for alphabetic priority FORMULA STRCOMP Select Q parameter functions Select the FORMULA function Enter the number of the Q parameter in which the TNC is to save the result of comparison Confirm with the ENT key Shift the soft key row Select the function for comparing string parameters Enter the number of the first OS parameter to be compared and confirm with the ENT key Enter t
398. unted handwheel or Up to three HR 150 panel mounted handwheels via HRA 110 handwheel adapter F E E 13 3 Technical Information TS 220 3 D touch trigger probe with cable connection or TS 440 3 D touch trigger probe with infrared transmission E TS 444 Battery free 3 D touch trigger probe with infrared transmission TS 640 3 D touch trigger probe with infrared transmission TS 740 High precision 3 D touch trigger probe with infrared transmission TT 140 3 D touch trigger probe for workpiece measurement _Software option 1 option number 08 Rotary table machining Programming of cylindrical contours as if in two axes I Touch probes Feed rate in mm min Coordinate transformation Tilting the working plane Interpolation Circle in 3 axes with tilted working plane 3 D machining Motion control with very little jerk HSC filter 3 D tool compensation through surface normal vectors only 1TNC 530 Keeping the tool normal to the contour Tool radius compensation normal to the tool direction Interpolation Linear in 5 axes Subject to export permit Block processing time 1 5 ms HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 511 il 13 3 Technical Information Touch probe cycles Compensation of tool misalignment in manual mode Compensation of tool misalignment in automatic mode Cycles 400 to 405 Datum setting in manual mode Datum setting in automatic mode Cycles 410 419 Au
399. ur subprogram Define machining parameters Pre position rotary table Cycle call Retract in the tool axis end program Contour subprogram description of the midpoint path Data for the rotary axis are entered in mm Q17 1 8 5 SL Cycles S i 28 Saj9A9D 1S G s n 8 5 SL Cycles Note E Cylinder centered on rotary table E Datum at center of rotary table T m J m Z T gt zZ Z O NO X 30 50 157 Call tool tool axis is Y Retract the tool Position tool on rotary table center Define contour subprogram Define machining parameters Remachining active Pre position rotary table Cycle call Retract in the tool axis end program 329 Contour subprogram Data for the rotary axis are entered in mm Q17 1 8 5 SL Cycles W 30 8 6 Cycles for Multipass Milling Overview The TNC offers three cycles for machining the following surface types Flat rectangular surfaces Flat oblique angled surfaces Surfaces that are inclined in any way Twisted surfaces 230 MULTIPASS MILLING For flat rectangular surfaces 231 RULED SURFACE For oblique inclined or twisted surfaces 232 FACE MILLING For level rectangular surfaces with indicated oversizes and multiple infeeds HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 332 334 337 8 6 u for Multipass Milling k il 8 6 Mes for Multipass Milling MULTIPASS MILLING Cycle 230 Advanced programming features softw
400. urns to the starting point of machining 5 Steps 2 to 4 are repeated until the programmed milling depth Q1 is reached 6 Finally the tool retracts in the tool axis to the clearance height or to the position last programmed before the cycle 320 gt Milling depth Q1 incremental value Distance between the cylindrical surface and the floor of the contour Enter the milling depth to be greater than the tooth length LCUTS gt Finishing allowance for side O3 incremental value Finishing allowance on the ridge wall The finishing allowance increases the ridge width by twice the entered value gt Set up clearance O6 incremental value Distance between the tool tip and the cylinder surface The set up clearance entered must always be greater than the tool radius gt Plunging depth Q10 incremental value Dimension by which the tool plunges in each infeed Enter a value less than the cylinder radius Feed rate for plunging O11 Traversing speed of the tool in the spindle axis gt Feed rate for milling O12 Traversing speed of the tool in the working plane Cylinder radius O16 Radius of the cylinder on which the contour is to be machined gt Dimension type ANG LIN Q17 The dimensions for the rotary axis X coordinates of the subprogram are given either in degrees 0 or in mm inches 1 gt Ridge width O20 Width of the ridge to be machined HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Example NC blocks 8 5 SL
401. w the tool is to move between machining processes 0 Move to the set up clearance between operations 1 Move to the 2nd set up clearance between machining operations HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Example NC blocks Point Patterns Ining ach Pa V amp gt Q q 0 C i 8 4 Cycles SiMachining Point Patterns Definition of workpiece blank Tool call Retract the tool Cycle definition drilling N 98 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Define cycle for circular pattern 1 CYCL 200 is called automatically Q200 Q203 and Q204 are effective as defined in Cycle 220 Define cycle for circular pattern 2 CYCL 200 is called automatically Q200 Q203 and Q204 are effective as defined in Cycle 220 Retract in the tool axis end program Point Patterns Ining ach thon V K Q gt Q x 00 j i 8 5 SL Cycles 8 5 SL Cycles Fundamentals SL cycles enable you to form complex contours by combining up to 12 subcontours pockets or islands You define the individual subcontours in subprograms The TNC calculates the total contour from the subcontours Subprogram numbers that you enter in Cycle 14 CONTOUR GEOMETRY E The memory capacity for programming the cycle is limited You can program up to 1000 contour elements in one cycle SL cycles conduct comprehensive and complex internal calculations as well as the resulting machining operations For safety reasons
402. w In the table automatically If inch display is active enter the value in inches and the TNC will internally convert the entered values to mm HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 59 il Editing the preset table Select beginning of table BEGIN Select end of table Select previous page in table PAGE JRE v D Qo m Select next page in table Select the functions for preset entry CHANGE PRESET i Display Basic Transformation Axis Offset BE selection TRANSFORN Activate the datum of the selected line of the ACTIVATE preset table PRESET Add the entered number of lines to the end of the APPEND table 2nd soft key row N LINES Copy the highlighted field 2nd soft key row copy FIELD Insert the copied field 2nd soft key row PASTE FIELD Reset the selected line The TNC enters In all RESET columns 2nd soft key row 2 4 Datum Setting Without a 3 D Touch aa at Insert a single line at the end of the table ae 2nd soft key row LINE Delete a single line at the end of the table o 2nd soft key row LINE 60 Activating a datum from the preset table in the Manual Operation mode resets the active datum shift mirroring rotation and ath When activating a datum from the preset table the TNC scaling factor However a coordinate transformation that was programmed in Cycle 19 Tilted Working Plane remains active E Select the Manual Operation mode Display the pre
403. w a block number in the graphic window Set the SHOW OMIT BLOCK NR soft key to SHOW 180 Pos iran ina Programming HEBEL H With 3 TOOL CALL 2 Z 53500 F500 4 5 6 7 APPR LCT X 10 Y 0 RS RL 8 FPOL X 100 Y 0 9 FC DR R10 CLSD CCX 0 10 FLT 11 FCT DR R15 CCX 100 CCY 0 12 FLT 13 FCT DR R10 CCPR skia CCPA 110 14 FLT PDX 100 PDY 0 D1 ECT1 15 18 FCT me CLSD CCX 0 CCY 0 19 FSELE 20 DEP tor X 30 Y 0 Z 100 R5 FMAX 21 END PGM HEBEL MM TI SHOW SELECT START a SOLUTION SOLUTION l 4 z ae DIAGNOSE iL Initiating the FK dialog If you press the gray FK button the TNC displays the soft keys you can use to initiate an FK dialog see the following table Press the FK button a second time to deselect the soft keys If you Initiate the FK dialog with one of these soft keys the TNC shows additional soft key rows that you can use for entering known coordinates directional data and data regarding the course of the contour Straight line with tangential connection FLT Straight line without tangential connection FL iin Circular arc with tangential connection Fer Circular arc without tangential connection Pole for FK programming 7 7 v O O e Pole for FK programming To display the soft keys for free contour programming press the FK key To initiate the dialog for defining the pole press the i FPOL soft key The TNC then displays the axis
404. wish to find 40 END Select the search function The TNC superimposes the search window and displays the available search functions in the soft key row see table of search functions Enter the text to be searched for Please note that the search is case sensitive Start the search process The TNC moves to the next block containing the text you are searching for Repeat the search process The TNC moves to the next block containing the text you are searching for End the search function HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Program run full sequence Programming 14 H BEGIN PGM 14 MM 1 BLK FORM 1 Z X Y Z 20 2 BLK FORM 2 X 10 Y 100 Z 0 3 TOOL CALL 9 Z 53500 4 24 100 RO FMAX M13 5 L X 5 Y 50 R FMAX E ey 10 RND R 7 5 Search Replace sE AE iik Find text _ CURRENT WORD T E 1a RADARS S SS LLt OS 4 4 i T PE wae Replace with REPLACE x gry REPLACE ALL ia E fioa ro mnax earch toea tO CANCEL DIAGNOSE CURRENT REPLACE moo inal WORD FIND REPLACE ALL END CANCEL FIELD FIELD 105 4 4 Creating and Wri mt Programs Find Replace any text CS The find replace function is not possible if a program is protected the program is currently being run by the TNC When using the REPLACE ALL function ensure that you do not accidentally replace text that you do not want to change Once replaced such text cannot be restored If required select the block contai
405. wish to store the new program Enter the new program name and confirm your entry with the ENT key To select the unit of measure press the MM or INCH soft key The TNC switches the screen layout and initiates the dialog for defining the BLK FORM ls z Enter the spindle axis Enter in sequence the X Y and Z coordinates of the MIN point Enter in sequence the X Y and Z coordinates of the MAX point HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 E E aT Programming Workpiece blank def maximum Z BEGIN PGM 1 MM 1 BLK FORM 0 1 Z X 0 Y 0 Z 20 2 BLK FORM 0 2 X 100 Y 180 3 TOOL CALL 5 Z 53000 4 L X 20 Y 30 RO FMAX M3 5 END PGM 1 MM V re O O pe A 4 4 Creating and Wri 4 4 Creating and wrtli Programs Example Display the BLK form in the NC program The TNC automatically generates the block numbers as well as the BEGIN and END blocks CS If you do not wish to define a blank form cancel the dialog at Working spindle axis X Y Z by pressing the DEL key The TNC can display the graphics only if the shortest side is at least 50 um long and the longest side is no longer Han Se See S Program begin name unit of measure Spindle axis MIN point coordinates MAX point coordinates Program end name unit of measure Programming tool movements in conversational format To program a block initiate the dialog by pressing a function key In the screen headline the TNC then asks you
406. without compensation from the center on a semicircle to the offset at front and then follows a circular path at the feed rate for countersinking 8 The tool then moves in a semicircle to the hole center Thread milling 9 The TNC moves the tool at the programmed feed rate for pre positioning to the starting plane for the thread The starting plane is determined from the thread pitch and the type of milling climb or up cut 10 Then the tool moves tangentially on a helical path to the thread diameter and mills the thread with a 360 helical motion 11 After this the tool departs the contour tangentially and returns to the starting point in the working plane HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 8 2 Cycles for Drilling p and Thread Milling j il 8 2 Cycles for Drilling Ming and Thread Milling 12 At the end of the cycle the TNC retracts the tool at rapid traverse to the set up clearance or if programmed to the 2nd set up clearance 258 264 Nominal diameter 0335 Nominal thread diameter Thread pitch Q239 Pitch of the thread The algebraic sign differentiates between right hand and left hand threads right hand thread left hand thread Thread depth Q201 incremental value Distance between workpiece surface and root of thread Total hole depth 0356 incremental value Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of hole Feed rate for pre positioning Q253 Traversing speed of the tool when moving in and out
407. working plane with mathematical angles rotary axis coordinates calculated by the TNC A axis Q120 B axis Q121 C axis Q122 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 m Preassigned Q Parameters o il Mo 12 Preassigned Q Parameters Measurement results from touch probe cycles see also User s Manual for Touch Probe Cycles Angle of a straight line Q150 Center in reference axis Q151 Center in minor axis Q152 Diameter Q153 Pocket length 0154 Pocket width Q155 Length of the axis selected in the cycle Q156 Position of the centerline Q157 Angle of the A axis 0158 Angle of the B axis 0159 Coordinate of the axis selected in the cycle Q160 Center in reference axis Q161 Center in minor axis Q162 Diameter Q163 Pocket length Q164 Pocket width Q165 Measured length Q166 Position of the centerline Q167 _Determined space angle Parameter value Rotation about the A axis Q170 Rotation about the B axis Q171 Rotation about the C axis Q172 Preassigned Q Parameters Good Q180 Rework Q181 Scrap 0182 Reserved Q190 Reserved Q191 Reserved Q192 Reserved Q193 Markers for cycles 0195 Markers for cycles 0196 Markers for cycles machining patterns 0197 Number of the last active measuring cycle 0198 Tool within tolerance Q199 0 0 Tool is worn LTOL RTOL is exceeded Q199 1 0 Tool is broken LBREAK RBREAK is 0199 2 0 exceeded HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 y i 10 13 Programming Examples Program sequence E The contour of the ellipse is ap
408. xample M_APPEND ALL_DISPLAY Outputs O parameter values regardless of MM INCH setting of the MOD function MM_DISPLAY Outputs O parameter values in millimeters if MM display is set in the MOD function INCH_DISPLAY Converts O parameter values to inches if INCH display is set in the MOD function L_ENGLISH Display text only in English conversational L_ GERMAN Display text only in German conversational L CZECH Display text only in Czech conversational L_FRENCH Display text only in French conversational L_ITALIAN Display text only in Italian conversational L_SPANISH Display text only in Spanish conversational L_SWEDISH Display text only in Swedish conversational L_DANISH Display text only in Danish conversational HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 ions Funct itiona 10 8 Add i il ions Funct itiona 10 8 Add L_FINNISH L_DUTCH L_POLISH L_PORTUGUE L_HUNGARIA L_RUSSIAN L_ SLOVENIAN L_ALL HOUR MIN SEG DAY MONTH STR_MONTH YEAR2 YEAR4 404 Display text only in Finnish conversational Display text only in Dutch conversational Display text only in Polish conversational Display text only in Portuguese conversational Display text only in Hungarian conversational Display text only in Russian conversational Display text only in Slovenian conversational Display text independently of the conversational language Number of hours from the real time clock Number of minutes from the real time clock Number of
409. xis mirrored 4 Z axis mirrored 64 U axis mirrored Active datum shift 220 Traverse range 230 Nominal position in the REF system 240 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 BR By BR BR BY gt oO _ to 9 to 9 128 V axis mirrored 256 W axis mirrored Combinations sum of individual axes Active scaling factor in X axis Active scaling factor in Y axis Active scaling factor in Z axis Active scaling factor in U axis Active scaling factor in V axis Active scaling factor in W axis 3 D ROT A axis 3 D ROT B axis 3 D ROT C axis Tilted working plane active Inactive 1 0 in a Program Run operating mode Tilted working plane active inactive 1 0 in a Manual operating mode X axis Y axis Z axis A axis B axis C axis U axis V axis W axis Negative software limit switch in axes 1 to 9 Positive software limit switch in axes 1 to 9 Software limit switch on or off O on 1 off X axis ions Funct itiona 10 8 Add ions Funct itiona 10 8 Add Current position in the active coordinate system 270 TS triggering touch probe 350 412 1 50 g1 52 53 54 55 56 Oo o1f BY Ww o BY O O Y axis Z axis A axis B axis C axis U axis V axis W axis X axis Y axis Z axis A axis B axis C axis U axis V axis W axis Touch probe type Line in the touch probe table Effective length Effective ball
410. y the machine tool builder is not possible 64 Activating manual tilting 1 Manual operation Programming ont E SLDN EX To select manual tilting press the 3 D ROT soft key LA Use the arrow keys to move the highlight to the Manual Operation menu item Open the selection menu with the GOTO key and use the arrow key to select the Active menu item confirm with the ENT key Fea W 2s T 4 Zs a F mm min Our 150 M5 91 S OVR 11 54 DIAGNOSE 150 F OVR a Use the arrow keys to position the highlight on the We omen MO desired rotary axis Enter the tilt angle or ea Press the CONFIRM VALUE soft key to confirm the a current REF position of the active rotary axes oy x To conclude entry press the OK soft key To cancel the entry press the CANCEL soft key To reset the tilting function set the desired operating modes in the menu Tilt working plane to inactive 2 5 Tilting the Working Plane Software Opti If the tilted working plane function Is active and the TNC moves the machine axes in accordance with the tilted axes the status display shows the e symbol If you activate the Tilt working plane function for the Program Run operating mode the tilt angle entered in the menu becomes active In the first block of the part program If you use Cycle 19 WORKING PLANE in the machining program the angle values defined there are in e
411. yDepthErr to define uy whether if a positive depth is entered the TNC should output an error message on or not off Danger of collision Keep in mind that the TNC reverses the calculation for pre positioning when a positive depth is entered This means that the tool moves at rapid traverse in the tool axis at safety clearance below the workpiece surface 280 214 gt Set up clearance Q200 incremental value Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface gt Depth Q201 incremental value Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of pocket gt Feed rate for plunging Q206 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min when moving to depth If you are plunge cutting into the material enter a value lower than that defined in Q207 gt Plunging depth Q202 incremental value Infeed per cut gt Feed rate for milling Q207 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min while milling Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute value Coordinate of the workpiece surface gt 2nd set up clearance Q204 incremental value Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece clamping devices can occur Center in 1st axis Q216 absolute value Center of the pocket in the reference axis of the working plane Center in 2nd axis Q217 absolute value Center of the pocket in the minor axis of the working plane gt Workpiece blank diameter Q222 Diameter of the premachined p
412. zed Q parameters are permissible in all FK elements except in elements with relative references e g RX or RAN or in elements that are referenced to other NC blocks If both FK blocks and conventional blocks are entered in a program the FK contour must be fully defined before you can return to conventional programming The TNC needs a fixed point from which it can calculate the contour elements Use the gray path function keys to program a position that contains both coordinates of the working plane immediately before programming the FK contour Do not enter any Q parameters in this block If the first block of an FK contour is an FCT or FLT block you must program at least two NC blocks with the gray path function keys to fully define the direction of contour approach Do not program an FK contour immediately after an LBL label CS Creating FK programs for TNC 4xx For a TNC 4xx to be able to load FK programs created on an TNC 620 the individual FK elements within a block must be in the same sequence as displayed in the soft key row 6 6 Path Contours FK Free Contour Programming Software Option HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 179 il 2 me OQ O D n 6 6 Path Contours FK Free Contour Programmi Graphics during FK programming CS If you wish to use graphic support during FK programming select the PROGRAM GRAPHICS screen layout see Programming and Editing on page 35 Incomplete coordinate
413. zed vector 139 Permissible tool forms 140 Using other tools Delta values 140 3 D compensation without tool orientation 140 Face milling 3 D compensation with and without tool orientation 141 Peripheral milling 3 D radius compensation with workpiece orientation 142 16 6 1 Tool Movements 146 Path functions 146 FK free contour programming Advanced programming features software option 146 Miscellaneous functions M 146 Subprograms and program section repeats 146 Programming with Q parameters 146 6 2 Fundamentals of Path Functions 147 Programming tool movements for workpiece machining 147 6 3 Contour Approach and Departure 150 Overview Types of paths for contour approach and departure 150 Important positions for approach and departure 151 Approaching on a straight line with tangential connection APPR LT 153 Approaching on a straight line perpendicular to the first contour point APPR LN 153 Approaching on a circular path with tangential connection APPR CT 154 Approaching on a circular arc with tangential connection from a straight line to the contour APPR LCT 155 Departing on a straight line with tangential connection DEP LT 156 Departing on a straight line perpendicular to the last contour point DEP LN 156 Departure on a circular path with tangential connection DEP CT 157 Departing on a circular arc

636 026-20 (SW01)

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents